PG-Catalog Spec Guide

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems
Specification Guide
Siemens Worldwide
Siemens is recognized throughout the
world as an innovative supplier of quality
electrical and electronic products and
systems. For 150 years, Siemens technology has laid the groundwork for pioneering achievements in a number of
dynamic industries, including:
Power Generation and Distribution
Factory Automation
Information Systems
Telecommunications
Medical Systems
Automotive
Electronic Components
Siemens Facts
Siemens employs about 390,000
people in over 190 countries, with
over 50,000 in the US
Siemens routinely invests over 10%
of total revenues in research and
development
Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.
Headquartered in Alpharetta, Georgia,
Siemens Energy & Automation is one of
the largest manufacturers of electrical
distribution equipment, targeting the
industrial, construction, utility, and OEM
markets.
Table 0.1
Contents
Introduction
Switchgear
Products
Engineered
Products
Control
Products
Circuit
Protection
Devices
Residential
Products
Section
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Other
Products and
Services
20
General
Technical
& Application
Information
21
SE&A Facts
27 Manufacturing Facilities
Over 100 U.S. Sales Offices
Over 3000 Authorized Distributors
National Field Service Network
The Specification Guide
Siemens Energy & Automation brings to
market one of the worlds most comprehensive lines of electrical distribution
equipment in the industry; the goal of this
edition of the Specification Guide, is to
present an even more efficient, logical,
and easy-to-use source of information
than in previous editions. These pages
are backed by Siemens world-renowned
commitment to research, development,
engineering innovation, and unparalleled
service and support.
Description
Siemens Overview
Electrical Power Distribution Total Capability
Siemens Product Literature Cross-Reference
ACCESS System
Medium Voltage Switchgear38kV
Medium Voltage Switchgear5 through 15kV
480V Metal Enclosed Switchgear
Power Switching Centers
Secondary Unit Substations
Sentron Switchboards
Commercial Metering Switchboards
Sentron Panelboards
Sentron Busway, XL-U and XJ-L Busway Systems
Transformers
Medium Voltage Controllers Series 81000
Motor Control Centers
Programmable Controllers
AC Controls
SB Encased System Breakers
Sentron Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Enclosed Switches
Load Centers
Metering
Drives
Motors
Voltage Regulators
Technical Training
Types of Power Distribution Systems
Ground Fault Protection
Overcurrent Protection and Coordination
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology
System Analysis
Series-Connected Combination Ratings
Harmonics/K-Factor Ratings
Codes and Standards
Motor Full Load Currents
Transformer Full Load Currents
Transformer Normal Load/Fault Currents
Conductor Ampacities
Formulas
Grounding Conductors
Product/Subject Index
LV Switchgear
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
Page
1
2
4
5
19
31
50
69
75
99
145
155
177
225
239
261
281
285
313
326
355
371
375
399
408
412
413
415
418
424
426
429
430
431
433
434
434
435
436
437
437
438
Secondary-Unit Substations

General
Using the Guide

The Specification Guide presents
product information in the same
manner as the flow of power in
an electrical distribution system,
that is, from the power supply,
through distribution, then to the
components at the utilization
point. There are four organizational tools to help in locating
information:
Table of Contents (page 1).
The total system flow chart on
this and facing page a quick
reference to pages covering
particular products.
The Product / Subject index
found on the last three pages
of the catalog.
Guide Words at the upper
right of each page summarizing the type of information
found there.
Each section is typically arranged
as follows: General and construction details, followed by Technical
ratings and data, Dimensional
data, and finally, Guide Form
Specifications.
2
Siemens ACCESS System

See pages 518 for an in-depth
discussion of this intelligent software / hardware electrical distribution monitoring and control
system. References to ACCESScompatible devices are made
throughout the Guide.
Measures and Weights
All dimensions and weights are
expressed in inches and millimeters; pounds and kilograms.
They are included for reference
purposes only and are not to be
used for design or construction
purposes.
Specification Guide
Technical Application
Information
Updated discussions, standards, formulas, and other
items of interest begin on
page 415.
CSI Section 16470

CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
General
ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

General
System Overview
ACCESS enables users to connect new
or retrofitted Siemens intelligent metering and protective devices in switchboards, switchgear, and motor control
centers via a twisted pair of wires, in
order to access critical electrical operating information.
ACCESS provides a graphical user interface for viewing and reporting information such as real-time, historical, and
min / max data on a desktop computer
or field-installed industrial computer. The
field device network uses an industrystandard RS-485 twisted pair, which has
galvanic isolation of up to 500 volts.
Siemens SEAbus communications
protocol is utilized on the RS-485 high
speed LAN. SEAbus is an open protocol
with complete documentation allowing
users to integrate Siemens devices
directly into other customized communications systems.
Siemens ACCESS Electrical Distribution
Communications System meets ANSI /
IEEE C37.90.1, C37.90.2, and RFI /
EMI 6241 specifications.
Primary Functions
Reducing costly down time by identifying system problems well in advance of tripping.
Providing data for more efficient allocation of power usage cost, and providing accurate verification of utility
billing.
Identifying and controlling peak
power demand. Allowing actions
such as load shedding, changes in
billing structure from the utility, or
other remedial steps to minimize
power cost.
Providing data to plan substation
expansion needs, such as the ability
to know steady-state and momentary
percentage of capacity for all breakers and transformers.
Providing data that allows the user to
analyze the quality of power, such as
harmonics and disturbances (surges
and sags), and this data can be used
for diagnostics, reporting, or other
tracking purposes.
Throughout this catalog, this symbol

will appear with products which tie into
the ACCESS system. Page numbers
will refer you back to this section for
specific information regarding ACCESS
compatibility and specifications, if
applicable.
ACCESS-Compatible Devices From Siemens

Table 1.1 below lists Siemens devices which are ACCESS savvy, and also shows
where detailed information on each device may be found both in this section and
elsewhere in the Specification Guide.
Table 1.1
ACCESS Field Level Device Cross Reference
Category
Protective Relays
and Trip Units
Metering
Motor Protection
and Control Relays
I/O Devices
CSI Section 16920
1
Look For This Symbol
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
Siemens ACCESS Electrical Distribution

Communication System centrally monitors
and controls an entire electrical distribution system. Engineers, accountants,
executives, and technicians can access
an almost limitless stream of data for
troubleshooting, early warning alarms,
power quality studies, preventive maintenance, cost allocation, and facilities planning. ACCESS adds a new dimension to
managing energy-intensive facilities,
allowing identification and correction of
potential problems before they cause
damage, waste, injury, or downtime.
Model
Static Trip IIIC/IIICP/IIICPXLV Power Breakers
Type SB Encased Systems Breakers
SB Energy Communicating Trip Unit
Sensitrip IIIMolded Case Circuit Breakers
ISGS Protective Relay
4300, 4700, and 4720 Power Meters
SAMMS-LV
SAMMS-MV
S7-I/O

Specification Guide
Spec Guide Page Reference

This Section
Elsewhere
13
63
14
313
15
319
15
329
13
12
13
265
13
244
13

Software
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
SIEServe Monitoring Software

SIEServe is a Windows-based application designed to retrieve and display realtime data from Siemens power meters,
trip units, and relays. It provides a simple
means for monitoring an electrical distribution system from a local or remote personal computer. SIEServe interrogates
each communicating device connected
and continually updates the SIEServe
device data displays. SIEServe can forward real-time power system data via
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) to remote
DDE-aware applications for trending,
reporting or charting. Each instance of
SIEServe running can monitor up to 128
ACCESS-compatible devices on RS-485
LANs utilizing direct connect, or modem
connect serial communications and the
Siemens Isolated Multi-Drop Converter.
Example SIEServe Screen
General
WinPM offers device configuration, userdefined trends that can be saved to disk
as snapshots, alarm logging, event logging, waveform capture, harmonic analysis, and manual control. In addition,
WinPM offers real-time and min / max
data display capability. Standard and custom reports are available for hard copy
output.
WinPM communicates with ACCESScompatible devices through a PCs standard RS-232 serial communication port.
An Isolated Multi-Drop Converter is
required for each group of 128 devices to
convert device RS-485 communications
to the computer RS-232 serial port.
Network capabilities allow multiple
copies of WinPM to be linked together
via TCP / IP. WinPM is also a Windows
DDE (dynamic data exchange) client /
server, allowing links from and to other
Windows applications.
WinPM displays device and system data
in useful formats, including the following:
Device Data: Displays all real-time
detailed device data available from
each field device including configuration and software version. Data is displayed in user-defined screens and
system diagrams.
Min / Max Data: Logs minimum and
maximum values for each measured
parameter of each field device including date and time stamps.
Alarms: Maintains a separate alarm

log for recording out-of-limit active
user-defined alarms. Alarms can be
configured to enable an audible alarm
or a popup window display, notify a
pager, control outputs, and log timestamped alarm information.
Event Log: Records all power-up,
user log in, out-of-limit, pickup, alarm,
and trip events with date and time
stamps.
Snapshot Log: Captures and displays
user-defined trends of any parameter
from any device using WinPMs
Snapshot Log feature. The Snapshot
Log is updated in preset user-defined
time intervals.
Waveform Capture and THD%:
Captures and displays current and
voltage waveforms, as well as harmonic content (THD) values for each
harmonic, from compatible devices
including the 4700 and 4720 power
meters, and the SB Energy Communicating Trip Unit. Neutral current input
and auxiliary voltage can also be
captured.
Discrete Inputs: Display status (ON /
OFF) of discrete inputs from field
devices, such as the S7-I / O Addressable Relay. Discrete input status
changes can initiate visual and audible
alarms, be recorded in the event log,
and provide external alarm output.
SIEServe is DDE-compatible with spreadsheet and word processing software,

including Microsoft Excel, Microsoft
Word, Wonderware Intouch, WinCC,
and others.
SIEServe supports all current ACCESS
field devices including:
4300, 4700, and 4720 Power Meters
SAMMS Motor Protection and
Control Relays
SAMMS-LV for Low Voltage
Motors
SAMMS-MV for Medium
Voltage Motors
S7-I / O Addressable Relay
Pulse Reading Meter
STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip Units
SB and Sensitrip III Trip Units
ISGS, 7SA511, and 7UT512 Protective
Relays
WinPM Software
WinPM is a Windows-based application
for monitoring and control of all Siemens
ACCESS field devices, Siemens protective relays, and other field devices.
Example WinPMTM Snapshot Screen

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

Software
CSI Section 16920
1
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
WinPM Configuration Capability

Devices: Users can configure field
devices over the communication bus
or network from a centrally located
computer, including basic setup (baud
rate, address, name), and detailed protective setup, such as voltage and
amperage scales. The input scaling
feature allows users to scale values
from any device by either a multiplication factor and / or an offset value.
System Diagrams: System diagrams
are custom diagrams which graphically display the layout of the users site.
Once device is configured in WinPM,
its real-time data can be animated and
added to custom system diagrams.
The user can also create a Run button
within diagrams that will run other
Windows applications when selected.
Alarm Limits: Users can program
alarm limits into WinPM for measured
field device parameters. Over, under,
equal to, not equal to, and change setpoint alarms are available as well as
device discrete input status alarms.
Alarms can be configured to enable an
audible alarm or a popup window display, notify a pager, control outputs,
and log time-stamped alarm information. For the 4700 and 4270 power
meters, the user can set up WinPM to
automatically clear the kWh, kVARh,
and kVAh when an alarm has been
activated.
WinPM supports all current ACCESS
field devices and other ACCESScompatible devices including:
4300 Power Meters
4700 Power Meters
4720 Power Meters
Pulse Reading Meter
SAMMS Motor Protection and
Control Relays (SAMMS-1, 2, 3;
SAMMS-LV for Low Voltage
Motors; SAMMS-MV for Medium
Voltage Motors)
STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip Units
SB and Sensitrip III Trip Units
Sentron Systems Breaker Energy
Communicating Trip Unit
ACCESS I / O Addressable Relays
SCOR Overcurrent Relays
ISGS Relay
7SA511 Numerical Line
Protection Relay
7SJ511 Numerical Overcurrent
Time Protection Relay
7SJ512 Numerical Overcurrent
Protection Relay
7UT512 Numerical Differential
Protection Relay
General
Example WinPM System Diagram Screen
Table 1.2
ACCESS Software Capabilities
Software Feature
Operating System
Maximum No. of Devices
Password Protection
Real-time Data Display
Min/Max Data Retrieval
Discrete Input Status
Waveform Capture
Event Logging
Device Configuration
Clearing Device Data
Pickup Information
Manual Control
Alarm Configuring
Alarm Logging
Printing Data/Reports
Trending Capability
One-line Diagrams
Custom Diagrams
Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE)
Networking Capability
PLC Integration
Third Party Devices
Interface to Other System
SIEServeTM
Windows 3.11, 95/98, NT 4.0
128
WinPMTM
Windows 95/98, NT 4.0
Unlimited
(Net DDE only)
(DDE only)
(DDE only)
(DDE only)
(Data only)

Specification Guide

Hardware
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
General
Siemens manufactures a complete family

of industrial computers and programmable controllers for use in the ACCESS
system, as well as for other applications.
Siemens Industrial Computers are configurable to fit specific requirements. All
Industrial Computers have passive back
planes and use slot CPUs for easy
upgrades and fast service. Rugged chassis design and shock mounted drives are
standard on all models. All units have
built-in diagnostics for CPU scan, voltage
monitoring, and internal temperature
monitoring with relay outputs for detected problems. Siemens can also provide
desktop and laptop computers for nonindustrial type applications.
Industrial Personal Computer
The Siemens Industrial Personal
Computer (PC) is designed for mounting
in the face of electrical equipment, or for
wall mounting. The Industrial PC was
designed specifically for use in harsh
environments where space is limited.
The flat screen monitor 10.4 inch (264
mm) Active Color LCD, full keypad, PS / 2
mouse, hard drive, and 3.5 inch floppy
disk drive are all contained in one unit.
The Industrial PC has a 3ISA / 1 PCI slot
back plane (3/4 length), with 586 / 133MHz
CPU and 16 MB RAM. Hard disk options
are available to 850 MB. The 3.5 inch
floppy disk drive is standard. The
Industrial PC is an excellent choice for
running ACCESS software local to the
equipment or in a control room.
Isolated Multi-Drop Converter
Isolated Multi-Drop Converter

Siemens Isolated Multi-Drop is a four
channel, industrially hardened, RS-232 to
RS-485 converter that provides the connection between a computers serial port
10
Siemens Multiplexer Translator Connected to (clockwise from upper left) Static Trip III,
SB Breaker, Sensitrip III Breaker, SAMMS-LV Motor Control Relay
and a Siemens SEAbus RS-485 communications loop for ACCESS field devices.
Once installed, the converter allows software such as SIEServe or WinPM to
communicate with any of the connected
ACCESS components. The unit has four
RS-485 ports that can support 32 devices
each, for a total of 128 devices. In addition, the converter offers a convenient 15
volts DC power supply which can be
used for communications to the SAMMS
and STIIIC / CP / CPX Static Trip devices.
A 120 volts AC or 125 volts DC power
source is required for the converter itself.
The Multi-Drop protects the computer
from potentially dangerous field device
voltages through opto-isolators located
between the RS-232 and RS-485 interfaces. To isolate the PC further, the con-

Specification Guide
verter is equipped with high-energy surge

suppression per ANSI standard C62.41.
Multiplexer Translator
The Multiplexer Translator (MT-A) is a
microprocessor-controlled device used
for communications with Sensitrip III
Molded Case and SB Encased Systems
Breakers on the ACCESS network. Each
MT-A can support up to eight circuit
breakers. Ground fault interlocking, short
time interlocking, both, or neither are
individually programmable for each circuit
breaker in the network.
Table 1.3 gives hardware system recommendations for the ACCESS software
packages described earlier.
CSI Section 16920

Hardware
General
Minimal programming is required on both

the DTU3005 and the PLC to monitor
and / or control the field devices. Up to
32 DTUs can be daisy chained together,
and each DTU can be connected up to 32
ACCESS devices.
The ACCESS devices supported by the
DTU3005 include:
Power Meters: 4300, 4700, 4720.
Trip Devices: Static Trip III trip
device for low voltage switchgear,
Sensitrip EC trip units for SB circuit
breakers on low voltage switchboards,
ISGS protective relays for medium
voltage switchgear.
Motor Protection Relays: SAMMS-LV
motor protection devices for low
voltage MCC, SAMMS-MV motor
protection devices for medium voltage
controllers.
Input / Output Devices: S7-I / O
Addressable relays.
Although the DTU3005 is not a protocol
converter, each model does allow data to
be transferred from a SEAbus device to a
PLC or supervisory system.
DTU3005
Table 1.3
Recommended ACCESS Computer Hardware
Hardware Feature
Central Processing Unit
Processor Speed
Random Access Memory
Disk Space Required
Floppy Drive
Mouse Type
Serial COM Port
Video Monitor Type
Printer Type
CSI Section 16920
SIEServe Software
(PC)
486 Minimum
33 MHz
8 MB
20 MB
3.5" 1.44 MB
P/S 2 Style Mouse
Standard
VGA minimum
WinPM Software
(PC)
486 Minimum
66 MHz
16 MB
20 MB
3.5" 1.44 MB
P/S 2 Style Mouse
Standard
VGA minimum
Optionalany Windows
Supported Printer
Optionalany Windows
Supported Printer

Specification Guide
The DTU3005-B can interface to multiple

types of PLCs manufactured by several
different vendors. In the PLC to SEAbus
configuration, the unit transfers data
directly to the PLC. Dual Passthrough
configuration allows connectivity to two
supervisory SEAbus applications, such as
two copies of Siemens WinPM software. In the Modbus Master to SEAbus
configuration, the unit acts as an addressable Modbus RTU / ASCII slave device.
The DTU3005-P unit utilizies SEAbus to
Profibus DP configuration, wherein the
unit acts as a Profibus DP slave.
11
1
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
DTU3005
The DTU3005 intelligent data transfer
device is designed as a low cost solution
for transferring data from Siemens
devices to systems that have other manufacturers PLCs as data gathering devices.
Real-time data can be transferred from
Siemens ACCESS devices to any Modbus
RTU / ASCII or Profibus DP supervisory
software applications, or to other supervisory PLCs. In addition to these capabilities, the DTU3005 can also communicate
simultaneously to Siemens WinPM
software via a Passthrough port.

Field Level Devices
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
At the foundation of the Siemens

ACCESS system are intelligent field
devices. In addition to their primary functions of overcurrent protection and
metering, each of these devices has
RS-485 communication capability to
transmit valuable power system measurements out onto the ACCESS network, and to receive commands open,
close, trip, start, stop, etc.
Power Meters
Siemens 4300, 4700, and 4720
digital power meters are designed for
high accuracy metering of power distribution systems. Built for use in industrial
environments, the rugged microprocessor-based technology meets ANSI / IEEE
C37 requirements for radio frequency
interference (RFI), surge withstand, and
fast transient tests. All meters comply
with FCC / DOC emissions standards, are
UL and CSA certified, and are fully integrated with Siemens WinPM software.
4300 Power Meter
Designed with retrofit applications in
mind, Siemens 4300 meter helps businesses satisfy basic monitoring and communications needs by combining digital
metering technology with Siemens
advanced communications capabilities.
The 4300 meter is a three phase, rms
sensing power meter with a 20 character
LCD which shows multiple measurements simultaneously. The standard
meter offers open protocol communications through an optically isolated RS-485
port. The unique two module design and
the standard 4.5 inch (114 mm) ANSI
C39.1 mounting make the 4300 meter
ideal for retrofit and analog replacement.
General
The 4300 can be applied up to 1,000 kV
and 10,000A circuits.
4700 Power Meter
Siemens 4700 digital power meter provides the industrys highest level of monitoring, combining numerous traditional
analog meter functions into a compact
and easy-to-use package. In addition to
enhancing metering capabilities, the 16bit microprocessor of the 4700 calculates
and records min / max meter values and
waveform capture. An extended snapshot memory further increases power
system analysis capabilities. The 4700
offers four discrete inputs that can be
used to monitor transformer sudden
pressure and temperature alarms, as well
as to serve as a counter of circuit breaker
operations or utility kWH pulses. One of
the discrete inputs may be used for synchronizing the 4700s internal kW
demand period with an external utility
billing meter pulse.
With three form-C output relay contacts,
the 4700s application can be extended to
alarming, load shedding, or breaker tripping functions. Each relay can be set to
activate or release on programmable
threshold and time delay values for any
of the metered parameters. These relays
can also be manually controlled via the
communications system.
The waveform capture feature allows
high speed sampling of any of the four
voltage or four current inputs. The meter
stores 128 samples per cycle, allowing
PC-based power monitoring software to
display the sampled input and calculate
the harmonic content up to the 63rd harmonic. Waveform capture is activated
through commands on the communications port.

The Siemens 4700 ability to provide analog output to systems such as SCADA,
programmable logic controllers and distributed control systems replaces the
need for an external transducer.
4720 Power Meter
The 4720 power meter answers the everincreasing concern for clean, reliable
power by integrating the many critical
aspects of power metering, power quality analysis, and control into one simple
and economical instrument. In addition to
the metering capabilities of the 4700
power meter, the 4720 provides on-board
THD calculations, disturbance capturing
(i.e., waveform recording), predicted
demand, and increased memory.
The standard 4720 power meter provides
three form-C output control relays (10 A),
four digital inputs, one analog voltage
input, and one analog current output (0-20
mA or 4-20 mA). The three-phase, rms
sensing 4720 power meter offers over
300 high-accuracy measurements,
onboard harmonic analysis, high-speed
waveform capture, digital waveform
recording, and a high-speed setpoint control system. Measured values include current per phase and neutral, voltage line-toline and line-to-neutral per phase, frequency, power factor per phase, kW, kVAR and
kVA per phase, kWHr, kVARHr and kVAHr
per phase, Amps demand, kW demand
and predicted kW demand per phase.
4720 Power Meter
4300 Power Meter
12

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

Field Level Devices
SAMMS-LV Motor Protection and

Control Relay

Siemens S7-I / O (input / output) addressable relay can remotely monitor any
device equipped with an auxiliary contact,
and thus monitor or control power system elements that are not specifically
designed for digital communications. The
basic S7-I / O allows up to 14 digital
inputs and 10 outputs. Two models of
the S7-I / O base module are available:
one with AC control power, relay outputs,
and type 1 sinking DC inputs, and one
with DC control power, sourcing transistor outputs, and type 1 sinking DC inputs.
Expansion modules increase the number
CSI Section 16920
of inputs or outputs the S7-I / O device can

monitor and control. Each discrete expansion I / O module containing 8 inputs or 8
outputs can be added to the base unit. A
maximum of 5 expansion modules can be
connected to each base unit.
Counters on the first 8 discrete inputs of
the base unit allow the S7-I / O to track
breaker or starter operations or count the
pulsed output from a kWhr meter. As part
of the ACCESS communications system,
the S7-I / O has a digital address and is
polled on a regular schedule by a supervisory computer. The supervisory equipment can either be a host computer, a
PC, a PLC or other compatible supervisory device. Siemens WinPM software is
used to configure and control the S7-I / O.
Features include control power options of
120 / 240 VAC or 24 VDC, analog input
capability (blocks of 3 up to a total of 12
inputs), on board control power for
expansion modules, and relay contact
outputs that can be manually controlled.
Inputs can be dry contacts; signal voltage
is provided through the internal power
supply. The digital states on outputs can
be pulsed or latched pulsed outputs,
typically through an interposing relay, can
be used for breaker operation control.
Typical applications of the S7-I / O
addressable relay include monitoring
transformer temperature relays and circuit
breaker status (open or closed). The outputs can be used to close contactors, trip
circuit breakers, provide remote indication
of an event, or to communicate various
levels of alarming to plant personnel.
Static Trip III / IIIC / IIICP / IIICPX
The Static Trip III devices are microprocessor controlled, rms sensing overcurrent protective relays for use in low
voltage switchgear. STIII trip units provide front panel selectivity for overcurrent
protection (Long Time, Short Time,
Ground, Instantaneous) with pick-up
LEDs and LCD trip target indicator.
Optional features available on the STIII
include serial communications, power
metering, protective relaying, and local
display. Zone interlocking is standard on
trip units provided with short time or
ground fault protection. The STIII family
consists of four models:
STIII
Basic Overcurrent
Protection
STIIIC
Added Communications
and Current Metering
STIIICP
Added Power Metering
STIIICPX Added Protective
Relaying

Specification Guide
1
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
SAMMS-LV and SAMMS-MV

Motor Protection and Control Relays
The Siemens Advanced Motor Master
System (SAMMS) is a solid-state overload relay with integrated control logic
and advanced motor protection. The
SAMMS-LV relay is designed specifically
for low voltage applications (NEMA Size
6 Max) while SAMMS-MV is designed for
protection of medium voltage machines.
The SAMMS devices utilize a current
sensor to obtain rms current measurements; these are used in conjunction
with user-programmed full load amperes,
service factor, and trip class to provide
overload protection 5% accurate.
Modifying protective settings and extracting valuable statistical data are both
accomplished with a plug-in hand-held
communicator. Advanced motor protection capabilities of SAMMS include phase
unbalance protection, process current
warning, jam protection, loss of load protection, and optional ground fault protection. SAMMS also supports RS-485 open
protocol communications via an optional
communications module. The SAMMS
Motor Relay is UL recognized. Measured
and communicated values of the
SAMMS relay include phase currents, trip
current, average current, percentage current unbalance, elapsed time, number of
starts, number of trips, and motor winding temperature.
General
Static Trip III with Breaker Display Unit
An optional local Breaker Display Unit

(BDU) can be added to communicating
trip units. The BDU mounts on the face of
the breaker and displays real-time measurements, trip log, event log, and min /
max values. The BDU also allows viewing
and modifying the STIII configuration.
A standard feature of the STIIIC / CP /
CPX models is an alarm output. Any of
the trip units measured parameters may
be set to activate the alarm, based on
programmed threshold and delay. The
alarm output is a 100mA 12 volt signal
which requires an additional interposing
relay to provide a normally open dry contact closure.
Models STIIIC and STIIICP provide accurate metering as an integral part of the
trip unit. The same current sensors used
for overcurrent protection are also used
for metering. In addition, special potential
transformer modules mount on the drawout breaker. Metered parameters can be
displayed locally with the BDU, or displayed remotely via the RS-485 communications port. Measured and communicated values of the STIIIC include phase,
neutral, and ground currents. The STIIICP
adds power metering including line and
phase voltages, real power, reactive
power, apparent power, energy (real and
reactive, forward and reverse), power
factor, and frequency. All metered values
are accurate to 1% at full scale. An
event log, trip log, and min / max data are
also available from communicating STIII
trip units.
The Intelligent Switchgear Systems
(ISGS) from Siemens is a high speed,
numerical, multifunctional protection
relay. This combined metering and protection package has been designed for
integration into a computer monitored
medium voltage switchgear. The ISGS
13

Field Level Devices
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
General
ISGS Protective Relay (Contd)

relay is designed in accordance with
ANSI / IEEE C37 .90 and IEC 255-4 standards. The M1 size case houses the
withdrawable element for quick and easy
maintenance; the dust-tight front cover is
suitable for mounting on the low voltage
compartment or on relay panels. The RS232 communications port on the front of
the ISGS relay allows connection of a
portable computer for local access to all
parameter settings and oscillatory waveform fault recordings. In addition, the
relay can be ordered with a rear network
RS-485 port for multi-drop topology.
The ISGS relay unit provides protection,
metering, control, and monitoring. The
relay requires three phase current transformer inputs and one ground transformer input; residual ground sensing
without a CT is also an option. Two
breaker tripping contacts and one relay
disabled alarm contact are provided. The
base unit provides protective functions
for instantaneous Phase Overcurrent
(50), Instantaneous Neutral or Ground
Overcurrent (50N), Phase Time Overcurrent (51), and Neutral or Ground Time
Overcurrent (51N), with nine selectable
ANSI time overcurrent curves and one
custom user definable curve. An event
log, trip log, min / max log, and waveform
capture capabilities, as well as Breaker
Failure (50BF) protection, are also provided in the base unit. The optional configurations that can be added to the ISGS
relay base unit are as follows:
Metering: This option requires three
inputs for the connection of Voltage
Transformers, extending the metering
capabilities to provide rms and average
rms voltages, active and apparent power,
kilowatt demand and kilowatt demand
hours, power factor, and frequency. The
installation of the voltage input card also
provides for protective functions High-Set
Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent (50 HS)
and High-Set Instantaneous Neutral or
Ground Overcurrent (50 HSN).
Additional Protective Functions:
Under / Overvoltage (27 / 59), Phase
Sequence Voltage (47), Negative
Sequence Voltage (47N), Directional
Time Overcurrent (67 / 67 / N), and
Over / Underfrequency (81U / O) can be
provided when this option is selected.
Communications: In addition to the
standard RS-232 port, an RS-485 rear
communications port can be added to
the base unit to allow for networked or
14

remote modem communications and
control. The relay is designed to operate
in the ACCESS system with Siemens
WinPM software.
ISGS Wisdom Software
The ISGS relay can be completely set
up and configured using the front panel
keypad. Alternatively, the free Wisdom
software program can save time and
effort by allowing the user to configure
the relay, read the metered values, and
retrieve the stored data. Wisdom is a
Microsoft Windows based tool that is
very user friendly and includes an integrated help file. The software has a
Demo Mode feature, enabling the operator to configure the relay settings, store
the configuration data to a file, and download the data later at the substation as
a result, this feature can greatly reduce
the on-site service time. The capability to
monitor and have breaker control over a
network also makes this software very
beneficial to the customer.

Specification Guide
SB Encased Systems Breaker Trip Unit

The Siemens SB Breaker has characteristics of both molded case breakers and
low voltage switchgear breakers. It has
high interrupting capabilities as well as
extended short-time delay tripping. It
may be applied in situations ranging from
100 to 4,000 amperes at system voltages
through 600 volts AC by using interchangeable rating plugs and continuous
current adjustment. The SB trip unit provides fully adjustable settings for continuous current limits, long-time delay, shorttime pickup, short-time delay, instantaneous pickup, ground fault pickup, and
ground fault delay. The microprocessor
based trip unit for the SB breaker has
communications capability when provided with an expansion plug and connected
to a Multiplexer Translator. Measured and
communicated values include rms phase
currents, pick-up status, and communications status.
CSI Section 16920

Field Level Devices
Table 1.4
General
1
SB Energy-Comm Unit Features by Model Type

SBxxTP01
SBxxTP01G
SBxxTP02
SBxxTP02G
ACCESS Electrical
Distribution Comm.
Feature
Protection Functions
Long Time, Short Time, Instantaneous
Metering Functions
Volts, Amps, VARs, VA, Demand
Communications
EIA-232, ACCESS, Zone Selective
Interlock
Operations
Operations Counter, Fault Counter
Security
Password Protection
Event Log
Time-Stamped History of 10 Most
Recent Events
Trip Log
Time-Stamped History of 5 Most
Recent Trips
Alarms
Overcurrent, Over kW, Under PF
Advanced Alarms
Harmonics, etc.
Min/Max Logs
Per Phase Amps and Volts, Power, PF,
Frequency, THD
Harmonic Analysis
Per Phase
Protective Relay Functions
Current / Voltage Unbalance,
Over / Undervoltage
Residual or Ground Return
Sentron Systems Breaker Energy Communicating Trip Unit
Sentron Systems Breaker Energy

Communicating Trip Unit
The Sentron Systems Breaker Energy
Communicating Trip Unit (SB EnergyComm) is a microprocessor-controlled
protection and metering device for application with Siemens family of SB
Encased Systems Breakers. This highperformance device integrates metering
and ACCESS communications capabilities with overcurrent protective functions. When installed as part of the
ACCESS system, the SB Energy-Comm
unit derives current data from current
transformers (CTs) mounted in the
Siemens SB circuit breaker. As passive
devices, the SB circuit breakers provide
high reliability with minimum signal error,
while also providing power for the trip
units circuit protection functions. The
current signals from the CTs are converted to digital values in the trip unit. These
values are then stored in memory and
are used by the microprocessor to detect
and process overcurrent conditions.
The SB Energy-Comm trip unit is
designed as a plug-in unit to mount
directly into an SB circuit breaker frame,
and it can use field interchangeable rating
plugs. These rating plugs allow the
ampere rating of the circuit breaker to be
changed to meet specific applications.
CSI Section 16920
The keypad, display LCD, and LED indicators on the front panel of the device provide the user with direct access to device
data and settings. Both real-time and
accumulated data are available, in addition to current and voltage waveforms.
Four models of the SB Energy-Comm trip
unit are available as described in Table
1.4. The xx in the model number
denotes the breakers current transformer rating (In).
Sensitrip III Trip Unit
The Sensitrip III trip device provides
microprocessor-based selective overcurrent protection for Siemens Sentron
Series Digital Molded Case Circuit
Breakers. The trip unit provides fully
adjustable settings for continuous current
limits, long-time delay, short-time pickup,
short-time delay, instantaneous pickup,
ground fault pickup, and ground fault
delay. In addition, the Sensitrip III has
communications capability when provided with an expansion plug and connected to a Multiplexer Translator.
Measured and communicated values
include rms phase currents, pick-up
status, and communications status.

Specification Guide
15
Medium Voltage Switchgear 5 through 15kV

Overview
Siemens Vacuum Interrupters

The vacuum interrupters used in the GMI
circuit breaker are manufactured by
Siemens and have been proven in thousands of installations since 1976. The
chrome-copper contact design used in
these interrupters assures low chopping
levels, eliminating the need for surge protection on most circuits.
Front Mounted Operating Mechanism
The simple GMI operating mechanism
makes maintenance and inspection easy.
The mechanism is located on the front of
the circuit breaker, rather than underneath.
Five Year Maintenance Interval

If applied under ANSI usual service
conditions, maintenance is only needed
at 5 year intervals.
Floor Rollout
No lift truck or dolly is needed to insert or
remove circuit breakers in the lower cell
of indoor or Shelter-Clad installations
since floor rollout convenience is standard for GMI breakers.
Universal Spare Breaker
The physical configuration and interlock
logic allow the use of a single circuit
breaker to serve as a universal spare
breaker at an installation site. The interlock logic checks the four principal rating
characteristics (continuous current, maximum voltage, interrupting current, and
close and latch current), and allows a circuit breaker to be inserted in a breaker
cell, provided that the breaker equals or
exceeds the ratings required by the cell.
Single Source Responsibility

Single source responsibility is assured
since the complete equipment is
designed, manufactured, and tested in a
single facility.
Full ANSI Design Background
Full design integrity is assured. ANSI
C37.09 and C37.20.2 require design tests
on circuit breakers and structures together. Since both the structures and the circuit breakers are produced in a single
facility, Siemens controls the entire product, from design concept to production.
Records are maintained to document
compliance with ANSI standards.
UL Listing Available
Where the arrangement of components
allows, UL Listing is available.
The vacuum circuit breakers are checked in the switchgear cells as part of production testing, and shipped in the switchgear
to assure interchangeability and reduce possibility of damage to circuit breakers in shipment.
CSI Section 16320

Specification Guide
31
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Siemens GM 5kV, 7.2kV and 15kV metalclad power switchgear assemblies with
horizontal drawout type GMI vacuum circuit breakers take advantage of the latest
developments in vacuum interrupter
technology. Up to two circuit breakers
can be stacked in a single vertical section, allowing significant space savings.
The equipment meets or exceeds the latest standards of ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA.
UL Listing is available where the arrangement allows.
GM switchgear is widely used in industrial plants, commercial buildings, electric
utility systems, cogeneration installations,
and other electrical systems. It is commonly used for protection and switching
of transformers, motors, generators,
capacitors, buses, distribution feeder
lines, and, in general, for protection of
any medium voltage power circuit.
Siemens experience gained in nearly 70
years of supplying metal-clad switchgear
in the U.S.A. has been captured in the GM
design. The objective has been to incorporate features designed to provide safety,
while simplifying operations, maintenance,
and minimizing installation cost.
The switchgear structure and the drawout vacuum circuit breaker are an integrated design, with dielectric, thermal,
and interruption integrity built directly into
the basic design, not added as an afterthought.
General

Overview
General
Breaker Interchangeability
The GM switchgear cubicle and the
removable GMI circuit breaker element
are both built to master fixtures so circuit
breakers of the same ratings are interchangeable with each other even if the
breaker is required for use with a cell with
provisions only supplied years earlier.
A circuit breaker of higher rating can be
used in a cell of equal or lower rating, i.e.
a 3000A circuit breaker can be used in a
1200A cell.
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Structural Flexibility
Siemens GM metal-clad switchgear provides enhanced flexibility in locating circuit breaker, auxiliary, and metering cells
within the structure layout. Circuit breakers rated 1200 amperes and 2000
amperes may be located in upper or
lower cell positions, to a maximum main
bus self cooled limit of 4000 amperes per
vertical section.
Bus sectionalizing (tie) circuit breaker
cells may be located on the upper or
lower levels and are ordinarily located
next to an auxiliary cell on the same level
to accommodate transition bus work.
3000 ampere circuit breakers can be
located either in the bottom cell or the
top cell of a vertical section. If the 3000
ampere circuit breaker is located in the
lower cell, the upper cell can be used for
metering devices only. If the 3000
ampere circuit breaker is in the upper
cell, the lower cell may be used to house
a set of drawout voltage transformers.
The 3000 ampere circuit breaker can be
used for 4000 amperes continuous, with
the addition of fan cooling equipment in
the auxiliary cell above the circuit breaker.
This application is well suited if loads
above 3000 amperes are infrequent, as
for example, in the case of a fan cooled

rating on a power transformer.
Each vertical section contains a main bus
bar compartment and two cells for auxiliary devices and / or circuit breakers,
including primary and secondary disconnects, instrument transformers, instruments and relays, secondary wiring, and
other components as necessary. The
switchgear is normally designed so that
additional vertical sections may be added
in the future.
Enclosure Design
The GM design includes full ANSI
C37.20.2 Metal-Clad construction. This
means complete enclosure of all live
parts and separation of major portions of
the circuit to retard the spread of faults
to other compartments. Removable
plates permit access to all compartments. The rear panels are individually
removabIe to access to either downfeed
or upfeed cables.
Sheet steel inter-unit barriers extend the
full height and depth of each vertical section for isolating adjacent sections. The
ground bus extends the entire length of
the complete switchgear lineup, and to
all circuit breaker cells.
Tested to ANSI Standards

Siemens GM switchgear is tested to
meet the requirements of ANSI standards. A complete design test program,
including short circuit interruption, load
current switching, continuous current,
mechanical endurance, close and latch
current, short time and momentary withstand, impulse withstand, and the other
tests required by the standards has been
successfully completed. These tests
encompass the complete equipment
design, including both the switchgear
structure and the circuit breaker removable element. Production tests to ANSI
standards are performed on every group
of switchgear and on each circuit breaker.
Certified copies of all test data can be
furnished to customers upon request.
UL Listing Available
When specified, if the component configuration allows, the switchgear can be
provided with the UL listed label, indicating conformance to the requirements of
ANSI C37.54 and C37.55.
Upper Cell Breaker Being Racked Out with

Door Closed
32

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16320

Construction Details
General
Switchgear Compartments
Vacuum Circuit Breaker Cell
The circuit breaker cell is a bolted, reinforced, sheet steel enclosure, with provisions for a type GMI vacuum circuit
breaker. It includes a hinged front door,
inter-compartment and inter-unit barriers,
primary and secondary disconnects,
automatic shutters, racking mechanism,
interlocks, instruments and relays,
control wiring and devices, and
current transformers.
Vacuum Circuit Breaker Element
The GMI vacuum circuit breaker includes
a stored energy operating mechanism,
primary and secondary disconnects, automatic shatters, auxiliary switches, ground
contact, control wiring, and interlocks.
Auxiliary Cell An auxiliary cell is similar to a circuit breaker cell, except without provisions for a circuit breaker. Space
may be used for VTs, CPTs and fuses,
batteries, chargers, and other auxiliary
devices.
Bus Compartment The bus compartment is a separately enclosed space for
three-phase insulated main power bus
bars, supports, and connections to circuit
breaker cells.
Circuit Breaker Cell Features Floor

Rollout Breakers in the lower cell can
be rolled out directly on the floor in front
of the unit, without a handling device, lift
truck, or hoist for indoor and shelter-clad
installations. A lift truck accessory is
optionally available for handling circuit
breakers in upper cells, or in non-walk-in
outdoor enclosures.
Closed Door Racking The circuit
breaker can be racked in or out with the
cell door open or closed. For racking, a
manual drive crank or an optional electric
motor drive may be used.
Interlocks Interlocks prevent moving a
closed circuit breaker in the cell, by preventing engagement of the racking crank
if the breaker is closed. A second interlock
lever holds the circuit breaker mechanically and electrically trip-free between positions. The racking mechanism can be padlocked to restrict unauthorized racking
of the circuit breaker. Separate padlock
CSI Section 16320
Circuit Breaker Interior
provisions may be used to hold the circuit

breaker in the trip-free condition.
Automatic Shutters Automatically
operated grounded steel shutters allow or
block access to the stationary primary disconnects. The shutters are opened by the
circuit breaker as it moves toward the connected position. The shutters close as the
circuit breaker is racked away from the
connected position to the test position.
The shutters remain closed until they are
forced open by insertion of the circuit
breaker. This design maximizes protection
for personnel, as compared to shutters
which are linked to the racking mechanism.
Current Transformers Front-access
current transformers may be mounted
around both the upper and lower stationary primary disconnect bushings. Up to a
total of four per phase may be located in
each circuit breaker cell.
Wiring Secondary wiring is neatly bundled and secured on the sides of the cell.
Wiring is not routed on the floor of the
switchgear as in other manufacturers
designs.

Specification Guide
Primary Disconnects The cubicle stationary primary disconnect contacts are

recessed inside the insulator assemblies,
and are located behind grounded steel
shutters to prevent accidental contact
when the circuit breaker is withdrawn.
The primary disconnect finger clusters
are mounted on the circuit breaker.
Secondary Disconnects The cubicle
mounted stationary disconnect contacts
mate with spring loaded secondary contacts on the side of the circuit breaker.
The secondary disconnects automatically
engage in both the test and connected
positions.
Mechanism Operated Cell (MOC)
Switch When required, up to 24
stages of the MOC auxiliary switch can
be mounted in the circuit breaker cell.
Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch
When required, up to 12 stages of truck
operated cell switch can be mounted in
the circuit breaker cell.
33
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Primary Termination Compartment

The rear area of the unit includes space
for connecting incoming or outgoing
power cables, busway connections,
transformer connections, or surge protection devices.

GMI Circuit Breaker on Lift Truck
Auxiliary Positions:
C For VTs
D For VTs or CPT
E For VTs
F for VTs or CPT, or Rollout Fuses

for Stationary CPT
Components:
Rollout VT
Rollout CPT
Rollout VT
Rollout Fuses
Stationary Mounted Control
Power Transformer (over 15kVA
1; all 3 Units
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
General
Auxiliary Cells Auxiliary cells are constructed in the same general manner as
the circuit breaker cells, except without
provisions for a circuit breaker element.
Auxiliary cells may be located in the top
or bottom of a vertical section. The front
door panels may be used to mount
meters, relays, or other instrumentation.
The cubicle portion of the cell may be
used for mounting devices such as voltage transformers, control power transformers, automatic transfer switches,
battery chargers, or batteries. Rollout
trays may be included for mounting VTs
or CPTs.
Current Transformers Siemens torroidal current transformers comply with

ANSI standards, and are mounted at the
rear of the circuit breaker cell. Up to four
standard accuracy MD current transformers may be mounted on each phase two on the bus side and two on the load
side, around the primary disconnect
bushings, Current transformers may be
added or changed with the cell de-energized without removing bus bar or cable
connections. Multi-rate current transformats are available.
For higher accuracy, type MDD current
transformers are available. Due to their
larger physical size, only one MDD CT
can be installed on each side of the circuit breaker.
Voltage Transformers Up to three VTs

with their integrally mounted current limiting fuses may be mounted on each rollout
tray. The upper and lower cells can each
accommodate up to two rollout trays.
When moved to the disconnect position,
the,primary fuses are automatically disconnected and grounded to remove any static
charge from the windings.
When the rollout tray is withdrawn, insulated shutters cover the cubicle primary
disconnects, protecting personnel from
exposure to energized components.
Primary Termination Compartment

The primary termination compartment is
located at the rear of the switchgear and
is separated from all other compartments
by metal barriers. When two circuit
breakers are located in the same vertical
section, their primary cables are separated by steel horizontal barriers and by an
enclosed vertical cable trough (or chimney) where both sets of cables exit in the
same direction. Upper and lower bolted
rear plates are standard and provide separate access to the cable area for each
breaker.
Auxiliary Cells
Floor Rollout / Roll-In
Circuit Breaker Cell Features, contd

Unobstructed Terminal Block Space
Terminal block areas are located on each
side of circuit breaker or auxiliary cells.
Since racking system components are
not mounted on the cubicle sides, these
terminal blocks are not obstructed as in
other designs. Installation of field wiring
is simplified, as wiring can be easily laid
directly against the side sheet. It is not
necessary to fish the wiring under,
around, and through obstructions.
Secondary Control Device Panel
Each circuit breaker or upper auxiliary cell
incorporates its own secondary control
device panel. The panel can accommodate pullout fuse holders or molded case
breakers to suit the protective practices
of the purchaser, and can also accommodate auxiliary relays, transducers, or similar devices. Since each circuit breaker cell
has its own secondary control device
panel, controls from two or more circuits
are not intermingled, reducing the
chances of confusion, maintenance
errors, and the like.
34
Control Power Transformers One

single phase control power transformer
of up to 15kVA capacity, with its primary
current limiting fuses and secondary
breaker, may be mounted on the rollout
tray of an auxiliary cell. The secondary
molded case breaker is interlocked with
the rollout tray such that the secondary
breaker must be open before the control
power transformer primary can be disconnected or connected. This prevents
load current interruption on the main primary contacts. With the secondary breaker open and the latch released, the tray
can be rolled easily to the disconnect
position. As the tray rolls out, the primary
fuses are automatically grounded to
remove any static charge and insulated
shutters close to shield energized conductors.
Large single-phase and all three-phase
control power transformers are stationary
mounted on the floor in the rear of the
vertical section, The primary fuses for
these large transformers are mounted on
the rollout tray in the lower portion of the
bottom auxiliary cell, and interlocked with
the secondary breaker. Withdrawing the
rollout tray closes the insulated shutters.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16320

Vacuum Circuit Breakers
General
Bus Joint Insulation For normal joint

configurations, bolted bus joints are insulated by pre-formed molded polyvinyl
boots which are held in place by nylon
hardware. Preformed insulating materials
eliminate the need for molding and taping joints when connecting shipping
groups in the field, reducing installation
time and costs. The same pre-formed,
high dielectric strength joint boots used
in factory assembly are also used in field
assembly. For uncommon joint configurations, taped joint insulation is used.
Cable Termination Area
Bus Bar System The main bus bar

system is enclosed by grounded metal
barriers and feeds both the upper and
lower cells in a vertical section. Full
rounded-edge copper bus bar with silver
plated joints is standard. Tin-plated copper bus is available as an option. High
strength Grade 5 steel hardware with
split lock washers assures constant pressure low resistance connections. A copper ground bus is standard in all cubicles.
Optional Porcelain / Epoxy Supports

As an option, the bus will be supported
on electrical grade porcelain primary disconnect insulator cylinders, and porcelain
stand-off insulators. The inter-section
insert insulators are cast cycloaliphatic
epoxy insulation, which is comparable to
porcelain. The stationary primary disconnects incorporate true porcelain line-toground integrity, unlike some other
designs which simply add a porcelain
component to a glass polyester support,
which therefore relies on the glass polyester for the insulation integrity.
Circuit Breaker Cell Wiring
Wiring The secondary and control

wiring is connected to terminal blocks
which have numbered points for identification. One side of the terminal blocks
for all connections leaving the switchgear
is reserved for external connections.
Secondary and control wire is No. 14
AWG, extra-flexible, stranded type SIS
wire, insulated for 600 volts. Insulated
barrel, crimp-type locking fork terminals
are used for most applications, except
where the devices require a different
type of terminal. Where they pass
through primary compartments, secondary control wires are armored or
enclosed in grounded metal wire troughs.
Instrumentation and Relays
Instruments, meters, and relays can be
traditional switchboard type, or modern
electronic type, depending on the
requirements of the specification. If traditional electromechanical devices are
used, they have semi-flush cases with
dull black covers. Protective relays, if
available as standard, are of the drawout
type with built-in test facilities. Indicating
and recording instruments, meters and
relays are of the rectangular type, semiflush mounted. All scales have a suitable
range and are designed with black letters
on a white background.
Main Bus Construction
CSI Section 16320

Specification Guide
35
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Bus Bar Insulation Bus bars have fluidized bed, flame retardant, track resistant epoxy insulation. The epoxy is bonded to the bus bars, virtually eliminating
corrosion due to intrusion of gas or moisture between insulation and bus bar.
Bus Support Insulation Track- resistant, flame retardant glass polyester or

epoxy insulation components insure a
uniformly high level of insulation quality
throughout the switchgear. Bus bar supports and primary disconnect bushings
are high impact strength-molded insulation with high dielectric strength and low
moisture absorption characteristics.

Construction / Accessories
Control and Instrument Switches
Switches furnished are rotary, switchboard type and have black handles.
Circuit breaker control switches have pistol-grip handles, while instrument transfer
switches have round notched handles,
and auxiliary or transfer switches have
oval handles.
Circuit breaker control switches have a
mechanical flag indicator showing a red
or green marker to indicate the last manual operation of the switch.
Outdoor Housings
Two types of outdoor housing NonWalk-In and Shelter-Clad are available
to meet almost any application. For both
types the underside of the base is coated
with a coal tar emulsion. The switchgear
is shipped inconvenient grouped for erection in the field
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Non-Walk-In Design
The non-walk-in switchgear consists of
indoor type breaker and auxiliary cubicles
located in a steel housing of weatherproof construction. Each vertical section
has a full height exterior front door with
provision for padlocking. Each cell is also
equipped with an inner hinged front door
for mounting relays, instrumentation, and
control switches. Two removable rear
panels are included for cable access to
the primary termination area. Each cubicle includes a switched lamp receptacle
for proper illumination of the cubicle during maintenance and inspection, a duplex
receptacle for use with electric tools, and
necessary space heaters. A switch for all
space heaters is located in one cubicle.
Shelter-Clad Design Single Aisle
The shelter-clad switchgear consists of
indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary
cubicles located in a weatherproof steel
housing having an operating aisle space
of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of
the circuit breakers for inspection, test or
maintenance. An access door is located
at each end of the aisle, arranged so that
the door can be opened from the inside
regardless of whether or not it has been
padlocked on the outside. The aisle
space is provided with incandescent
lighting which is controlled by means of
a three-way switch at each access door.
36
Each cubicle includes necessary space

heaters. Each lineup includes two utility
duplex receptacles, one at each aisle
access door, for use with electric tools,
extension cords, etc.
The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway is shipped disassembled for erection
in the field.
Shelter-Clad Design Common Aisle
The Shelter-Clad-Common Aisle
switchgear consists of two lineups of
units located in a weatherproof steel
housing having a common operating aisle
space of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers for inspection, test or maintenance. Otherwise, the
construction is as described for single
aisle design.
Accessories
Standard accessories include:
Manual Racking Crank
Spring Charging Handle
Drawout Extension Rails (facilitate
handling of circuit breakers in upper
cell)
Lifting Sling (for breakers above floor
level)
Contact Lubricant
Touch-Up Paint
Optional accessories available include:
Circuit Breaker Lift Device
Split Plug Jumper
Test Cabinet
Test Plugs (for drawout relays,
meters)
Electric Racking Motor Assembly
Fifth Wheel Handling Device
Test provisions, either a split plug jumper
or a test cabinet, are available for testing
the circuit breaker outside its cubicle.
The split plug jumper is used to bridge
the secondary disconnects with a flexible
cable, so the circuit breaker may be electrically closed and tripped with the control switch on the instrument panel. The
test cabinet is used for closing and tripping the circuit breaker at a location
remote from the switchgear.

Specification Guide
General
Manual Ground and Test Device
This is a drawout element that can be
inserted into a circuit breaker cell. It
opens the shutters, connects to the cell
primary disconnecting contacts, and so
provides a means to make the primary
disconnect stabs available for testing. It
is suitable for high potential testing of
outgoing circuits or of the switchgear
main bus, or for phase sequence checking. It also provides a means to connect
temporary grounds to de-energized circuits for maintenance purposes.
Electrical Ground and Test Device
An electrical ground and test device
includes a power operated switch
arranged to allow grounding one set of
disconnect stabs. Two devices, one each
for the upper and lower stabs, are
required if grounding is desired to either
side of the unit. The device also provides
a means of access to the primary circuits
for high potential tests or for phase
sequence checking. These devices are
able to close and latch against short circuit currents corresponding to the ratings
of the equipment. Due to the unique
requirements frequently involved in such
devices, all applications of electrically
operated ground and test devices should
be referred to Siemens for review.
Note: Due to the special nature of
ground and test devices, it is recommended that each user develop definitive
operating procedures incorporating safe
operating practices. Only qualified personnel should be allowed to use ground
and test devices.
CSI Section 16320

ISGS Relay, Access System
Waveform capture (2 buffers at 1 full
second duration each), allowing a
review of the fault waveforms and line
harmonic conditions on your PC.
Trip log, recording information on the
last eight trip events, including time,
date, interrupted amps, time in pickup
and other pertinent date to add in
quick disturbance analysis.
Event Log, monitoring relay functions
for status changes and recording data
available when one occurs.
Min / Max logs, storing data from
metering functions, including current,
voltage, power and frequency, all with
time stamping.
Front mounted RS232 port for local
access to all data and settings.
Wisdon software is supplied for
easy program and fault data extraction
via this front RS232 port.
Direct connection to the Siemens
ACCESS electrical data system via an
optional RS485 port for enhanced
communications and control.
Construction
The ISGS relay system does away with
the costly wiring, drilling and debugging
time required to install multiple electromechanical relays. The ISGS unit is
housed in a standard M-1 drawout case
and is compatible with commonly used
XLA test plugs.
Mode of Operation
The ISGS relay system allows the addition of options or configuration changes
at any time without discarding the basic
hardware. New configuration settings are
keyed in directly using the ISGS keypad.
The ISGS unit also features a local communications port that allows device configuration and communications with a
local PC.
Siemens ACCESS System
Siemens brings the power of communications to medium voltage switchgear.
GM switchgear can be provided with a
variety of ACCESS-compatible devices
for protection, instrumentation, or other
needs. ACCESS provides real-time critical
operating information for electrical distribution systems.
Metering, protection, and event recording
are integrated into an easy-to-use package offering:
Full Metering Capability
RMS Sensing
Graphics Display
Event Recording
Remote Monitoring
Contact your local Siemens representative for more information on the ACCESS
system and ISGS relay.
Type GM Switchgear Outfitted with Siemens ACCESS-Compatible Devices
CSI Section 16320

Specification Guide
37
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Application
The ISGS protective relay is used to provide all common protective relay functions, metering, indication and control
associated with switchgear circuit breaker installations. The ISGS relay replaces
separately mounted and wired components simplifying specification and installation while providing increased reliability
and functionality.
Features:
Three phase plus ground time and / or
instantaneous overcurrent protection,
replacing four separate relays. (50,
50HS, 51, 50N, 50NHS, 51N)
9 selectable time overcurrent curves
and 1 custom curve.
Large 16 character 2-line, back-lit LCD
front panel display for easy review of
metered data and settings.
Standard metering functions: RMS
and average RMS currents Ampere
demand (per phase & average)
Optional metering functions
RMS and average RMS voltages
Active power (kWatts)
kW demand
kW hours
Apparent power (kVA)
Volt-amperes reactive (kVAR)
kVAR hours
Power facto
Frequency
Optional protective functions
Over and / or under voltage protection
(59 / 27)
Phase and ground directional overcurrent ( 67 / 67N)
ver and / or under frequency protection (81 O / U)
Negative sequence voltage (47N)
Voltage phase sequence (47N)
General

Construction Details / Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Non-Walk-In Design
The non-walk-in switchgear consists of
indoor type breaker and auxiliary cubicles
located in a steel housing of weatherproof
construction. Each vertical section has a
full height exterior front door with provision for padlocking. Each cell is also
equipped with an inner hinged front door
for mounting relays, instrumentation, and
control switches. Two removable rear
panels are included for cable access to
the primary termination area. Each cubicle
includes a switched lamp receptacle for
proper illumination of the cubicle during
maintenance and inspection, a duplex
receptacle for use with electric tools, and
necessary space heaters. A switch for all
space heaters is located in one cubicle.

The shelter-clad switchgear consists of
cubicles located in a weatherproof steel
housing having an operating aisle space
of sufficient size to permit withdrawal of
the circuit breakers for inspection, test or
maintenance. An access door is located at
each end of the aisle, arranged so that
regardless of whether or not is has been
padlocked on the outside. The aisle space
is provided with incandescent lighting
which is controlled by means of a threeway switch at each access door. Each
cubicle includes necessary space heaters.
Each lineup includes two utility duplex
receptacles, one at each aisle access
Type GMI Vacuum Circuit

Breakers 5kV, 7.2kV, and
15kV
5-Year Maintenance Interval

When applied under mild conditions (ANSI
usual service conditions), maintenance
is only needed at 5-year intervals.
Siemens Type GMI circuit breakers are

available in 250 MVA through 1000 MVA
nominal interrupting classes, and 1200
through 3000 ampere self-cooled, plus
4000 ampere forced air cooled continuous current ratings.
Maintenance Features
The GMI circuit breakers incorporate
many features designed to reduce and
simplify maintenance, including:
Virtually Maintenance-Free Vacuum
Interrupter
5-Year Maintenance Interval
Floor Rollout
Front Mounted Operator
Common Operator Family
Simple Barriers
Universal Spare Breaker Concept
Non-Sliding Current Transfer
Rugged Secondary Disconnects
Vacuum Interrupters
The GMI circuit breakers use the Siemens
family of vacuum interrupters, proven in
over 100,000 circuit breakers produced
since 1976. The cup shaped contacts have
chrome-copper arcing rings, with a unique
geometry to provide fast interruption with
minimal contact erosion. The chrome-copper contact material assures lower chopping currents than with designs employing
copper-bismuth contacts.
38
General
door, for use with electric tools, extension
cords, etc. The weatherproof enclosure
for the aisleway is shipped disassembled
for erection in the field.
The Shelter-Clad-Common Aisle switchgear
consists of two lineups of indoor type circuit breaker and auxiliary units located in a
weatherproof steel housing having a common operating aisle space of sufficient size
to permit withdrawal of the circuit breakers
for inspection, test or maintenance.
Otherwise, the construction is as described
for single aisle design.
can also be applied to the cell to maintain the circuit breaker in the trip-free
condition.
Floor Rollout
When located in the lower cell, the circuit
breakers are arranged to rollout directly
on the floor in front of the switchgear. No
adapter, hoist, or lift truck is necessary.
Stored Energy Operator
The Siemens GMI stored energy operator
is simple, for long life, high reliability, and
ease of maintenance. Parts used in the
manufacture of the circuit breaker are
precision tooled or produced on numerically controlled equipment. The design
includes frequent use of inherent alignment techniques.
Mechanism Operation
The mechanism is arranged to prestore
closing energy in the closing springs. The
closing springs are selected so that they
provide sufficient energy not only to
close the circuit breaker safely into maximum close and latch currents, but also
to prestore the tripping energy necessary
to open the circuit breaker. The springs
can be manually charged during maintenance or in emergency conditions, but
are normally charged electrically automatically after each closing operation.
Interlocks
The racking system prevents racking of a
closed circuit breaker, and keeps the circuit breaker trip-free during racking. The
racking mechanism can be padlocked to
prevent unauthorized operation. Padlocks

Specification Guide
Removal of Type GMI Circuit Breaker
CSI Section 16320

General
GMI Breaker Side View (1200A)

(Outer barriers removed)
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
GMI Breaker Key Components

GMI Breaker Rear View (2000A)
Type GMI 5kV, 7.2kV, and

15kV (contd)
Manual Controls and indicators
All breaker manual controls and indicators
are conveniently located on the front of
the breaker. Standard features include
manual close button, manual trip button,
open-close indicator, stored energy closing spring charge / discharge indicator,
manual spring charging access, and close
operation counter.
Common Operator Family
Since the entire GMI range of ratings
uses a common stored energy operating
mechanism design, less training of maintenance personnel is required, and stocking of spare parts is reduced.
CSI Section 16320
Front Accessible Operating

Mechanism
The GMI stored energy operator is located at the front of the circuit breaker. The
front cover can be easily removed to
expose the operator for inspection and
maintenance. This feature eliminates the
need to tilt or turn over the circuit breaker for normal service.
True Trip-Free Design
Both electrically and mechanically the
mechanism is truly trip-free even if the
circuit breaker is in the midst of a closing
operation, it can respond to a trip command. Unlike some oil and gas filled
breakers, it is not necessary for the contacts to close before the tripping operation can begin.

Specification Guide
Plug-in Connections
Connections to the close coil, trip coil, and
the spring charging motor on the circuit
breaker are by means of convenient captive plug type connectors, greatly simplifying replacement or inspection of these
devices.
Simple Barriers
To simplify maintenance, interphase barriers are not required for 1200 ampere circuit breakers. Outerphase barriers, and
interphase barriers (when provided), are
of very simple design, and located on the
circuit breaker, allowing the cell to be free
of barriers, except the current transformer
barrier located in front of the shutters. The
barriers on the circuit breaker remove
quickly and easily for maintenance which
can be done with the barriers in place.
39

15kV (contd)
Non-sliding Current Transfer
The vacuum interrupter movable stem is
connected to the lower disconnect stud
of the circuit breaker by a reliable flexible
connector, a method pioneered by
Siemens in the 1970s. This provides a
low resistance current transfer path, not
subject to the wear and contamination
problems associated with sliding or
rolling joints used in some designs.
General
breaker to be inserted in a breaker cell

provided that the circuit breaker equals or
exceeds the ratings required by the cell.
Primary Disconnects
Secondary Disconnects
Circuit breaker-to-cubicle secondary disconnects are of the sliding finger design. The
secondary disconnects are automatically
engaged as the circuit breaker is racked
into the test position. They remain
engaged as the circuit breaker is racked to
the connected position. Since the secondary disconnects automatically engage
in both the test and connected positions,
there is no need to operate a separate linkage for testing, as other designs require.
Auxiliary Switch (Breaker Mounted)

An eight stage auxiliary switch assembly
is mounted on the vacuum circuit breaker
with contacts for use in the circuit breaker control circuit and as spare contacts
for other use. Normally, four auxiliary
switch contacts, two N.O. and two N.C.,
can be wired out for purchaser use.
Mechanism Operated Cell (MOC)
Switch
When required, 6, 12, 18, or 24 stages of
MOC auxiliary switch can be mounted in
the circuit breaker cell. This switch is
operated by the circuit breaker mechanism, so that the switch contacts change
state whenever the circuit breaker is
closed or tripped. Normally, the MOC
switch is operated only when the circuit
breaker is in the connected position, but
provisions for operation in both the connected and the test positions can be
furnished.
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Current Transfer Path
Primary Disconnects
The primary connection between the circuit breaker and the cubicle is made of
multiple sets of silver-plated copper finger contacts which engage with silverplated copper stationary contacts. The
cubicle primary disconnect studs have a
rounded leading edge, which contributes
to smooth racking of the circuit breaker.
The contacts, mounted on the ends of
the breaker disconnect studs, have multiple fingers and are compression spring
loaded (one spring per double pair of fingers). This arrangement offers a large
number of contact points to ensure proper alignment. The breaker finger assemblies are withdrawn with the breaker, and
are available for inspection without deenergizing the switchgear main bus.
Universal Spare Breaker
The physical configuration and interlock
logic allow the use of a single circuit
breaker to serve as a universal spare
breaker at an installation site. The interlock logic checks the four principal rating
characteristics (continuous current, maximum voltage, interrupting current, and
close & latch current), and allows a circuit
40
Secondary Disconnects: Cubicle portion
Secondary Disconnects: Breaker portion
The secondary disconnects are located on

the side of the circuit breaker element,
where they are shielded from accidental
damage. They are of an extremely rugged
design, in contrast to other designs,
which employ light duty electronics-style
disconnects, located in hidden or inaccessible locations. Alignment of the disconnects can be visually observed, if desired,
allowing positive verification of secondary
integrity, a feature not possible with
designs employing a disconnect underneath or behind the breaker.
Truck Operated Cell (TOC) Switch

When required, 4, 8, or 12 stages of
truck operated cell switch can be mounted in the circuit breaker cell. The TOC
switch contacts change state when the
circuit breaker moves into or out of the
connected position.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16320

General

15kV (contd)
Surge Limiters
Type 3EF surge limiters are available for
use in distribution systems to protect
motors, transformers, and reactors from
the effects of voltage surges associated
with breaker operations. These limiters
are not designed to protect equipment
exposed to lightning surges, for which
surge arrestors should be applied. The
3EF surge limiters prevent the development of excessive overvoltages which
can result from multiple reignitions or virtual chopping. This is primarily of concern
during the starting of motors and switching of some reactive loads. In general, if
the impulse capability (BIL) of the protected equipment matches that of the
switchgear, no protection is needed due
to the surges produced by the opening of
the vacuum breaker. Since dry type transformers and rotating machines are generally of lower BIL, surge protection may
be necessary. Refer to Table 3.1 for minimum application recommendations for
surge limiters.
Protected
(Load)
Equipment
Liquid
Transformers
Surge Limiters
Recommended
No
Standard BIL
Dry Type
5kV 60kV BIL
Transformers
Motors
Ideal Dielectric
In a vacuum, the dielectric strength
across a contact gap recovers very rapidly allowing a small contact separation and
an efficient interrupter design. The vacuum does not interact with the arc or its
components as do other dielectrics.
7kV or 15kV
95kV BIL
Locked Rotor
Current <600A
Locked Rotor
Current >600A
Reactors
Capacitors
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Not
necessary if surge capacitors or surge arrestors are

located at transformer terminals.
necessary if surge capacitors and surge arrestors
are located at the machine terminals.
Not
Siemens Vacuum Heritage

The GMI Vacuum Circuit Breakers take
full advantage of Siemens long history
with vacuum interrupters for power applications. While early work was carried out
in the 1920s, a successful vacuum interrupter could not be perfected until the
high vacuum pump became available in
the 1960s. Focused development effort
began in 1969, culminating in the introduction of the type 3AF circuit breaker in
1976. The knowledge gained over years
of application of this technology in the
3AF circuit breakers is now available in
the GMI design. The advantages inherent
in vacuum interruption are summarized
as follows.
CSI Section 16320
Quiet Operation
Interruption of currents by a vacuum circuit breaker is very quiet as compared to
the loud report which accompanies interruptions in some other types of breakers.
Low Current Chopping
Characteristics
The chrome-copper arcing ring used in
Siemens interrupters limits chopping currents to a maximum of 5 amperes. This
low value prevents the build-up of unduly
high voltages and results in lower stress
on the insulation of load equipment.

Specification Guide
No Arc Products Vented to the

Atmosphere
The sealed vacuum interrupter prevents
venting of arc products to the atmosphere, and prevents any possible contamination of the contacts by the atmosphere. The metal vapor of the arc quickly
recondenses on the surface of the contacts, although a small amount may
recondense on the arc chamber wall. The
recondensing metal vapor acts as a getter and recaptures more molecules of
certain gases that might be liberated during vaporization. This action tends to
improve the vacuum in the interrupter
during its operating life.
Non-Toxic Interruption By-Products
The interruption process occurs entirely
within the sealed vacuum interrupter.
Even if an interrupter is physically broken,
the arc products inside the interrupter are
not toxic. In contrast, gas-filled interrupters produce toxic arc by-products,
requiring special precautions in the event
of a ruptured interrupter housing.
41
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Table 3.1 Surge Limiter

Recommendations
Vacuum Interrupters

General

15kV (contd)
Fewer Components
The vacuum interrupter pole construction
is extremely simple and consists of only
seven moving parts within the high voltage area and only two moving parts within the interrupter chamber. This means
greater reliability and less maintenance
with vacuum interrupters as compared to
the greater number of parts in other type
interrupters, such as air-magnetic, gas or
oil.
Long Interrupter Life
The interrupter has a long expected service life due to the careful selection of
components. The chrome-copper contacts allow efficient interruption of both
diffused and contracted arcs with very little contact erosion.
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Immunity to Environment
The capability of the vacuum bottle to
interrupt current or to withstand voltage
is not directly affected by conditions
external to the vacuum bottle. High or
low altitudes, hot or cold temperatures,
moist or dry conditions, or heavy dust
conditions do not affect the conditions
internal to the interrupter. Conditions
external to the interrupter, however,
could affect the overall system operation
and should be considered in the specifications.
Virtually Maintenance Free
Interrupter maintenance requires merely
wiping dust or other atmospheric elements from the exterior, visually checking the contact wear indicator, and periodic dielectric testing to confirm vacuum
integrity.
Lower Force Requirements
The vacuum interrupter has a very low
moving mass compared to the that found
in air-magnetic, gas or oil interrupters.
This allows a smaller, more compact
stored energy operator leading to long
life and low maintenance of the circuit
breaker.
Vacuum Interrupter Principles
With Siemens GMI vacuum circuit breakers, the chopping currents are held to 5
amperes or less. This is low enough to
prevent the build-up of unduly high voltages which may occur on switching of
inductive circuits. The chrome-copper
contact material keeps overvoltages to a
minimum, so special surge protection is
not required in most applications.
42
When the contacts

open, the current to
be interrupted initiates a metal vapor arc
discharge, and current
continues flowing
through this plasma
until the next current
zero.
The arc is extinContacts
guished near the current zero, and the
conductive metal vapor
recondenses on the
contact surfaces and
the arc chamber wall
within a matter of
microseconds. As a
result, the dielectric
strength of the break
recovers very rapidly
and contact erosion is
almost negligible.
The arc drawn in the
vacuum interrupter is
not cooled. The metal
vapor plasma is highly
conductive and the
resulting arc voltage
is only 20 to 200
volts. This low arc
voltage, combined
with very short arcing
times, produces only
a very small arc energy in the interrupter,
accounting for the
long electrical life
expectancy of the
Siemens vacuum
interrupter.
There are two types
Contact Condition After Interrupting 25kA 100 Times
of arc shapes. Up to
field causes the arc to travel around
approximately 10 kA, the arc remains
the contacts. This prevents localized
diffused. It takes the form of a vapor disoverheating when interrupting large
charge and covers the entire contact surmagnitudes of short circuit current.
face. Diffused arcs are easily interrupted.
Above 10 kA, the arc is constricted
considerably by its own magnetic field,
i.e. it contracts essentially to a point arc.
If the contracted arc is allowed to remain
stationary, it overheats the contact at the
arc roots to the point where the molten
metal vapor does not allow the dielectric
to rebuild during the current zero, and
large magnitude currents can not be
interrupted. To overcome this, the contacts are designed in a cup shape with
oblique slots, so that a self-generated

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16320

Ratings
Table 3.2
Technical
Type GMI Circuit Breaker Ratings
Measured Parameter
General Nominal Voltage Class
Nominal 3-Phase MVA Class
Max
Rated
Rated
Values
Voltage
Voltage Range Factor
Insulation
Levels
Low Frequency
Impulse
Rated Withstand
Test Voltage
Continuous
Rated
Current
Short circuit (at rated max. kV)

Interrupting Time
Permissible Tripping Delay Y
Rated Max. Voltage Divided by K
Max. Sym. Interrupting
K Times Rated
Short Circuit
3-Sec. Short Time
Current KI
Current Carrying
Related
Required
Current
Capabilities
Closing and
Latching
(Momentary)
1.6 K Times Rated Short Circuit Current
Circuit Breaker Type

5-GMI
5-GMI
-250
-350
kV
4.16
4.16
MVA
250
350
E kV RMS
4.76
4.76
K
1.24
1.19
kV RMS
19
19
kV Crest
60
60
1200
1200
Amperes
2000
2000
3000
29
I kA RMS
41
5
Cycles
5
Sec.
2
2
3.85
E/K kV RMS
4
kA RMS
36
49
kA RMS
2.7 K Times Rated Short Circuit Current
36
49
kA RMS
58 & 78
kA Crest
97 & 132
7-GMI
-500
7.2
500
8.25
1.25
36
95
1200
2000
3000
33
5
2
6.6
41
15-GMI
-500
13.8
500
15
1.3
36
95
41
23
78
66
132
111
1200
2000
18
5
2
11.5
23
37 & 58
62 & 97
15-GMI
-750
13.8
750
15
1.3
36
95
1200
2000
3000
28
5
2
11.5
36
15-GMI
-1000
13.8
1000
15
1.3
36
95
1200
2000
3000
37
5
2
11.5
48
36
48
58 & 77
62 & 130
77
130
High close and latch (momentary) rating available for special application.
Maximum voltage for which the breaker is designed and the upper limit for operation.
K is the ratio of rated maximum voltage to the lower limit of the range of operating voltage
Table 3.3
Type GMI Circuit Breaker Control Data
Control Voltages, ANSI C37.06 Table 10

Range
Nominal
Close
Trip
3856
2856
48 VDC
100140
70140
125 VDC
200280
140280
250 VDC
104127
120 VAC
208254
240 VAC
Current
Coil Amperes
Close
10
4
3
4
3
Trip
10
4
3
Spring Charging Motor

Amperes
Charging
Run (Avg.) Inrush (Peak) Seconds
8.5
15
10
2.7
10.2
8
1.3
2.4
8
3.3
10.6
8
1.7
7.1
8
at nominal voltage.
Table 3.5
Table 3.4 Interrupting Capacity
Auxiliary Switch Contacts
Type
Switch
Continuous
Current
Amperes
Breaker
TOC
MOC
20
15
20
Volt.
Class
Control Circuit Voltage

120 240 48 125 250
AC AC DC DC DC
20
15
15
20
10
10
20
10
0.5 0.5
10
10
2
0.2
5
5kV
15kV
Voltage Transformers
Ratio
2400/120
4200/120
4800/120
7200/120
8400/120
12000/120
14400/120
Accuracy Class
at 120V Sec.
W,X,Y
Z ZZ
0.3
1.2
0.3
1.2
0.3
1.2
0.3
0.3 1.2
0.3
0.3 1.2
0.3
0.3 1.2
0.3
0.3 1.2
VA
Thermal
Rating
500
500
500
1000
1000
1000
1000
Table 3.6
Current Transformers
60 Hz Metering Accuracy
at Burden
Ratio
B0.1
B0.5
B1.0
B2.0
Type MD Torroidal Standard Accuracy
100:5
2.4
150:5
0.6
2.4
200:5
0.6
1.2
250:5
0.6
1.2
2.4
300:5
0.6
0.6
1.2
2.4
400:5
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.4
500:5
0.3
0.3
0.6
1.2
600:5 0.3
0.3
0.6
1.2
800:5
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
1000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1200:5 0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1500:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2500:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3000:5 0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Type MDD Torroidal Special Accuracy
75:5
2.4
4.8
100:5
1.2
2.4
150:5
0.6
1.2
2.4
4.8
200:5
0.6
1.2
1.2
2.4
250:5
0.3
0.6
1.2
2.4
300:5
0.3
0.6
0.6
1.2
400:5
0.3
0.3
0.6
0.6
500:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.6
600:5 0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
800:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1200:5 0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
1500:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2000:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
2500:5
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
3000:5 0.3
0.3
0.3
0.3
Relay
Class
C 15
C 20
C 25
C 35
C 40
C 60
C 75
C100
C130
C170
C200
C200
C210
C300
C240
C 20
C 30
C 40
C 60
C 80
C100
C130
C160
C210
C270
C340
C425
C510
C460
C580
C660
1-second
through-current and momentary current are

equal to the ratings of the associated circuit breakers.
Exceeds ANSI C37.20.2 Accuracy Limit.

Multi-ratio current transformers available.
The accuracy
ratings shown apply only to the full secondary winding.
CSI Section 16320

Specification Guide
43
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
in which the required

symmetrical and asymmetrical interrupting capabilities vary in inverse proportion to the operating voltage.
3000 ampere ratings available with increased fan-cooled rating of 4000 amperes. Outdoor requires fans @ 3000 amps.
4000A available in Outdoor.
To obtain the required symmetrical interrupting capability of a circuit breaker at an operating voltage between 1/K times
rated maximum voltage and rated maximum voltage, the following formula shall be used.
Rated Maximum Voltage
Required Symmetrical Interrupting Capacity = Rated Short Circuit Current
Operating Voltage
For operating voltages below 1/K times rated maximum voltage, the required symmetrical interrupting capability of the
circuit breaker shall be equal to K times rated short circuit current.
With the limitations stated in 5.10 of ANSI Standard C37.04-1979, all values apply for polyphase and line-to-line faults.
For single phase-to-ground faults, the specific conditions stated in 5.10.2.3 of ANSI Standard C37.04-1979 apply.
Current values in this row are not to be exceeded even for voltages below 1/K times rated maximum voltage.
For voltages between rated maximum voltage and 1/K times rated maximum voltage, follow 5 above.
Current values in this row are independent of operating voltage up to and including rated maximum voltage.
Included for reference onlynot listed in ANSI C37.06.

Enclosure Dimensions
Dimensions
Weights and Dimensions are Approximate

Table 3.7 Cubicle Dimensions Per Vertical Section
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Type
Weight in
lbs. (kg)
Height
Width
Depth
Drawout Aisle
94.0 (2388)
76.0 (1930)
Recommended
3000 (1364)
76.0 (1930)
Included
4550 (2069)
76.0 (1930)
Included
8100 (3683)
76.0 (1930)
Recommended
3600 (1637)
Indoor
GM
95.25 (2419)
36.0 (914)
Shelter-Clad
Single-Aisle
SGM
114.75 (2915)
36.0 (914)
Shelter-Clad
Common Aisle
SGM
114.75 (2915)
36.0 (914)
Aisle-Less
Non-Walk-In
OGM
113.62 (2886)
36.0 (914)
173.0 (4394)
264.0 (6706)
94.0 (2388)
Table 3.8 GMI Circuit Breaker Weights in lbs. (kg)

Cont.
Current
Amps
1200
2000
3000
Circuit Breaker Type

5-GMI
-250
385 (175)
425 (193)
5-GMI
-350
440 (200)
480 (218)
575 (261)
7-GMI
-500
425 (193)
465 (211)
560 (255)
Add 6 in. (152 mm) to each end of linup for aisle 76 in. (1930 mm) aisle space recommended allows room
for interchange of breakers. Minimum aisle space
extension 12.0 in. (305 mm) total)
required for handling circuit breaker with lift truck is
61 in. (1549 mm). Minimum aisle space required if all
breakers are af floor level is 50 in. (1270 mm)
15-GMI
-1000
440 (200)
480 (218)
575 (261)
15-GMI
-750
425 (193)
465 (211)
560 (255)
15-GMI
-500
415 (189)
455 (207)
Add for roof overhang

Rear (Cable Side)
Front
Non-Walk-In
3.62 (92 mm)
5.37 (136 mm)
Shelter Clad
3.62 in. (92mm)
1.5 in. (38 mm)
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
End View of Type GM

Indoor Switchgear
End View of Non-Walk-In
Type OGM Outdoor Switchgear
End View of Single Aisle

Type SGM Outdoor Switchgear
44
End View of Common Aisle

Type SGM Outdoor Switchgear

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16320

Floor Plans
Dimensions
Notes:
1. Main bus sizes 1200A, 2000A, 3000A, or 4000A.
2. No rollout auxiliaries allowed in upper cell if lower cell has 3000A breaker. If 3000A breaker is located in upper cell, one roll
out auxiliary may be located in the lower cell.
3. Auxiliary cells may each contain 2 rollouts (except as indicated in notes 2 and 5).
4. Fuse rollout for stationary control power transformer must be located in lower rollout position in lower auxiliary cell.
5. For fan cooled 4000A rating, breaker (3000A self-cooled, 4000A fan-cooled) is located in lower cell and fan cooling equipment
is located in upper cell.
6. Stacking arrangements are available as shown. Total circuit breaker loading in a vertical unit may not exceed main bus rating.
Consult Siemens for specific application assistance regarding total load limits in each unit.
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Indoor Switchgear
CSI Section 16320
Non-Walk-In Outdoor Switchgear

Specification Guide
45

Side Views
Dimensions
1200, 2000, 3000A Breakers / Auxiliary
1200A or 2000A Breaker / 1200A or 2000A Breaker
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Blank / 3000A Breaker

(4000A with fan cooling)
1200A or 2000A Breaker /

Auxiliary
3000A / Auxiliary
VTs or CPT in position F
Bus Tie Breakers
Unit with Bus Tie Breaker

in Lower Compartment
Unit with Bus Tie Breaker

in Upper Compartment
46
Auxiliary / 1200A or 2000A Breaker
Auxiliary / Auxiliary
Auxiliary Positions:
Unit Adjacent to Lower Bus Tie

NOTE: Position F suitable for VTs or CPT only
Unit Adjacent to Lower Bus Tie

Specification Guide
For VTs
For VTs or CPT
For VTs
For VTs, CPT or Rollout Fuses for
Stationary CTP
Application Notes Regarding Bus Tie

Breakers
1. Bus tie breaker (1200A, 2000A, or
3000A) may be in upper or lower
compartment, as desired. 3000A bus
tie breaker must not have another circuit breaker in the unit which has the
3000A breaker.
2. Adjacent unit must normally have
auxiliary compartment at same level
as bus tie breaker to accommodate
transition bus. Consult Siemens if
auxiliary compartment at same level
as bus tie breaker is not available.
3. Units with 1200A or 2000A bus tie
breakers may have a feeder breaker
1200A or 2000A located in the same
unit.
4. Units with 3000A bus tie breaker in
lower cell must have a vented auxiliary compartment (no rollout auxiliaries) above the breaker. Units with
3000A bus tie breaker in upper cell
may have one rollout auxiliary in position F.
5. Maximum main bus size 4000A.
CSI Section 16320

Guide Form Specifications
Note: This specification form requires
information to be supplied by purchaser.
Those items preceded by check box
are alternates or are optional. These
items denoted preceded by a __ require a
quantity or data to be added.
General Description of Switchgear
Units and Rating
The equipment outlined in this specification shall consist of indoor nonwalk-in outdoor Shelter-Clad SingleAisle Shelter-Clad Common Aisle outdoor Metal-Clad switchgear with horizontal drawout, vacuum circuit breakers.
General construction features shall be of
a coordinated design so that shipping
groups are easily connected together in
the field into a continuous line-up.
Necessary standard connecting materials
shall be furnished. Shipping groups ordinarily will not exceed 15 ft. (4572 mm) in
length.
The general arrangement and single line
diagram of the equipment shall be as
indicated on Sketch Number dated __.
Service
The switchgear sections shall be 5kV
7kV 15kV class, with a maximum
design voltage of 4.76kV 825kV
15kV. This equipment shall operate on
a service voltage of _____ volts, 3 phase,
3 wire, 60 hertz.
Insulation Levels
The assembled switchgear structures
shall be designed for the following insulation levels:
Maximum Design Voltage
4.76kV 8.25kV 15kV
Insulation Test, (60 Hertz)
19kV
36kV
36kV
Full-wave Impulse Test (BIL)
60kV
95kV
95kV
CSI Section 16320
Circuit Breakers
The vacuum circuit breakers shall be:
Nominal Voltage class
kV, RMS
__
Nominal 3 Phase MVA Class
__
Rated Maximum Voltage
kV, RMS
__
Rated Continuous Current at
60 Hz-Amp, RMS
__
Rated Short Circuit Current at
Max Voltage kA, RMS
__
Rated Interrupting Time in
Cycles
__
Maximum Symmetrical Interrupting Capability kA, RMS
__
Short-Time (3 Sec.) Current
Carrying Capability kA
__
Closing and Latching
Capability kA, peak
__
The circuit breaker shall be three pole,
single throw, mechanically and electrically
trip free, with position indicator, operation
counter, auxiliary switches, primary and
secondary disconnecting devices, and
mechanical interlocks to prevent making
or breaking load current on the primary
disconnects.
The circuit breakers shall be equipped
with a stored energy operator. The control voltages shall be:
Spring Charging Motor:
48
125 250 volts DC
120 240 volts AC
Spring Release (Close) Coil:
48
125 250 volts DC
120 240 volts AC
Trip Coil:
48
125 250 volts DC
120 240 volts AC capacitor trip
The source of control power shall be
a battery provided in the switchgear
a control power transformer in the
switchgear a separate supply provided
by the purchaser a battery located in
the vicinity of the switchgear.
Meters and Relays
All instruments, meters and relays shall
be standard multi-function digital type for
mounting on the steel panels. All meters
and relays, if provided as standard, shall

Specification Guide
be of the drawout type with built-in test

devices. Indicating and recording instruments, meters and relays shall be of the
rectangular type, semi-flush mounted.
Control and Instrument Switches
All switches furnished shall be switchboard type and shall be of the rotary-type
construction, with two contacts per
stage.
Basic Structure
The switchgear assembly shall consist of
one or more vertical sections, each of
which shall have a main bus compartment and two vertically stacked equipment cells. The cells shall be arranged for
circuit breakers or auxiliary devices or
shall be blank as indicated in the detailed
specification.
Each main bus compartment shall contain a set of 1200 2000 3000
4000 ampere copper (silver plated at
electrical connection points), 3 wire insulated main bus and connections.
Each circuit breaker cell shall contain a
manually operated screw type drawout
racking mechanism, circuit breaker operated automatic shutters and safety interlocks and shall also include:
a. Hinged front panel.
b. Primary and secondary disconnecting
devices.
c. Control circuit cutout device.
d. Necessary terminal blocks, small
wiring and control buses, where
required.
e. Engraved nameplate, as required.
Each auxiliary cell shall include:
a. Hinged front panel, suitable for relays
and instruments.
b. Necessary terminal blocks, small
wiring and control buses, where
required.
c. Engraved nameplate, as required.
High Durability Finish
The framework and the panels shall be
chemically cleaned, hot phosphate treated, and rinsed, and shall be given an
electrostatically applied coat of ANSI 61
polyester urethane paint.
Production Tests
All switchgear assemblies and circuit
breakers shall be inspected and tested as
part of the regular manufacturing procedure. The tests and inspections shall conform to ANSI C37.20.2 (clause 5.3) for
Metal-Clad Switchgear Assemblies and
ANSI C37.09 (clause 5) for AC HighVoltage Circuit Breakers.
47
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Codes and Standards

The equipment covered in this specification, except as noted, shall be designed,
manufactured, and tested in accordance
with the latest revisions of the applicable
standards of:
ANSI
American National Standards
Institute
ASTM American Society for Testing
and Materials
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers
NEC
National Electric Code
NEMA National Electric Manufacturers
Association
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions of the
switchgear shall be as shown on the
sketch included with this specification.
The circuit breakers shall be removable
from the control panel side. An aisle
space of 76 in. (1930 mm) is recommended to permit withdrawal of the circuit breaker element.
Specifications

Weatherproof Housing (Select one
weatherproof enclosure design):
Shelter-Clad Single Aisle Design
Shelter-Clad Common Aisle Design
Non-Walk-In Outdoor Design
Medium Voltage
Switchgear

The Shelter-Clad Single Aisle Switchgear
shall consist of indoor type circuit breaker
and auxiliary cell located in a weatherproof steel housing having an operating
aisle space of sufficient size to permit
withdrawal of the circuit breakers for
inspection, test or maintenance. An
access door shall be located at each end
of the aisle, with provision for padlocking
on the outside, but also arranged so that
space shall have adequate incandescent
lighting receptacles which shall be controlled by means of a three-way switch at
each access door.
Included in the switchgear shall be the
following:
a. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in
each cell and cable compartment.
b. Two (2) utility duplex receptacles with
integral ground fault protection, one at
each aisle access door, for electric
tools, extension cords, etc.
The switchgear shall be shipped in convenient groups for erection in the field,
and shipping groups ordinarily shall not
exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in
length.
The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway shall be shipped in sections for erection in the field. The front wall of the
aisle shall be shipped attached to the
front of the cubicle assembly for ease of
handling. Necessary erection hardware
will be furnished.
The Shelter-Clad Common Aisle
Switchgear shall consist of two (2) lineups of indoor type circuit breaker and
auxiliary units located in a weatherproof
steel housing having a common operating aisle space of sufficient size to permit
withdrawal of the circuit breakers for
inspection, test or maintenance. An
access door shall be located at each end
of the aisle with provision for padlocking
on the outside, but also arranged so that
48

space shall have adequate incandescent
lighting receptacles which will be controlled by means of a three-way switch at
each access door.
Included in the switchgear shall be the
following items:
a. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in
b. Two (2) utility duplex receptacles with
integral ground fault protection, one at
each aisle access door, for electric
tools, extension cords, etc.
and shipping groups ordinarily shall not
exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in
length.
The weatherproof enclosure for the aisleway shall be shipped in sections for erection in the field. Necessary erection hardware shall be furnished.
Non-Walk-in Outdoor Design
The Non-Walk-In Switchgear shall consist
of indoor circuit breaker and auxiliary
units located in a steel housing of nonwalk-in weatherproof construction. Each
unit shall be equipped with a hinged front
door with provision for padlocking. Each
auxiliary cell is also equipped with an
inner hinged front door for mounting
relays and instruments.
The following equipment shall be furnished within each unit:
a. One (1) lamp receptacle with on-off
switch for interior illumination.
b. One (1) utility duplex receptacle with
integral ground fault protection, for
electric tools, etc.
c. One (1) space heater, 240 volts AC in
A switch for all the space heaters is
located in one cell.
and shipping groups will not exceed fifteen (15) feet (4572 mm) in length.
Necessary erection hardware will be furnished.

Specification Guide
Specifications
Detailed Specifications
The group of indoor outdoor
switchgear shall include:
1 Set _____ ampere, 3 phase, main bus.
1 Ground bus.
The circuit breaker cells and auxiliary cells
shall be as specified in the following
paragraphs:
Incoming Line Feeder Future
Feeder Circuit Breaker Cell(s):
(Cell Number(s) ____ ). (Example: 1-A
(in section 1, top cell; 2-B (in section
2, bottom cell)
Each this cell shall contain the following:
1 Provision only for future vacuum
circuit breaker vacuum circuit
breaker, rated _____ amperes,
type_____.
1 Mechanism operated cell (MOC) auxiliary switch, 6 12 18 24
stage.
1 Truck operated cell (TOC) switch, 4
8 12 stage.
__ Current transformer(s) single secondary, __:5 ampere ratio, single
ratio multi-ratio.
__ Space heater, 240 volts AC.
__ Thermostat.
Mounted in the cable termination
area:
1 Current transformer, zero sequence,
50:5 ampere ratio.
__ Set zinc-oxide surge arrestors, __kV,
station intermediate distribution class.
__ Set cable lugs, __ per phase, set
screw mechanical crimp compression
type, for __ type cable, __size, __ kV
for top bottom entry.
__ Set potheads, single conductor,
__ kV for -type cable, __ size, for top
bottom entry.
__ Set of 3 roof bushings, rated
__ amperes, __kV.
__ Provision for connection to a bar type
bus duct rated ___amperes, ___kV, at
the top of the unit.
__ Provision for connection to the throat
of a ___kVA transformer at the side of
the unit.
CSI Section 16320

Detailed Specifications
(contd)
CSI Section 16320
Mounted in the cable termination

area:
1 Set of sectionalizing bus work for connection to main bus in rear of adjacent
auxiliary cell at the same elevation.
(Cell Number_____).
__ Set tie bus work for connection to a
bar type bus duct rated _ amperes, _
kV, at the top of the unit.
__ Set Tie cable lugs, __ per phase, w set
screw mechanical w crimp compression type, for __ type cable,__ size, __
kV for w top w bottom entry.
Mounted on the hinged front panel of
the upper cell:
__ Circuit breaker control switch, complete with one red and one green indicating light.
__ Indicating light, amber white
blue.
__ Digital instrument, multifunction, type
4300.
__ Ammeter, single phase, indicating
recording 0-__ ampere scale.
__ Ammeter transfer switch, 3 phase.
__ Overcurrent relay(s) time, device 51
instantaneous, device 50 time
and instantaneous, device 50:51.
__ Ground overcurrent relay time,
device 51N instantaneous, device
50N.
__ Bus differential relay(s), Device 87B.
__ Lockout relay, Device 86.
__ Test Block, Current 6 pole
Potential 4 pole.
Auxiliary Cell(s):
(Cell Number(s) __). Each this cell
shall contain the following:
__ Voltage transformer(s), rollout tray

Specification Guide
__
__
__
__
__
__
mounted, __-120 volt ratio, complete

with primary current limiting fuses and
insulating shutter.
Control power transformer, rollout tray
mounted, __kVA (15kVA maximum),
single phase 60 Hertz, dry type,__-120
/ 240 volt ratio, complete with primary
current limiting fuses and insulating
shutter.
Control power transformer, stationary
mounted on the floor in the rear area
of the vertical unit, __kVA, single
phase (over 15kVA), three phase
(any size), 60 Hertz, dry type,____ volt
ratio, complete with rollout tray
mounted primary current limiting
fuses and insulating shutter. (Rollout
fuses tray located in the lower tray of
bottom cell only).
Battery,__volt, lead acid nickelcadmium type, __cells, with a maximum discharge rate of ___ amperes
for one minute to ___ volts per cell,
complete with rack and standard
accessories. (May be located only in
lower cell).
Battery charger, static type, with
without, voltage regulation, complete with ammeter, voltmeter, and /
or rheostat, suitable for use with the
above battery. (Requires an auxiliary
cell which does not contain any rollout
auxiliary trays).
Space heater, 240 volts AC.
Thermostat.
Accessories: The following accessories

shall be supplied, but not housed:
1 Manual racking crank
1 Manual spring charging lever
1 Tube contact lubricant
1 Container touch-up paint
1 Lift sling (for breakers if not at floor
level)
The following optional accessories shall
also be supplied.
1 Split plug jumper
1 Test cabinet
1 Test plug, for drawout relays and
watthour meters
1 Lift truck (for circuit breakers if not at
floor level)
1 Electric racking motor assembly
1 Spare Circuit Breaker(s) type __-GMI
___, rated ___amperes.
1 Ground and test device, manually
operated.
1 Fifth wheel device, for handling of circuit breakers.
49
3
Medium Voltage
Switchgear
Mounted on the hinged front panel of

the upper cell:
__ Circuit breaker control switch, complete with one red and one green indicating light.
__ Digital instrument, multifunction, type
4300.
__ Indicating light, amber white
blue.
__ Voltmeter, single phase, indicating
recording, 0-___ kV scale.
__ Voltmeter transfer switch, 3 phase.
__ Ammeter, single phase, indicating
recording 0-__ ampere scale.
__ Ammeter transfer switch, 3 phase.
__ Wattmeter , indicating recording
__ MW scale.
__ Watthour meter, __ element, with
15 30 minute demand attachment.
__ Varmeter, indicating recording
__ MVar scale.
__ Power factor meter.
__ Transducer, current voltage
watt var, single three
phase.
__ Overcurrent relay(s) time, device 51
instantaneous, device 50 time
and instantaneous, device 50 / 51
__ Ground overcurrent relay time
device 51N instantaneous, device
50N.
__ Directional relay(s), phase over current, time, device 67.
__ Directional relay, ground overcurrent,
time, device 67N.
__ Thermal overload relay(s), device 49,
single phase.
__ Current balance relay, device 46.
__ Undervoltage and phase sequence
relay, device 47.
__ Undervoltage relay(s), device 27, single phase.
__ Overvoltage relay(s), device 59, single
phase.
__ Differential relay(s), device 87.
__ Lockout relay, device 86.
__ Pilot wire equipment, 3 phase, device
87.
__ Pilot wire monitoring relay, device 85.
__ Under-frequency relay, device 81.
__ Auxiliary relay, device No. ___.
__ Reclosing relay, with one three
reclosure(s), automatic hand
reset, device 79.
__ Reclosing relay cutout switch, device
79CO.
__ Test Block, Current 6 pole
Potential 4 pole.
Bus Sectionalizing / Tie Circuit Breaker

Cell(s):
(Cell Number(s) __ ). Each this cell
shall contain the following:
1 Provision only for future vacuum
circuit breaker vacuum circuit
breaker, rated __ amperes, type __.
1 Mechanism operated cell (MOC) auxiliary switch, 6 12 17 18
24 stage.
1 Truck operated cell (TOC) switch, 4
8 12 stage.
__ Current transformer(s) single secondary, __ :5 ampere ratio, single
ratio multi-ratio.
__ Thermostat.
__ Set automatic transfer equipment for
transferring secondary control (may be
located in adjacent cell).
Specifications
Types SB1, SB2, SB3 and RCIII
General
7
Type SB1 Switchboard Pictorial
Sentron
Switchboards
Whether the design is for a 240V AC,

400 ampere system; a 600V AC, 4000
ampere system; or something in
between, Siemens Switchboards should
be considered. Every aspect of design
has been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing installation costs, and
minimizing the impact and cost of system changes. These switchboards provide the rugged construction and service
flexibility necessary in systems for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes, hospitals,
and commercial buildings, and are built to
UL-891 and NEMA PB-2 standards.
Type SB1 for Limited Space
Applications
The SB1 switchboard has been specifically designed for those applications
where floor space is at a premium. The
rear of all sections align so the switchboard can be installed against a wall. The
SB1 contains front-connected main protective devices and through-bus ratings
up to 2000 amperes at 600V AC.
Type SB2 for Increased Service and

More Load Cable Room
Siemens SB2 switchboard can have extra
depth behind the vertical bus in each distribution section, and contains main protective devices and through-bus rated up
to 4000 amperes at 600V AC. The rear of
all sections align as a standard. Front and
rear alignment is available as an option.
Type SB3 For Custom Options
The SB3 switchboard is available with
main bus up to 6000 amperes. All sections are front and rear aligned. Options
include, but are not limited to, incoming
and outgoing busway, Siemens
ACCESS System communications,
and cold sequence utility C.T.
Compartments.
Type RCIII Rear Connected
Switchboards
The RCIII switchboard differs from the
SB3 switchboard primarily in the mounting of the devices in the distribution section. The branch and feeder devices are
individually mounted. Because of this
method of mounting, access to outgoing
cable terminations must be from the rear
of the switchboard. Bus bar extensions
from the feeder devices are run back to
the rear of the unit for easy access.
The front and rear of all sections align,

designed for mounting away from the
wall. RCIII switchboards will accommodate systems up to 6000 amperes, 600
volts maximum in any three-phase threewire or three-phase four-wire configuration. The main bus can be specified for
600 to 6000 ampere rating. Main devices
and bus ties are available up to 5000
amperes, branch devices up to 2000
amperes. As with Type SB3, the RCIII
switchboard can be of indoor or outdoor
NEMA 3R construction.
Switchboard Distribution Sections
All standard distribution sections are 90 in.
(2286) mm) high and 38 in. (965 mm)
wide. Optional height of 70 in. (1778 mm)
and optional width of 32 in. (813 mm) and
46 in. (1168 mm) are also available.
SB1 distribution sections are 20 in.
(508 mm) deep. For deeper sections, SB2
and SB3 switchboards must be chosen.
SB2 distribution sections have a standard
depth of 20 in. (508 mm) but can also be
specified in depth of 28 in. (711 mm) and
38 in. (965 mm) when additional space is
required. Rear access is required to make
use of the additional depth of the SB2 and
SB3 switchboards, and to provide access
to bus connections, where required. SB2
may be installed against a wall.
See
Section 1 of this Guide for a complete discussion of

Siemens ACCESS system.
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
99
General
7
Sentron
Switchboards
Whether the design is for a 240V AC,

400 ampere system; a 600V AC, 4000
ampere system; or something in
between, Siemens Switchboards should
be considered. Every aspect of design
has been aimed at improving layout convenience, reducing installation costs, and
minimizing the impact and cost of system changes. These switchboards provide the rugged construction and service
flexibility necessary in systems for industrial plants, hi-rise complexes, hospitals,
and commercial buildings, and are built to
UL-891 and NEMA PB-2 standards.
Type SB1 for Limited Space
Applications
The SB1 switchboard has been specifically designed for those applications
where floor space is at a premium. The
rear of all sections align so the switchboard can be installed against a wall. The
SB1 contains front-connected main protective devices and through-bus ratings
up to 2000 amperes at 600V AC.
Type SB2 for Increased Service and

More Load Cable Room
Siemens SB2 switchboard can have extra
depth behind the vertical bus in each distribution section, and contains main protective devices and through-bus rated up
to 4000 amperes at 600V AC. The rear of
all sections align as a standard. Front and
rear alignment is available as an option.
Type SB3 For Custom Options
The SB3 switchboard is available with
main bus up to 6000 amperes. All sections are front and rear aligned. Options
include, but are not limited to, incoming
and outgoing busway, Siemens
ACCESS System communications,
and cold sequence utility C.T.
Compartments.
Type RCIII Rear Connected
Switchboards
The RCIII switchboard differs from the
SB3 switchboard primarily in the mounting of the devices in the distribution section. The branch and feeder devices are
individually mounted. Because of this
method of mounting, access to outgoing
cable terminations must be from the rear
of the switchboard. Bus bar extensions
from the feeder devices are run back to
the rear of the unit for easy access.
The front and rear of all sections align,

designed for mounting away from the
wall. RCIII switchboards will accommodate systems up to 6000 amperes, 600
volts maximum in any three-phase threewire or three-phase four-wire configuration. The main bus can be specified for
600 to 6000 ampere rating. Main devices
and bus ties are available up to 5000
amperes, branch devices up to 2000
amperes. As with Type SB3, the RCIII
switchboard can be of indoor or outdoor
NEMA 3R construction.
Switchboard Distribution Sections
All standard distribution sections are 90 in.
(2286) mm) high and 38 in. (965 mm)
wide. Optional height of 70 in. (1778 mm)
and optional width of 32 in. (813 mm) and
46 in. (1168 mm) are also available.
SB1 distribution sections are 20 in.
(508 mm) deep. For deeper sections, SB2
and SB3 switchboards must be chosen.
SB2 distribution sections have a standard
depth of 20 in. (508 mm) but can also be
specified in depth of 28 in. (711 mm) and
38 in. (965 mm) when additional space is
required. Rear access is required to make
use of the additional depth of the SB2 and
SB3 switchboards, and to provide access
to bus connections, where required. SB2
may be installed against a wall.
See
Section 1 of this Guide for a complete discussion of

Siemens ACCESS system.
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
99
Types SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII
General
Sentron
Switchboards
7
RCIII Switchboard Fixed Mounted
Devices
Table 7.2
Molded
Case
Circuit
Mounting
Breaker
Individual Panel Fixed
Yes
400-2000A
400-1200A
Yes
Yes
400-3200A
400-1200A
Yes
Yes
400-3200A
Yes
400-1200A
Yes
No
400-3200A
Switchboard
Type
SB1
SB2
SB3
RCIII
RCIII Switchboard Drawout Mounted

Devices
Table 7.1
General
Main
Switch- Bus
board Ampere
Rating
Type
SB1
to 2000
SB2
to 4000
SB3
to 6000
RCIII
to 6000
Connected
Front
Front
Front
Rear
Access
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
Install
Against
Wall?
Yes
Yes
No
No
Distribution section with two high 800 or 1200A

Vacu- Break is 28 in. (711 mm) deep.
Distribution section with two high bolted pressure
switch is 38 in. (965 mm) deep minimum.
Width depends on branch device. See page 128.
Fixed mounted only.
Drawout or fixed mounted.
Main Devices
Table 7.3
SB3
RCIII
Yes-Rear
Table 7.4
Bolted
Pressure
Fusible
Switch
Fixed
800-2000A
800-4000A
800-4000A
800-4000A
VacuBreak
Fusible
Switch
Fixed
30-600A
800-1200A
30-600A
800-1200A
HCP
Fusible
Switch
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
Bolted
Pressure
Fusible
Switch
Fixed
800-4000A
30-600A
100-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
800-4000A
Insulated
Case
Breaker
800-4000A
800-5000A
800-5000A
Fixed /
Drawout
LV
Power
Circuit
Breaker
800-4000A
Drawout
Yes
No
15-1200A
100-2000A
Insulated
Case
Breaker
800-2000A
800-4000A
Fixed /
Drawout
LV
Power
Circuit
Breaker
800-1600A
Drawout
Distribution Sections
100
HCP
Fusible
Switch
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
400-1200A
Branch Devices
Molded
Case
Circuit
Mounting
Breaker
Individual Panel Fixed
No
15-1200A
Yes
Yes
15-1200A
Yes
Yes
400-3000A
Switchboard
Type
SB1
SB2
VacuBreak
Fusible
Switch
Fixed
800-1200A
400-600A
400-1200A
400-600A
400-1200A
400-600A
400-1200A
Switchboard
Type
SB1
Access
Front
Dimensions in inches (mm)

Height
Width
Std.
Opt.
Std.
90 (2286)
38 (965)
SB2
Front
90 (2286)
38 (965)
SB3
Front &
Rear
90 (2286)
70 (1778)
38 (965)
RCIII
Rear
90 (2286)
70 (1778)
25, 32, 38,

(635, 813,
or 965)

Specification Guide
Opt.
32 or 46
(813 or 1168)
32 or 46
(813 or 1168)
32 or 46
(813 or 1168)
32 or 46
(813 or 1168)
Depth
Std.
20 (508)
Opt.
20 (508)
20 (508)
48 or 58
(1219 or 1473)
28 or 38
(711 or 965)
28, 38, 48, or 58
(711, 965, 1219
or 1473)
CSI Section 16470
Service Sections
Service Section Options Utility

Metering
In addition to the main disconnect, the
service section usually contains utility
metering provisions. Hot metering
(CTs on the line side of the main disconnect) is normal, but cold metering provisions (CTs on the load side of the main
disconnect) can also be furnished.
Whether hot or cold metering is required,
the CTs provided by the utility company
will be mounted in a completely separate
compartment. The compartment will be
built to utility company standards, with
hinged doors and provisions for metering
equipment provided by the utility.
Main Disconnect Options

Main protective devices can be mounted
individually for quick access in an emergency. Switchboards will accommodate a
variety of main protective devices.
Selection depends on the characteristics
of each electrical system.
Type RL Power Circuit Breakers
Power circuit breakers, 800 5000
amperes, 600 volts AC, with solid-state
overcurrent trip devices offer storedenergy tripping plus optional ground fault
protection, selective tripping, and a broad
range of accessories.
Type RL, LV Power Circuit Breaker

Insulated case circuit breakers, 800 5000
amperes, 600 volts AC, with solid-state
trip devices, offer stored energy tripping
plus optional ground fault protection,
selective tripping, and a broad range of
accessories.
Extra Heavy Duty Breakers

High-interrupting-capacity thermalmagnetic breakers, 400 2000 amperes,
600 volts AC, provide increased protections where high available fault currents
exist, with the same convenience and
accessory feature offered in standard
interrupting capacity breakers.
Solid-State Sensitrip
Full function breakers 400 3200
amperes, 600 volts AC, have solid-state
circuitry which assures minimal damage
through the quick interruption control of
fault currents, and includes short-time
delay and ground fault trip for branch
device coordination.
Fuseless Current Limiting
Molded case breakers, 400 1600
amperes, 600 volts AC, with thermalmagnetic protection provide coordinated
protection for branch devices and circuits
where extremely high fault currents are
available. Solid state current limiting
molded case breakers also available in
ratings of 400 1600A.
Fusible Switches
Vacu-Break Fusible Switches, 400 1200
amperes, 600 volts AC, provide protection, coordination with branch protective
fusible switches, and application flexibility
in systems where high available fault
currents are encountered.
HCP Fusible Switch
HCP switches, 400 1200 amperes,
600 volts AC, combine economy with
extremely high interrupting capacity in
conjunction with Class J and Class L
fuses. Has visible contacts and optional
auxiliary contacts, shunt trip and ground
fault relaying.
Bolted Pressure Switches
Bolted pressure switches, 800 4000
amperes, 480 volts AC, combine economy with extremely high interrupting
capacity in conjunction with Class L
fuses. Options include short trip, ground
fault relaying, and a wide range of other
accessories.
Type SB Encased Systems Breaker

Customer Metering Compartment
Customer Metering
The service section often provides
space for many user instrument requirements. Ammeters, voltmeters, and their
associated selector switches can be
mounted in the service section along
CSI Section 16470
Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Heavy Duty
Standard interrupting capacity, thermalmagnetic breakers, 400 2000 amperes,
600 volts AC, provide protection that
allows immediate restoration of power
for normal system requirements. A wide
range of accessory options is available,
including shunt trip, motor operator, auxiliary switches, alarm switches, and others.
Specification Guide
Ground Fault Relays

All main protective devices, except
Vacu-Break fusible switches, can be
equipped with ground fault relays to
comply with the National Electrical Code
(Section 230-95) ground fault protection
requirements.
101
7
Sentron
Switchboards
Bussed or Non-Bussed Pull Sections

With Siemens switchboards, a nonbussed pull section, or a cross-bussed
pull section for underground feed can
be selected. The unique cross-bussed
section permits cable to be run straight
from underground to the bus bars at the
top of the section. Non-bussed pull sections have openings for carrying the
underground feed cables to the service
section bus.
Typical switchboards consist of a service
section, and one or more distribution sections. Service sections can be fed directly
from overhead by cable or busway.
When fed from underground, a separate
pull section is usually added. The service
section is then fed from the adjacent
underground pull section.
Bolted Pressure Switches, Vacu-Break
and HCP Switches equipped for bottom
feed will accept cable directly from
underground into the service section.
with the main disconnect. A separate

section would be needed only if a large
instrument or an unusual number of
instruments were required.
General
Front-Connected Construction Types SB1, SB2, and SB3
Sentron
Switchboards
Bus Bars Design

Siemens switchboard bus bars are available in standard tin-finished aluminum or
optional silver-finished copper. Standard
bus is sized to limit heat rise to 65C
above an ambient temperature of 40C
maximum in accordance with UL 891.
As an option, conductor material can be
sized according to density limits, based
on bus material. The applicable limits are:
Aluminum 750 amperes / sq. in.
Copper 1000 amperes / sq. in.
In accordance with NEMA and UL 891
standards, at each distribution section,
the through-bus capacity is reduced as
load is taken off. The through-bus is
tapered to a minimum of one-third the
ampacity of the incoming service mains.
If required by special system characteristics, switchboards can be supplied with
optional full-capacity bus; i.e., the ampacity of the through-bus remains at the full
ampacity of the main throughout the
switchboard.
Splice Plates
All splice plates can be accessed, bolted,
and unbolted from the front of the
switchboard to make connection of
adjacent sections easy. Each splice plate
is attached with one 1/2-inch grade 2
bolt, and a 2-inch or 3-inch Belville
washer on each end. This reduces installation time while increasing contact
pressure at the joint.
To make installation and servicing of the
splice plates easier, all phase and neutral
through-busses are stacked one above
the other, eliminating the need to stuff
bolts in between bus bars that are
stacked one behind the other in the
same horizontal plane.
Disconnect Links in Service Entrance
Equipment
In switchboard service sections to be
used as service entrance equipment on
13W and 34W systems, provisions
must be included to isolate the neutral
bus from the grounded service neutral.
This removable link gives you the ability
to check branch neutral continuity on the
load side of the main disconnect.
To maintain a service ground to the
switchboard frame while the neutral
link is removed, a bonding strap is connected from the switchboard frame to
the neutral bus on the line side of the
removable link.
UL and SUSE (suitable for use as service entrance) labels will be furnished on
102
Bus Bars and Lug Construction
General
Splice Plates
service sections specified for service

entrance.
Cable Terminals
Screw mechanical connectors (lugs) are
provided as standard equipment on all
devices. However, compression connectors are available as an option on all main
lugs, main bolted pressure switches,
main power circuit breakers, main
molded case, main fusible devices, and
main insulated case circuit breakers.
Siemens switchboard distribution sections are engineered for accessibility and
expanded use. For expanded wiring room
and exceptional accessibility, generous
top and bottom gutters have been created by locating through-bus in the rear
center of the distribution section. In cable
entrance sections, no obstructions are
less than 8 in. (203 mm) above the floor,
and no live bus bars are located less than
10 in. (254 mm) off the floor. So there is
plenty of room to run cables into the distribution section for connections.
Standard bolted gutter covers give complete access to load conductors. Optional
hinged gutter covers can be furnished
where quick access to load connectors is
desired.
Heavy channels form a rigid ring at the
base and top of each section, and heavy
gauge structural members are used for
the vertical corner posts eliminating
encroachment of additional bracing into
the top and bottom gutter areas.
To provide additional room for top load
cable routing where needed, pull box
extensions are available in heights of
10,15, 20, 25, and 30 in. (254, 381, 508,
and 762 mm) to mount on any standard
distribution section. Top plates on all sec-

Specification Guide
Screw Mechanical Connectors
tions are easily removed in the field for

drilling, punching, and cutting conduit
entry holes.
Because all distribution sections can
accommodate any combination of panelmounted branch devices, including
molded case circuit breakers, Vacu-Break
fusible switches, and motor starters,
future system modifications are easier
to handle without adding switchboard
sections.
To make additional distribution sections
easier to install when they are necessary,
the through-bus in each distribution section is extended, and the end is predrilled to accept splice plate bolts. To add
a section to an existing switchboard, set
the new section flush against the side of
the existing distribution section, and bolt
together the bus bar splice plates.
CSI Section 16470
Front Connected Construction Types SB1, SB2, and SB3
General
Distribution Sections (contd)

Distribution sections of SB1, SB2, and
SB3 switchboards can accept any combination of molded case circuit breakers
and fusible switches. If the system calls
for a mixture of these devices, there is
the option of grouping the devices in logical patterns within a single section. A
separate section is not needed for each
type of device. And because all types of
devices can be put in a single section,
the total number of sections required in
the system can be reduced.
For future modifications, devices can be
added or replaced as the system grows
and changes. If a motor starter has to be
added after the installation, an entire
switchboard section need not be provided
to house it. It can be installed in any distribution section with available unit space.
7
Sentron
Switchboards
Operating Temperatures
All distribution sections contain louvers
both at the top and bottom to assure
cool operation in accordance with UL
Standard 891.
Bus Location
All through-bus to adjoining sections is
located in the rear center of the distribution section. This design provides large,
unobstructed wiring gutters at the top
and bottom of each section. Wiring takes
less time and costs less to install.
Motor Starter Switchboards
Type SB3 switchboards offer a complete
line of group-mounted starters that provide a compact and convenient method
of combining power distribution and
control circuits in one location.
Motor starter units are available with fully
bussed circuit breaker or fusible VacuBreak units, factory-wired on the load
side to full voltage, non-reversing starters
to reduce installation time.
Type A wiring is standard without terminal blocks. The fusible switch, circuit
breaker, or starter unit is factory wired;
however, control and load cabling is
connected by the installer directly onto
the starter.
Type B wiring is available as an option.
Control wiring is brought out to terminal
blocks and identified. Starter load terminals are conveniently located near the
vertical wiring gutters and adjacent to
control terminal blocks. No wiring external to the unit is furnished.
Type C wiring is not available in motor
starter switchboards.
CSI Section 16470
Front Connected Switchboards, Type SB1

Specification Guide
103
Rear Connected Construction Type RClll
General
RClll Construction Details

Distribution Feeder Section
Siemens Type RClll switchboard differs
from front connected switchboards primarily in the distribution section. The
branch and feeder devices are individually
mounted. Because of this method of
mounting, access to outgoing cable terminations must be from the rear. Bus bar
extensions from the feeder devices are
run back to the rear of the unit for easy
access.
7 Molded Case Circuit

Sentron
Switchboards
Breakers
Fixed or Plug-in Individually Mounted

Devices
This design consists of a front section
where the distribution devices are
mounted, a bus section in the center, and
a cable termination area in the rear. The
front metal cover represents a grounded
protection for the operator at the front of
the switchboard. The main through-bus
runs near the bottom of the switchboard.
Section bus risers from the main bus are
located in the center of the distribution
section with taps to branch breakers.
The load side terminals of each front
mounted device are extended through
the bus compartment into the rear cable
compartment. These bus extensions are
insulated where necessary as they pass
Type SB Encased
Systems Breakers
Drawout or Fixed Mounted Devices
Insulated case circuit breakers are individually mounted in their own compartments as standard. Metal barriers are
provided at the sides of each compartment and an insulation horizontal barrier
is located between breakers in the same
vertical section. Access is provided
through a removable cover on fixed
mounted breakers and a hinged access
door on drawout breakers.
The insulated case circuit breaker drawout assembly is a self-contained, integral
unit that permits quick circuit breaker
replacement or inspection and maintenance of breakers without de-energizing
the entire switchboard. The easily accessible and maintainable spring loaded primary disconnect fingers are mounted on
the breaker. The drawout assembly consists of a stationary frame and a movable
carriage to support the breaker. The secondary disconnects for accessory control
circuits are mounted on the movable carriage. A matching set is mounted on the
104
Front View
Rear View
Type RClll Switchboard with Individually Mounted Molded Case Circuit Breakers
the main bus bars. Additional protection

can be provided with optional barriers
between devices and bus compartment,
between individual devices, between bus
and cable compartment, and between
vertical sections.
For further information on Siemens
molded case circuit breakers, see
Section 17.
stationary frame. The drawout design of

insulated case circuit breakers makes it
possible to place the breaker in a fully
withdrawn, disengaged test, or engaged
position. The load side of each breaker
has bus bars extending into the rear cable
compartment. Additional protection can

be provided with optional barriers
between the bus and cable compartment
and between vertical sections. For further
information on Siemens SB breakers, see
Section 16.
Type RClll Switchboard with SB Encased Systems Breakers.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470
General

7
Sentron
Switchboards
Front View of Incoming Service and

Rear View of Bus and Cable Compartment

of Feeder System Barriers Installed
Rear View of Bus and Cable Compartment

of Feeder System Barriers Removed
Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers
Transformer
Connection
Front View
Rear View
Incoming Service and Distribution Feeder Section for Type RL Drawout LV Power Circuit Breakers.
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
105
General
Type RL Low Voltage Power

Circuit Breakers (contd)
Drawout low-voltage power circuit breakers are also individually mounted in their
own compartments as standard. Metal
barriers are provided at the sides and rear
of each compartment and a horizontal
metal barrier is located between breakers
in the same vertical sections. Access is
provided through a hinged metal door on
each breaker compartment.
Sentron
Switchboards
Safe Closed-Door Drawout Mechanism

The low voltage power circuit breaker
can be moved from connect through
test to disconnect position without
opening the door. In the connect position, both the primary and secondary disconnects are engaged. In the test
position, the primary disconnect terminals are disengaged; however, the secondary disconnects are maintained to
permit operation of the circuit breaker. In
the disconnect position, the primary
and secondary disconnects are disengaged and separated a safe distance
from the corresponding stationary terminals. In the fully withdrawn position,
both primary and secondary contacts are
disconnected and the circuit breaker may
be inspected or removed for more complete accessibility.
The load side of each breaker has bus
bars extending from the rear of the
primary disconnect through the bus compartment into the rear cable compartment. Additional optional barriers can be
provided between bus and cable compartments and between vertical sections.
Testing
Testing conducted by Siemens includes
both production testing of switchboard
sections for compliance with UL requirements, and developmental, design verification, and quality control testing.
Production tests check structural integrity
and are performed on all switchboard sections in accordance with UL procedures.
A test voltage equal to twice the rated
voltage plus 1000 volts (Vt = 2Vr + 1000)
is applied for one minute to each switchboard section to check the integrity of the
conductor and insulator materials, and the
switchboard assembly. These tests are
performed routinely to verify proper
equipment fabrication and assembly.
106
Type RCIII Cutaway Side View
For more sophisticated design verification

and developmental testing a separate laboratory is used. This test lab is fully
instrumented for advanced, multi-phase
electrical test work over a wide range of
system conditions.
Among the tasks performed is the determination of heat rise at busway connections, and at protective device
terminations on both line and load sides.
All heat rise tests are conducted in strict
accordance with applicable UL standards.
Heat rise data from the tests are carefully compared to UL allowable levels.

Specification Guide
Another important laboratory program is

the systematic verification of short circuit
withstand capabilities for all switchboard
conductor materials. Switchboard bus
has been thoroughly tested and is UL
short circuit withstand rated (UL File
#E-22578). Switchboard sections with
designs conforming to test specifications
will carry a label noting the short circuit
current withstand rating applicable to that
section. For additional information on
Siemens RL breakers, see pages 54-61.
CSI Section 16470
Modifications and Accessories
Metering
Utility Metering
Requirements for power company metering and instrument transformer requirements vary with serving utility. Typically,
utility company current transformers
require a 30 in. (762 mm) high compartment in SB1, SB2, SB3, and RCIII construction. Service sections meet most
utility metering standards.
4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters

The 4300 Power
Meter is provided as
a standard metering
option for SB1,
SB2, SB3, and RCIII
switchboards. Alternate metering options
for SB3 and RCIII
See Section 1
include the higher
accuracy 4700 Power Meter or analog
metering equipment if specified. The
4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters are
microprocessor-based, three-phase
meters that provide advanced features at
an affordable price. These meters are
designed as an alternative to full-featured
digital instrumentation packages, providing highly accurate, reliable, transient
surge and hipot-withstand capabilities.
Voltage and amperage measurements
are true RMS, including harmonics.
The 4300, 4700 and 4720 Power Meters
can be configured to operate in Wye
(Star), Delta, or single-phase voltage
modes. The meter is equipped to monitor
the measurements shown in Table 7.5.

The display module has a high visibility,
liquid crystal display (LCD). Functions buttons display measured data, including
volts, amperage, power function, all three
voltage and amperage phases.
Replacing analog meters and selector
switches, the two-module design simplifies wiring and reduces installation time.
This makes the Power Meter ideally
suited for economical metering on threephase industrial and commercial switchboards. A communications port allows
the power meter to be used as a standalone power monitoring station or as one
element in a large energy-management
network.
When used as part of a Siemens
ACCESS installation, the 4300, 4700 and
4720 Power Meters can communicate
with up to 128 ACCESS-compatible
devices. Using a direct PC connection or
a dial-up modem, the module interfaces
with Siemens SIEServe on-line software that monitors any ACCESS component on the electrical distribution system.
Ammeters and Voltmeters (Analog)
Ammeters are switchboard type with
1% accuracy, 0 to 6000 amperes maximum. The included instrument switch
will provide positions to read each phase
and will include an OFF position. Panel
type ammeters with 3% accuracy, 800
ampere maximum, can be furnished for
branch feeder metering to conserve
panel space.
Voltmeters are switchboard type with
1% accuracy, 0 to 600 volts AC. The
included instrument switch provides positions to read each phase-to-phase voltage
and each phase-to-neutral voltage, and
has an OFF position.
Current Transformers / Potential
Transformers
Potential transformers are recommended
wherever the system voltage exceeds
150 volts AC phase-to-neutral to lower
voltage levels for instrument switches
and meters mounted on the switchboard
front panel.
4 digit indicator
4 digit
5 digit / 8 character
7
Sentron
Switchboards
Customer Metering
A full compartment of switchboard instruments with appropriate current transformers, potential transformers and
selector switches are available in all
Siemens switchboards.
The meters and instrument switches are
mounted on hinged panels with potential
transformers and fuses behind the door.
Current transformers are mounted on the
main bus or, in the case of branch feeder
metering, at the load terminals of the
branch protective device and normally do
not require additional unit space.
General
Siemens 4300 and 4700 Power Meters
Table 7.6Power Meter Features

Metering
Features
Phase currents
Avg. phase current
Ampere demand
Phase voltages
Avg. phase voltage
Line voltages
Avg. line voltage
kW
kVA
kVAR
kW demand
kW hours
kVAR hours
Power factor
Frequency Hz
Power Meter Accuracy

4300
0.5%
0.5%
N/A
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
0.5%
1.0%
1.0%
1.0%
1.0%
1.0%
N/A
2.0%
0.2Hz
4700
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
1.0%
0.2Hz
4720
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.2%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
0.4%
1.0%
0.2Hz
Table 7.7 Available CT Ratios

Ampere Rating
100:5
150:5
200:5
300:5
400:5
500:5
600:5
800:5
1000:5
1200:5
1500:5
2000:5
2500:5
3000:5
4000:5
5000:5
6000:5
Table 7.5Number of CT's and or PT's required for Typical Meters Applied on Selected System Voltages
Watthour Meters
System
13W
33W
34W
Volts
120/240
240
480
120/240
120/208
277/480
CSI Section 16470
Ammeter
C/T
2
2
2
3
3
3
Voltometer
P/T
Scale
0-300
0-300
0-600
0-300
0-300
0-600
2 Element
C/T
P/T
2
2
2
2.5 Element
C/T
P/T
3
3
3
3 Element
C/T
P/T
3
3
Wattmeter
C/T
P/T
2
2
2
3
3
3

Specification Guide
2
2
2
Varmeter
C/T
P/T
2
2
2
3
3
3
2
2
2
Power Fac- Frequency Synchrotory Meter Meter

scope
C/T
P/T
P/T
P/T
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
107
Motor Control
Table 7.8
NEMA Size
0, 1
2
3
4
FVNR
50 VA
100 VA
150 VA
250 VA
Standard Control Power

Transformers: 480 / 240 / 120 Volts AC
Pushbutton: Two-Unit Start-Stop,
Open-Close, Etc.
General
Selector Switch: 1-Pole, DoubleThrow (ON / OFF); 2-Pole, DoubleThrow (hand / off / auto)
Pilot Lights: Red or Amber (neon
type); Green (incandescent type,
includes auxiliary interlock);
Transformer and Push-to-Test type
Pilot Lights Available
Auxiliary Interlocks: Sizes 14
Control Relays (may increase mounting height)
Sentron
Switchboards
7 Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Static Trip III Microprocessor-Based
Tripping
The Static Trip III trip
unit comes in four
models for maximum
flexibility. Table 7.9
shows the functions
of the various models.
(See pages 13, 56-57).
The parameters measured by the Static

Trip IIIC / CP trip units are shown in
Table 7.11. For protective relay functions, Table 7.10 shows how the Static
Trip IIICPX trip unit can be used. All
communicating Static Trip III trip units
include a local communication port that
supports the breaker mounted display
unit or BDU. The BDU features a high-
Table 7.9Static Trip III Trip Unit Functions

Static Trip III Model
III
IIIC
Functions
Self-Powered Overcurrent Protection
RMS Sensing
Switchable Thermal Memory
LCD Target
Protective Microprocessor Watchdog
Pickup LEDs
Zone Interlocking
Retrofit Universal Mounting Package
RS-485 Communications Port
Breaker Display Unit Port
Communications Microprocessor Watchdog
Comm Watch LED
Backup Shadow Protection
Trip Log
Alarm Relay Output
Trip Unit Status Indication
Breaker Position Indication
Breaker Operation Counter
Communication Open/Close/Trip
Event Log
Phase Current Metering
Ground Current Metering
Neutral Current Metering
Min/Max Current Log
Power Metering Functions
Min/Max Power Log
Extended Protective Relaying
Extended Trip Log
Requires additional wiring to meet specific application.
Supports optional Breaker Display Unit Accessory.
Included when ground fault protection specified.
IIICP
IIICPX
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
opt.
Requires N option and neutral current sensor.

Open command uses alarm relay output and restricts
use for other alarm functions. Close command requires

electrically operated breaker.
Table 7.10Static Trip IIICPX Protective Relay Functions

Protective Function
Current Unbalance
Voltage Unbalance
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Reverse Power
Overfrequency
Underfrequency
108
Setting Range
550%
550%
60660V
60660V
102000kW
50.070.0Hz
45.060.0Hz
Typical Applications
Motors
Generators
Mains

Specification Guide
Auxiliary Switch A or B Type for

Molded Case Breakers (not available
on Vacu-Break units)
Application Note: Mounting Height of
FVNR Motor Starter Increases by 2.5 in.
(64 mm) when Control Transformer is
Furnished
Master Control Power Transformers
require individual starter secondary disconnecting means (1996 NEC 430-74).
visibility alphanumeric display. Real-time

metered values, min / max values, event
log data and setpoint data can be read
on the BDU in straightforward engineering units. Alarm and relay setpoint can
be configured using the BDU keypad.
For complete information on Type RL
breakers, see pages 5461.
Table 7.11Static Trip III Trip Unit
Settings
T: Long Time
Setting
(X Sensor Rating)
.5, .55, .6, .65, .7, .75,
.8, .85, .9, .95, 1.0
S: Short Time
Pickup
(X LT Setting)
2, 3, 4, 5,
6, 7, 8, 12
I: Instantaneous
Pickup
(X Sensor Rating)
2, 4, 6, 8,
12, 15
G: Ground Fault
Pickup
(% Ground Sensor)
20, 30, 40, 50, 60,
Pickup
Delay
(Seconds @ 6X Setting)
3.5, 6, 10
17, 30
Delay
(Seconds)
.08, .15, .22
.30, 40
Delay
(Seconds)
No Intentional
Delay
Delay
(Seconds)
.10, .25, .40
is fixed at 1.1 times long time setting.
Table 7.12Static Trip III Metering

Functions
Measured
Parameters
Phase Current
Avg. Phase Currents
Ground Current
Neutral Current
Phase Voltages
Avg. Phase Voltage
Line Voltages
Avg. Line Voltage
kW
kW Demand
kW Hours
kW Hours Reverse
kVA
kVAR
kVAR Hours
Power Factor
Frequency
Model
IIIC
IIICP
opt.
opt.
Included when ground fault protection specified.

Requires N option and neutral current sensor.
Only displayed for four wire systems.
CSI Section 16470
General
Table 7.13Available Rating Plugs
SB Encased Systems Breakers
Shunt Trip
Auxiliary Switches, up to 6 N.O. / N.C.
Undervoltage Release
Electronic Bell Alarm Module
Electric Charging Motor Operator with
Electronic Controller
Integral Local Electric Close Option
Integral Kirk-Key Interlock on SB
Close Blocking Device
Trip Padlock Device
Position Padlock Device (Drawout)
Frame Ampere
Rating (In)
400
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3200
4000
5000
Cell Switches, 4 N.O. / N.C. (Mounted

on Drawout Stationary Element)
Automatic Safety Shutters
Kirk-Key Provision (Mounted on
Drawout Stationary Element)
Mechanical Interlock
Capacitor Trip Device
Remote Indication / Relay Panel
Auxiliary Power Module (for benchtesting trip unit)
TS 31 Universal Test Set
Rating Plug Amperes (Ir)

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200, 1600
1000, 1200, 1600, 2000
1600, 2000, 2500
1600, 2000, 2500, 3000, 3200
2000, 2500, 3000, 3200, 4000
2500, 3000, 3200, 4000, 5000
For additional SB breaker information,

see Section 16.
Table 7.14SB Breaker Trip Unit Ratings (Ir = Rating Plug Value; In = Frame Ampere Rating)
Current Setting (x Current Rating P/US)
Delay (Sec.)
2.5, 5.5, 8, 10, 14, 17, 21, 25, 30
Short Time
(S)
Frame Amp Rating
8002000A
25005000A
Pick up (xIr)
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9
1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
Delay (I2t) out
.07, .1, .15, .2, .3 seconds
Ground
Fault
(G)
Current equal to 6 times Ir
Delay (I2t) in
.07, .1, .15, .2, .3 seconds
Frame Amp Rating
8002000A
Pick up (xIr)
25kA
Frame Amp Rating
8001200A
2000A
3200A
40005000A
Fixed
25kA
35kA
50kA
65kA
Frame Amp Rating In
Available Setting (In)
400, 800, 1200
20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
1600
20, 26, 32, 38, 44, 50, 56, 62, 68, 75
2000
20, 23, 27, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60
2500
20, 23, 26, 29, 32, 35, 38, 41, 44, 48
3200
20, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 31, 33, 35, 37
4000
20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 30
5000
Setting fixed at 1200A
Delay (Fixed)
.1, .2, .3, .4, .5 seconds @ .5 = In
Delay (I2t)
.1, .2, .3, .4, .5 seconds @ .5 = In
Current equal to 8 times Ir
Sentron
Switchboards
Pickup
Adjustable
Instantaneous
Pick-up (I)
Instantaneous
Override
.5, .6, .65, .7, .75, .8, .85, .9, .95, 1.0
Long Time
(T)
25005000A
1.5, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
.500 seconds maximum
No
trip point setting exceeds 1200 amperes

1
22
23
18
19
21
SB Trip Unit
Replaceable Rating Plugs Adjustable
From 50100% of Frame Rating.
Continuous Self-Diagnostic Watchdog
Integral Test Functions for Phase and
Ground Fault (Trip and No-Trip Tests)
External Power Source Allows Bench
Testing of Stand-Alone Trip Unit
Plug-in Display Modules for Current and
Energy Display Capabilities
Long Time Continuous Current Setting
Long Time Delay Band Setting
CSI Section 16470
Static Trip III Trip Unit

Short TIme Pickup Setting
Short Time Delay Band Setting
Instantaneous Pickup Setting
Integral LED Trip Indicators
Full Communications Capability Via
Siemens ACCESS Network
LCD Target
Thermal Memory Switch
Short Time I2t Ramp Switch
Zone Interlock Switch

Specification Guide
20
SB-EC Trip Unit

Zone Interlocking Input / Output and
Future Options
LCD Display
Key Pad
Test Connector
21 Serial Port
22 System Check Leds
23 System Status Leds
109
Sentron
Switchboards
Alarm Switch for remote indication

and / or pilot device operation when
breaker is tripped automatically.
Shunt Trip (electric open-manual
close) for remote tripping of breaker.
Includes cut-off switch. Specify control voltage.
Undervoltage Trip automatically trips
breaker when voltage is reduced
35%70% of coil rating. Specify
Control Voltage.
Auxiliary Switch 1A and 1B, 2A and
2B, etc.
Telemand Motor Operator (electric
open and close). Operating Voltage
48V DC; 120, 240V AC.
Ground Fault Relay (requires shunt
trip).
Vacu-Break Fusible
Switches
All Vacu-Break fusible switches include:
Voidable Cover Interlock
Quick-Make, Quick-Break Operation
Positive ON / OFF Action
Padlockable Handle Design (at ON or
OFF)
Vacu-Break Arc Control (i.e., enclosed
arc chamber, double-break magnetic
arc blowout)
Clampmatic Pressure Spring Force
On Closed Contacts
Spring-Reinforced Fuse Holders
For 250V switches (30 to 600A):
Class R Rejection Type Fuse Holders
for all units except the 2.5 in. (64
mm) high unit, which is suitable only
for NEC Class H, K1 and K5 fuses.
For 600V switches (30 to 600A):
Class R Rejection Type Fuse Holders
or Class J Fuse Holders.

These switches are suitable for use on
systems capable of delivering fault current up to 200,000 amperes symmetrical RMS when equipped with Class L
fuses. All bolted pressure switches
include:
Fuse Door Interlock
Quick-Make, Quick-Break Operation
Bolted Pressure Force on Operation
Bolted Pressure Force on Closed
Contact
Padlockable Handle (in the open
position only)
110
General
Sensitrip Breaker Adjustment Range Overview
Table 7.15
Maximum Continuous
Current Range
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
600
1200
1600
Breaker
Frame
SJD, SLD
SMD, SND
SPD
Table 7.16
Long-Time Delay
Short-Time
Pickup
Short-Time
Delay
Instantaneous
Pickup
Ground Fault
Delay
Ground Fault Range

Percentage
of Max.
Time in
Cont. Amps Seconds
20-70%
0.10-0.40
20-70%
0.10-0.40
20-70%
0.10-0.40
More
Details on
Page
329330
Breaker Functions (In = Nominal Rating of Circuit Breaker)
Function
Continuous
Ampere (Ir)
Ground Fault
Pickup
Available
Amperage Percentage Maximum
Range
of Max.
Range
200-600
20-100%
40-600
600-1200
20-100%
120-1200
1200-1600
20-100%
240-1600
Performance
Varies the level of current the circuit breaker will carry without tripping.
Completely adjustable from 20 to 100% of breaker's continuous ampere
rating. (Ir = % of In)
Referred to as the overload position, this function controls the breaker's
pause-in-tripping time to allow low level, temporary inrush currents such
as those encountered when starting a motor to pass without tripping.
Adjustable settings from 3 or 25 seconds at 6 x Ir are possible.
Controls the amount of high current the breaker will remain closed against
for short periods of time, allowing better coordination. Adjustable between
1.5 to 10 times the continuous ampere setting of the circuit breaker (i.e.,
adjustable from 1.5 to 10 times Ir).
Controls the amount of time (from .05 to .2 seconds in fixed time, or .2
seconds at 6 x lr in the l2t ramp mode) a breaker will remain closed against
high fault current. This function is used in concert with the Short-Time
Pickup function to achieve selectivity and coordination. (A pre-determined
override automatically preempts the setting at 10.5 times the maximum
continuous ampere setting In.)
Determines the level at which the circuit breaker trips without an
intentional time delay. The instantaneous pickup function is adjustable
from 2 to 40 times the continuous ampere setting (lr) of the breaker.
(Anytime an overlap exists between the instantaneous and short-time
pickup settings the instantaneous automatically takes precedence.)
Controls level of ground fault current which will cause circuit interruption
to ocurr. Complies with National Electric Code, Article 230, Section 95(a)
for maximum trip point settings. Adjustable from 20 to 70 percent of the
breaker's maximum continuous ampere setting (In).
Adds a predetermined time delay to the trip point once ground fault pickup
level is reached. Inverse l2t ramp is standard which provides better tripping
selectivity between the main and feeder or other downstream breakers.
Accessories and modifications:

Shunt Trip (electrical open-manual
close)
120V AC Standard Control Voltage
Electrical Operator (electrical open
specify system voltage)
Ground Fault Relay (requires shunt
trip)
Blown Fuse Trip (switch opens when
any one fuse blows requires shunt
trip)
Blown Fuse Indicating Lights
Phase Failure Relay with Capacitor
Trip (detects failure of any one phase
and opens switch requires shunt
trip, specify system voltage)
Auxiliary Contacts

Specification Guide
HCP Fusible Switches

Rated 200,000 amperes RMS symmetrical when equipped with Class L fuses.
Standard features include:
High Contact Silver Alloy Contacts
Heavy Duty Quick-Make, Quick-Break
Accessories include:
Undervoltage Release
Instantaneous
Remote Spring Release Closing
Remote Trip Signaling
Bell Alarm with Lockout
Shunt Trip with Standard Control
Voltages of 120, 240, 480V AC;
12, 24, 48 and 125V DC.
CSI Section 16470
Interrupting Ratings of Disconnect Devices
Molded Case Circuit
Breakers
Normal and Heavy Duty
Normal duty breakers are designed for
commercial, industrial, institutional and
other heavy duty applications and rated
to 600 volts AC; 250 volts DC. Heavy
Duty breakers have higher interrupting
ratings than normal duty.
Extra Heavy Duty

These are designed for heavy duty applications where the interrupting requirements exceed the ratings of heavy duty
breakers. They are rated up to 600 volts
AC and 250 volts DC.
Solid State Trip
Equipped with solid state tripping, and
available in heavy duty and extra heavy
duty interrupting ratings at 600V AC.
Type JD / LD Extra Heavy Duty

Solid-State Trip
Current-Limiting
These breakers incorporate the exclusive
Siemens blow-apart interruption principle
and meet the NEC requirements for current-limiting breakers. Current-limiting
circuit breakers can limit the let-through
l2t to a value less than the l2t of onehalf cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any fusible
elements when operating within their
current-limiting range.
All breakers are 2-pole for DC rating.

Extra heavy duty breakers are inherently fungus-proof
an do not require special fungus treatment.
CSI Section 16470
Interrupting Ratings of Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum Available
Ampere
Amperage
Breaker
Rating
Range
Type
Normal Duty Thermal-Magnetic
BQH
100
15-100
BLH
BQD
125
15-125
BL
225
60-225
QJ2
400
200-400
JXD2
Heavy Duty Thermal-Magnetic
100
15-100
ED2
ED4
125
15-125
ED6
225
60-225
QJH2
250
70-250
FXD6/FD6
400
200-400
JXD6/JD6
600
250-600
LXD6/LD6
LMXD6/LMD6/
800
500-800
MXD6/MD6
1200
800-1200
NXD6/ND6
1600
1200-1600
PXD6/PD6
2000
1600-2000
RXD6/RD6
Heavy Duty Solid-State Trip
400
200-400
SJD6
600
200-400
SLD6
800
200-400
SMD6
1200
800-1200
SND6
1600
200-400
SPD6
3200
2000-3200
STD6
Extra Heavy Duty Thermal-Magnetic
100
15-100
HBL
15-125
HED4
15-125
HHED6
125
60-225
QJ2-H
70-250
HFD6
250
70-250
HHFD6
200-400
HJD6/HJXD6
400
200-400
HHJD6/HHJXD6
200-600
HLD6/HLXD6
600
400-600
HHLD6/HHLXD6
500-800
HLMD6/HLMXD6
800
500-800
HMD6/HMXD6
1200
800-1200
HND6/HNXD6
1600
1200-1600
HPD6/HPXD6
2000
1600-2000
HRD6/HRXD6
Extra Heavy Duty Solid-State Trip
400
600
800
1200
1600
40-400
60-600
120-800
160-1200
240-1600
SHJD6
SHLD6
SHMD6
SHND6
SHPD6
SHTD6
3200
2000-3200
SHHTD6
Current-Limiting Thermal-Magnetic
125
15-125
CED6
250
70-250
CFD6
400
200-400
CJD6
600
400-600
CLD6
800
500-800
CMD6
1200
800-1200
CND6
1600
1200-1600
CPD6
Current-Limiting Solid-State Trip
400
40-400
SCJD6
600
60-600
SCLD6
800
120-800
SCMD6
1200
160-1200
SCND6

Specification Guide
Maximum Interrupting Capacity

Symmetrical RMS Amperes VAC
240V
480V
600V
In DC Amperes (VDC)
250V
500V
22,000
14,000
10,000
65,000
30,000
10,000
18,000
25,000
18,000
22,000
5,000
18,000
18,000
65,000
22,000
30,000
35,000
30,000
65,000
25,000
25,000
50,000
35,000
25,000
65,000
50,000
85,000
65,000
50,000
65,000
42,000
100,000
200,000
100,000
200,000
100,000
200,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
50,000
35,000
50,000
25,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
50,000
30,000
30,000
30,000
30,000
25,000
25,000
35,000
30,000
50,000
30,000
50,000
35,000
100,000
65,000
50,000
65,000
100,000
100,000
200,000
100,000
150,000
200,000
200,000
150,000
150,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
150,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
200,000
111
Sentron
Switchboards
Type FD6, FXD6 Heavy Duty

Thermal-Magnetic Breaker
Table 7.17
Technical
Interrupting Ratings of Disconnect Devices
Table 7.18
Sentron
Switchboards
Frame
Size
Breaker
Amperes Type
RL-800
RLE-800
800
RLI-800
RL-1600
1600
RL-2000
2000
RLE-2000
3200
RLE-3200
RL-4000
4000
RLE-4000
RL-5000
5000
RL-800
RLE-800
800
RLI-800
RL-1600
1600
RL-2000
2000
RLE-2000
3200
RLE-3200
RL-4000
4000
RLE-4000
RL-5000
5000
RL-800
RLE-800
800
RLI-800
RL-1600
1600
RL-2000
2000
RLE-2000
3200
RLE-3200
RL-4000
4000
RLE-4000
RL-5000
5000
Table 7.19
Insulation
Level
Dielectric
WithRated
stand
Rated
Max.
Voltage Voltage Volts
600
480
240
and
208
635
508
254
2200
2200
2200
3200
4000
5000
112
Short Time
Rating
Symmetrical
Amperes
30,000
42,000
22,000
50,000
65,000
85,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
30,000
42,000
22,000
50,000
65,000
85,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
30,000
42,000
22,000
50,000
65,000
85,000
65,000
85,000
100,000
85,000
Short Circuit Rating

Symmetrical Current
With
Without
InstantInstantaneous
aneous
Trip
Trip
Amperes
Amperes
30,000
30,000
65,000
42,000
42,000
22,000
65,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
85,000
85,000
85,000
65,000
100,000
85,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
85,000
30,000
30,000
65,000
42,000
100,000
22,000
65,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
65,000
100,000
85,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
85,000
42,000
30,000
65,000
42,000
100,000
22,000
65,000
50,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
85,000
85,000
65,000
130,000
85,000
130,000
100,000
130,000
85,000
Continuous
Current
Rating
Amperes
75-800
75-800
75-800
75-1600
75-2000
75-2000
600-3200
800-4000
800-4000
2500-5000
75-800
75-800
75-800
75-1600
75-2000
75-2000
600-3200
800-4000
800-4000
2500-5000
75-800
75-800
75-800
75-1600
75-2000
75-2000
600-3200
800-4000
800-4000
2500-5000
Type RLF Fused Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Voltage Rating
Frame
Size
Amperes
800
1600
2000
Table 7.20 Vacu-Break Fusible

Switches
Type RL Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers

Voltage Rating
Type
RLF-800
RLF-1600
RLF-2000
RLF-3200 &
RFC-3200
Fuse Carriage
RLF-4000 &
RFC-4000
Fuse Carriage
RLF-5000 &
RFC-5000
Fuse Carriage
Rated
Volts
208
to
600
Rated
Max.
Volts
Insulation
Level
Dielectric
Withstand
Volts
Short
Circuit
Ratings
Symmetrical
Amps
2200
200,000
2200
Technical
Max.
Ampere
Rating
30
to
600
800
1200
Ampere
Rating
800
1200
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
10,000
RK1, RK5
200,000
200,000
100,000
Class L
Fuse Rating
(Amperes)
601, 700, 800
1000, 1200
1500, 1600
1800, 2000
2500
3000
3500, 4000
5000
Table 7.22
Fuse Interrupting
Rating
(Sym. RMS Amps)
200,000
HCP Fusible Switches
Fuse Class
(Amperes)
Ampere
J
T
Rating
L
400
400
600
600
600,
601,
800
800
800
Continuous
Current
Rating
Amperes
75- 800
75-1600
75-2000
200,000
2000- 5000
600- 3200
800-4000*
2200
200,000
4000- 6000
800- 3200
2200
200,000
6000
2500- 5000

Specification Guide
H, K1, K5
Fuse
Holder
NEC
Standard
Class R
Rejection
Type
Rejection
Type
Table 7.21 Bolted Pressure

Switches. All 600V AC Maximum
2 or 3 Poles
Range
Of Fuse
Ratings
Amperes
250-1600
800-3000
4000
600
Fuse
Class
Maximum
Interrupting
Capacity In
Symmetrical
RMS
Amperes,
240 to 600V
AC
1200
1000,
1200
Fuse Interrupting
Rating
(Sym. RMS Amps)
200,000
1000,
1200
With the addition of fan cooling and 5000A copper

main bus, a 4200A continuous rating is available.
For complete details on Siemens RL Power Breakers,
see pages 54 to 62.
All circuit breakers (and drawout fuses and carriage,
if applicable) are UL listed.
For further information on Vacu-Breaker switches,
see pages 355 to 370.
200,000A max. on 800A switch with L or T fuses
and 1200A switch at 240V with L fuses.
5000A bolted pressure switch not UL listed.
For use at 240V maximum system.
CSI Section 16470
Pressure Wire Connectors
Table 7.24
Breaker
Type
Technical

Connector
Applied to
Amperage
Range
Cables
per
Connector
Table 7.24
Connector
Wire Ranges
Available
#14 - #6 AWG Cu
#12 - #8 AWG Al
#8 - #6 AWG Cu
35 50
1
#8 - #4 AWG Al
#8 - #4 AWG Cu
55 70
1
#8 - #2 AWG Al
#4 - #1/0 AWG Cu
80 100
1
#2 - #1/0 AWG Al
#2 - #1/0 AWG Cu
BL
110 125
1
#1/0 - #2/0 AWG Al
#6 AWG - 250 kcmil Cu
QJ2
QJH2
60 225
1 pc.
QJ2-H
#4 AWG - 300 kcmil Al
JXD2
200 400
1 pc.
Heavy/Extra Heavy Duty, Current-Limiting Thermal-Magnetic
#14 - #10 AWG Cu
ED2
15 20
1 pc.
ED4
#12 - #10 AWG Al
ED6
25
1 pc.
#10 AWG Cu. or Al
HED4
HHED6
30 60
1 pc.
#10 - #4 Cu. or Al
CED6
1 Pole, CED6
30 100
1 pc.
#10- #1/0 AWG Cu. or Al
Sentron
Switchboards
15 30
3060
1 Pole, CED6
FXD6/FD6
HFD6, CFD6
HHFD6
JXD6/JD6
HJD6/HJXD6
HHJD6/HHJXD6
CJD6
LXD6/LD6
HLD6/HLXD6
HHLD6
CLD6
1 pc.
#4- #1/0 Cu. or Al
1 pc.
#3/0 - 3 Cu
#2/0- 1 Al
30 125
2 3 Pole
1 pc.
#10 - #3/0 Cu. Only
70 250
1 pc.

110 125
200 400
1-2 pcs.
250 600
1-2 pcs.
MXD6/MD6
NXD6/ND6
HND6/HNXD6
CMD6, CND6
LMD6, LMXD6
HLMXD6
500 600
1-2 pcs.
1-2 pcs.
700 800
1-3 pcs.
800 1200
1-3 pcs.
1-4 pcs.
PXD6/PD6
HPD6/HPXD6
CPD6
PXD6/PD6
HPD6/HPXD6
RXD6/RD6
HRD6/HRXD6
114
3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu

4/0 - 500 kcmil Al
1 pc.
1200 1600
1-5 pcs.
Connector
Applied to
Amperage
Range
Connector
Wire Ranges
Available
Heavy / Extra Heavy Duty, Current-Limiting Solid-State Trip
3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu
SJD6, SHJD6
200400
1-2 pcs.
SCJD6
4/0 - 500 kcmil Al
3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu
SLD6, SHLD6
1-2
pcs.
250600
SCLD6
4/0 - 500 kcmil Al
#1 AWG - 500 kcmil
SMD6, SHMD6
1-2 pcs.
500600
Cu or Al
SCMD6
SND6, SHND6
#1/0 AWG - 500 kcmil
1-3 pcs.
700800
SCND6
Cu or Al
Breaker
Type
Normal Duty Thermal-Magnetic

BQH
BLH
HBL
BQD
Pressure Wire Connectors (contd)
3/0 600 kcmil Cu

500 600 kcmil Cu
500 750 kcmil Al
3/0 - 500 kcmil Cu
4/0 - 500 kcmil Al
#1 AWG - 500 kcmil
Cu or Al
Cu
600 750 kcmil

600 750 kcmil Al
#1 AWG- 350 kcmil
#1/0 AWG-500 kcmil
Cu or Al
250 400 kcmil Cu
500 750 kcmil Cu
250 400 kcmil Al
500 750 kcmil Al
250 500 kcmil Cu or Al
750 kcmil Al
1-4 pcs.
1-6 pcs.
1600 2000
8001200
SPD6 / SHPD6
12001600
2000
3200
STD6 / SHTD6 /
SHHTD6
Cables
per
Connector
1-4 pcs.
1-5 pcs.
1-4 pcs.
1-6 pcs.
1-4 pcs.

750 kcmil Cu or Al
4/0 - 750 kcmil Al or Cu
Table 7.25 Vacu-Break Fusible Switches

(Branch Connectors)
Ampere
Rating
30 (2.5 in.)
(64 mm)
30
60
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Cables per
Connector
Wire
Range
Type
#14 - #8 AWG
Cu
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
#14 - #4 AWG
#14 - #4 AWG
#1/0 AWG
#6 AWG - 350 kcmil
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Table 7.26 HCP Fusible Switches

(Branch Connectors)
Ampere
Rating
400 600
400 600
400 800
400 800
800 1200
800 1200
Cables per
Connector
2
2
3
3
4
3
Wire
Range
#1 AWG-500 kcmil
#1 AWG-500 kcmil
#1 AWG-500 kcmil
#1 AWG-350 kcmil
#1 AWG-500 kcmil
#250-500 kcmil
Type
Cu or Al
Cu only
Cu or Al
Cu only
Cu or Al
Cu only
Table 7.27 Fusible Bolted Pressure Switches

(Branch Connectors)
Ampere
Rating
800
1200
1600
2000
Table 7.28
NEMA Size
00-1
2
3
Cables per
Connector
2
4
6
6
Wire
Range
Type
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Cu or Al
Starters and Contactors (Lug Data)

Lugs per Pole
1
1
1
Wire Range
#14 - #8 AWG
#14 - #4 AWG
#14 - #1/0 AWG
Type
Cu Only
Cu Only
Cu/Al
Terminals are UL listed for 60/75C conductors; CSA listed for copper wire only.
Optional use only in cases allowed by local codes.
Use on load side only.
This connector is of aluminum construction, but rated for copper cable only.
200A Apply this connector when continuous current setting is adjusted for lower
ampacities.
Not available with breaker or switch. Requires bussing to install.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470
Standard C.T. Compartments
Dimensions
Service entrance switchboards often
require that a utility current transformer
compartment be included. The National
Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) has created a section covering
utility C.T. compartments for inclusion in
PB-2, the existing standard for switchboards.
Siemens C.T. compartments have been
designed to conform to this standard.
All specific utility requirements take
precedence but in the absence of any
special requirements, the standard will
be used.
Figure 1
Figure 2
EUSERC Member Utilities

For all cases where incoming service is
from below, underground pull sections
are required.
For EUSERC member utilities, underground pull sections require nonbussed
sections for 400 ampere, lug landings
for 600 and 800 ampere and bussed
pull sections above 800 ampere.
Figure 3
Table 7.29
Other Utilities
For all other utilities, non-bussed or
bussed pull sections are required per
local utility and code requirements.
Figure 4
NEMA Standard Only
Compartment
Bus
Dimensions In Inches (mm) Drilling
Fig. H
W
D
Figure
30
38
20
3
1
400800
(762)
(965)
(508)
30
38
28
2
3
400800
(762)
(965)
(711)
30
38
28
2
4
12002000
(762)
(965)
(711)
30
38
38
2
4
12002000
(762)
(965)
(965)
30
38
38
2
4
2500
(762)
(965)
(965)
30
38
38
2
4
30004000
(762)
(965)
(965)
Ampere
Rating
CSI Section 16470
Dimensions In Inches (mm)

A
B
C
F
10.00
9.00
6.44
7.50
(254)
(229)
(164)
(191)
10.00
9.00
10.88
7.50
(254)
(229)
(276)
(191)
7.50
11.50
6.02
9.00
(191)
(292)
(153)
(229)
7.50
11.50
6.82
9.00
(191)
(292)
(173)
(229)
7.50
11.50
7.07
9.00
(191)
(292)
(180)
(229)
7.50
11.50
7.07
9.00
(191)
(292)
(180)
(229)
G
10.50
(267)
17.50
(445)
17.50
(445)
19.00
(483)
19.00
(483)
19.00
(483)

Specification Guide
Notes:
The utility C.T. compartments may be in the
upper or lower portion of the Service Section.
Neutral may be located to the rear alongside A
or C; alternate rear location between A
and B, or B and C.
All dimensions are shown in inches and mm.
The neutral need not be located in the C.T. compartment, provided its location complies with
1993 NEC. article 300-20, and with UL as they
relate to induced currents.
Quantity and size of aluminum and copper bus
per UL 891, or manufacturers UL Listed sizes,
based on temperature rise.
Barrier material and thickness per UL 891.
This standard is intended for C.T.s built to ANSI
C12.11-1978.
115
7
Sentron
Switchboards
PB-2 5.06 Utility Transformer

Compartment
Switchboard assemblies containing current transformer compartments for utility metering shall be arranged as shown
in Figures 1 through 4. All indicated
dimensions are minimum except the
mounting for the current transformer.
Mounting shall be for either bar or window type transformers.
The front of the compartment shall be
accessible through a sealable hinged,
single or double door or removable
cover.
Barriers shall be installed as required to
prevent access through other than sealable doors or covers.
Service Sections Utility Metering and Multi-Main Disconnects
Dimensions
Hot Sequence Only

Top Entrance Cables
or Busway
Bottom Entrance Cables Only

Non-Bussed Pull Section
Bottom Entrance Cables

Invert For Top Feed
Sentron
Switchboards
Standard Utility Metering

Table 7.31 Standard Utility Dimensions
Height
400
Depth - Minimum Letters Reference Chart Below

D2
D1
Bussed Pull Section
Distribution Section
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB1
SB2
SB3
SB1
SB2
SB3
A
C
E
A
C
E
A
C
E
600
800
1600
2000
Ampere
Rating
(MLO)
1000
All
Types
H1
90
(2286)
Pull
Box
H2
15
(381)
Width
Unit Space
H3
H4
30
(762)
65
(1651)
Minimum
All Types
W1
38
(965)
1200
All
Types
W2
32 or 38
(813 or
965)
EUSERC Utility Metering

Table 7.32 EUSERC Utility Dimensions
Height
Ampere
Rating
(MLO)
400
Pull
Box
H2
Unit Space
Minimum
All Types
W1
H3
H4
30 (762)
65 (1651)
600
30 (762)
65 (1651)
800
30 (762)
65 (1651)
30 (762)
65 (1651)
1200
65 (1651)
1600
65 (1651)
2000
65 (1651)
1000
All
Types
H1
Width
90
(2286)
Verify dimensions with local utility requirements.

See page 129 for dimensions.
See page 129 for unit space of disconnect devices.
EUSERC Utility Notes:

Not applicable for EUSERC.
Busway available for SB3 only.
Not allowed by Los Angeles Department of Water and
Power or San Diego Gas & Electric.
Some jurisdictions do not allow multi-main service
equipment.
400 / 1000A fed by 500 KCMIL No pull box required.
400 / 1000A fed by 750 KCMIL 10.0" pull box required.
120
All
Types
W2
Depth - Minimum Letters Reference Chart Below

D2
D1
Bussed Pull Section
SB1
A
SB2
C
SB3
E
SB1
A
SB2
C
SB3
E
SB1
A
SB2
C
SB3
E
32 or 38
(813 or
965)
32 or 38
(813 or
965)
Depth Reference Chart

A
20 in.
(508 mm)
28, 38 in.
(711, 965 mm)
28 in.
(711 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in.

(508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
20, 28, 38 in.

(508, 711, 965 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in.

( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470
Service Sections Utility Metering & Single Main Disconnects (Standard Utilities)
Table 7.33
Standard Utility Hot Sequence (C.T.s on Line Side of Main)
Letters Reference
Chart Below
D
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII
A
A
C
C
E
E
E
E
J
E
E
J
J
J
J
J
J
E
E
F
J
J
J
F
F
F
J
J
J
F
F
F
J
J
J
F
F
F
J
J
J
D
G
G
G
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
D
D
D
G
G
G
F
F
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
G
G
G
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
G
G
G
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J

20 in. (508 mm)
28 in. (711 mm)
20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm)
28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)
CSI Section 16470
Top Entrance Cables

or Busway
Depth Available
7
Sentron
Switchboards

Height
Width
Pull Section
Device Applies
NonBussed
Max.
Pull
To Switchboard
Bussed UG
Amp.
Device
Box
Rating Type
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII H1
H2
W1 W2
W3
JXD2, JXD6,
JD6, HJD6
400
14 (356)
SJD6
CJD6, SCJD6
LXD6, LD6, HLD6

20 (508)
600
SLD6
CLD6, SCLD6
LMXD6, LMD,
HLMXD6, HLMD6,
800
MXD6, MD6, HMD6
SMD6
20 (508)
CMD6, SCMD6
32 (813)
NXD6, ND6,
HND6
1000
SND6
90
38
CND6, SCND6
(2286)
(965)
NXD6, ND6,
15 (381)
HND6
1200
SND6
CND6, SCND6
PXD6, PD6,
HPD6
1600
SPD6
CPD6, SCPD6
RXD6, RD6,
32 (813)
2000
HRD6
SB2000S
2500 SB2500S
20 (508)
3000 SB3000S
25 (635)
3200
STD6, SHTD6, SHHTD6
Insulated Case Circuit Breakers Stationary Mounted

800
10 (254)
32 (813) 20 (508)
1600
Type SB
15 (381)
2000
90
38
Encased
(2286)
(965)
2500 Systems
32 (813)
3000 Breaker
20 (508)
4000
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Draw-Out Fusible and Non-Fusible

800
10 (254)
32 (813) 20 (508)
38
Type RL,
1600
RLF Low
15 (381) (965)
2000
90
Voltage
(2286)
2500 Power
32 (813)
Circuit
3000
20 (508) 46
(1168)
Breaker
4000
Switches
14 (356)
400
20 (508)
600
HCP
800
15H
(381)
1200
800
20 (508)
38
1000
Vacu-Break
32 (813)
(965)
1200
90
800
15
(381)
(2286)
1000
1200
1600
Bolted
Pressure
2000
2500
32 (813)
46
3000
20 (508) (1168)
4000
A
B
C
D
Dimensions
Bottom Entrance with

Cables Only

Bussed Pull Section
Cables Only
E
F
G
H
J
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
38 in. (965 mm)
38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm)
48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

Specification Guide
Minimum widths shown. Refer to page 129 for optiona

widths.
Not required.
C.T. compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull
section.
For Types SB3 and RCIII, drawout SB breakers are
available as an option. Minimum depth SB3 38 in.
(965 mm), RCIII 48 in. (1219 mm).
For fusible RLF breaker, utility compartment must be
mounted in a bussed pull section.
Busway available for Type SB3 only.
121
Service Sections Utility & Metering Single Main Disconnects (EUSERC Utilities)
Table 7.34
Sentron
Switchboards

Height
Width Device
Minimum
Device
Applies
Applies
Max.
Pull Fig. Fig.
To
Switchboard
To
Figure
Amp.
Device
Box 1-3 2 Fig. 3
Rating Type
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII 1 2 3 H1
H2
W1
W2 W3
JXD2, JXD6,

JD6, HJD6
14
400
(356)
SJD6

CJD6, SCJD6

LXD6, LD6, HLD6

20
32
600
SLD6

(508) (813)
CLD6, SCLD6

32
(813)

MXD6, MD6,
HMD6
800

SMD6

CMD6, SCMD6
NXD6, ND6,

HND6
32
1000
(813)
SND6

38
CND6, SCND6
90
(965)
NXD6, ND6,
(2286)
HND6
1200
SND6

CND6, SCND6

PXD6, PD6,

HPD6
1600
20
38
SPD6

(508) (965)
46
CPD6, SCPD6

(1168)
RXD6, RD6,

2000
HRD6

SB2000S

2500 SB2500S
3000 SB3000S

32
3200 STD6, SHTD6,
52
(813)
SHHTD6
(1321)
10
32
32

800
(254)
(813) (813)

1600
15
Type SB
(381) 38
90
46
2000
Encased
(1168)
(965)
(2286)
2500 Systems

3000 Breaker
20
(508)
52

4000
(1321)
32
32
10

800
(254) 38
(813) (813)
Type RL,
(965)
1600
RLF Low
90
2000
46
Voltage
(1168)
(2286)
Power

2500
46
Circuit
(1168)

3000
Breaker

52
4000

(1321)
Switches

400

600
10 (254)
HCP
800

32
32
20 (508)
(813) (813)
1200
800
10
(254)
Vacu-Break

1000
38
38
(965)
20 (508) (965)

1200
90
800
32
32
(813) (813)
(2286)

1000
38
(965)

1200

1600
Bolted
Pressure
46

2000
(1168)

2500

46
3000
(1168)

4000
52
(1321)
122
20 in. (508 mm)

28 in. (711 mm)
20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm)
28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)
E
F
G
H
J
Top Entrance Cables

or Busway
Depth Available
Letters Reference
Chart Below
D
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII
A
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
J
J
J
J
J
J
E
E
E
J
J
J
E
E
B
J
J
J
B
B
B
J
J
J
B
B
B
J
J
J
B
G
G
G
B
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
D
D
D
G
G
G
F
F
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
A
A
A
A
B
C
C
C
C
D
E
E
E
E
F
J
J
J
J
J
B
B
B
D
D
D
F
F
F
J
J
J
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
G
G
G
F
F
F
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J

A
B
C
D
Dimensions
EUSERC Utility Hot Sequence (C.T.s on Line Side of Main)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
38 in. (965, mm)
38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm)
48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

Specification Guide

Cables Only

Bussed Pull Section
Cables Only
Minimum widths shown. Refer to page 129 for optional

widths.
Not required.
C.T. compartment must be mounted in a bussed pull
section.
For Types SB3 and RCIII drawout SB breakers are
(965 mm), RCIII 48 in. (1219 mm).
Busway available for Type SB3 only.
CSI Section 16470
Service Sections Non-Utility Type with / wo Customer Metering & Main Disconnect
Table 7.35
Top Entrance Cables Pull Box

Depth Available
Letters Reference
Chart Below
D
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII
A
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
J
J
J
J
J
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
J
J
J
J
J
J
E
E
F
J
J
J
D
D
B
F
F
F
F
H
J
J
J
J
J
D
D
D
G
G
G
F
F
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
A
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
C
C
C
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
G
G
G
E
E
E
E
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
F
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
7
Sentron
Switchboards

Height Width
Pull Box
Device Applies
NonBussed
Max.
To Switchboard
Bussed UG
Amp. Device
Rating Type
SB1 SB2 SB3 RCIII H1
W1
W2
W3
JXD2, JXD6,
JD6, HJD6
400
14 (356)
SJD6
CJD6, SCJD6
32 (813)
LXD6, LD6, HLD6

600
SLD6
CLD6, SCLD6
MXD6, MD6, HMD6,
LMXD6, LMD6,
HLMD6, HLMXD6
800
SMD6
20 (508)
CMD6, SCMD6
32 (813)
NXD6, ND6, HND6
1000
SND6
CND6, SCND6
90
(2286)
NXD6, ND6,
HND6
38 (965)
1200
SND6
CND6, SCND6
PXD6, PD6,
HPD6
1600
SPD6
CPD6, SCPD6
32 (813)
RXD6, RD6, HRD6
2000
SB2000S
SB2500S
2500
SB3000S
3000
38 (965)
STD6, SHTD6,
3200
32 (813)
SHHTD6
20 (508)
20 (508)
800
1600
Type SB
2000
90
Encased
32 (813)
(2286) 38 (965)
Systems
2500
Breaker
3000
38 (965)
4000
20 (508)
20 (508)
800
Type RL,
38 (965)
1600
RLF Low
2000
90
Voltage
32 (813)
(2286)
2500 Power
46 (1168)
3000 Circuit
Breaker
38 (965)
4000
Switches
14 (356)
400
600
HCP
800
1200
800
20 (508)
32 (813)
1000
Vacu-Break
38 (965)
1200
90
(2286)
800
1000
1200
1600
Bolted
Pressure
2000
32 (813)
2500
46 (1168)
3000
38 (965)
4000
Dimensions

Bussed Pull Section
Bottom Entrance

A
B
C
D
20 in. (508 mm)

28 in. (711 mm)
20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm)
28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)
For Types SB3 and RCIII, drawout SB breakers are

(965 mm), and RCIII 48 in. (1219 mm).
CSI Section 16470
E
F
G
H
J
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
38 in. (965, mm)
38, 48, 58 in. (965, 1219, 1473 mm)
48, 58 in. (1219, 1473 mm)

Specification Guide
123
Combination Sections Types SB1, SB2, and SB3
Dimensions
Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections MCCB Main

SB1 and SB2 combination service / distribution sections house both a main service disconnect device and branch distribution disconnects. Switchboards can be
furnished with Suitable for Use as
400-1200A
Main Breaker Without GFP
physical size of the main disconnect

device. If more unit space is required
than is shown in the tables below, one or
more additional distribution sections
must be added.
Service Equipment labels, but include

no provisions for utility metering or customer metering.
Branch circuit device unit space varies,
depending on the rating and consequent
1600-2000A Main Breaker
With or Without GFP
400-1200A
Main Breaker
With GFP
1600-2000A MCCB
With Line Through Bus
400-1200A MCCB
With Line Through Bus
Sentron
Switchboards
Fig. 1 Top Entrance
Table 7.36
1000
1200
1600
2000
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Device
Applies To
Switchboard
SB1 SB2 SB3 H1
CLD6, SCLD6
LMD, HLMD
MXD6, MD6, HMD6
SMD6
CMD6,SCMD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6
SND6
CND6, SCND6
NXD6, ND6, HND6
SND6
CND6, SCND6
PXD6, PD6, HPD6
SPD6
CPD6, SCPD6
RXD6, RD6, HRD6

Height
Unit Space U1
Pull
Box Load Through-Bus
H2 Without With
90
(2286)
53.75 (1365)
52.50 (1334)
42.50 (1080)
52.50 (1334)
52.50 (1334)
53.75 (1365) 45.00

52.50 (1334) (1143)
40.00 (1016)
52.50 (1334)
52.50 (1334)
45.00
42.50 (1080) 40.00 (1016) (1143)
52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334)
52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334)
A
A

38 A
(965)
C
C
C
C
C
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
B
B
B
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
D
C
D
D
D
D
F
F
F
F
F
E
F
F
F
F
38 A
(965)
E
E
E
B
B
B
D
D
D
F
F
F
B
38
38
(965)
(965)
D
D
E
F
F
F
F
F
B
B
B
B
B
B
D
D
D
D
D
D
F
F
F
F
F
F
38 38
(965) (965)
42.50 (1080) 40.00 (1016)

52.50 (1334) 52.50 (1334)
30.00
(762)
Depth Available
Conduit
Area
Letters Reference
Chart Below
Main Mtg. Svc.
D1
D2
Loca- Posi- Ent.
SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 K
L
tion tion Lbl.
A
C
E
B
D
F
32
(813)
or
38
(965)
46.25 32 32
56.25 (1429) 53.75 (1365) (1175)
(813) (813)
Width
Fig.
Fig. Fig. Fig. 4 &
Unit
5
1
2
3
Space
U2
W1 W2 W3 W4

A
20 in.
(508 mm)
28, 38in.
(711, 965 mm)
28 in.
(711 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in.

( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1437 mm)
20, 28, 38 in.

(508, 711, 965 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in.

( 711, 965, 1219, 1437 mm)
124
Fig. 5
Main Breaker with or without Ground Fault Protection
Max.
Amp. Breaker
Rtg. Type
JXD2, JXD6,
JD6, HJD6
400
SJD6
CJD6, SCJD6
LXD2, LXD6,
600 HLD6, SLD6
800
Fig. 2 Bottom Entrance

Specification Guide
Yes
Top
or
Bottom
Horiz.
2.50 3.00
(64) (76)
Yes
Top
Vert.
Unit may be inverted.

Load cables must exit bottom.
Refer to Table 7.41 for dimensions.
Not available with load through bus.
Ground fault, if applied, uses 10 in. (254 mm) of unit space.
46 in. (1168 mm) wide if 750 kcmil lugs required.
Service entrance label at 480V requires ground fault.
Pull box height: Standard 500 kcmil lugs = 10 in. (254 mm)
Alternate 750 kcmil lugs = 15 in. (381 mm)
For use with 100% rated breakers.
Vertical mounted when using 100% rated devices.
CSI Section 16470
Dimensions
Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections

Main Vacu-Break
400 and 600A Vacu-Break
400 & 600A

Vacu-Break
Main
Switch
7
H3
Top Entrance and Invert

for Bottom Entrance
Bottom Entrance
Invert for Top Entrance
Sentron
Switchboards

for Bottom Entrance
Bottom Entrance
Table 7.374001200A Vacu-Break Switch Main

Height
Unit Space - H3
Top
With
Without
Maximum Applies To
Pull
Load
Load
Switchboard
Ampere
Box
Through
Through
SB1 SB2 SB3 H1
Rating
H2
Bus
Bus
400
600
800
1200
90.00
(2286)
10.00
(2.54)
43.75 (1111)
36.25 (921)
41.25 (1048)
33.75 (857)
30.00 (762)

A
20 in. (508 mm)
B
C
28 in. (711 mm)
28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
30.00 (762)
Width
Unit
Space
H4
43.75 (1111)
30.00 (762)
W
38.00
(965)
38.00 (965)
Depth Available
Letters Reference
Chart Below
Conduit
D1
D2
Area
SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3 K
L
Service
Main
Entrance
Location Label
Top
or
Bottom
Yes
Top
or
Bottom
Yes

Refer to page 129 for dimensions.
Service entrance label at 240V only.
2.50
(64)
3.00
(76)
38 in. (965 mm) wide standard, 32 in. (813 mm) wide

available as an option.
15 in. (381 mm) pull box when alternate 750 kcmil lugs.
20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm)
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
125
Dimensions
Combination Service Disconnect and Distribution Sections

HCP Switch and Bolted Pressure Switch
400 1200A HCP
400A 1200A HCP
400-1200A
HCP
Main Switch
400-1200A
HCP
Main Switch
7
Sentron
Switchboards
H3

for Bottom Entrance
Bottom Entrance
Table 7.38 4001200A HCP Switch Main

Maximum Applies To
Switchboard Height
Ampere
Rating
SB1 SB2 SB3 H1
400
90.00
600
800
(2286)
1200
Unit Space
H3
Width
W
46.25
(1175)
38.00
(965)
Depth Available
Letters Reference Chart Below
D1
D2
SB1 SB2 SB3 SB1 SB2 SB3
A
C
E
B
D
F
A
C
E
B
D
F
B
D
F
B
D
F
B
D
F
B
D
F
Service
Main
Entrance
Location Label
Conduit Area
L
K
2.50
(64)
3.00
(76)
Depth Available
Letters Reference
Chart Below
D
SB1
SB2
SB3
Conduit
Area
K
L
Top
or
Bottom
Yes
Table 7.398002000A Bolted Pressure Switch Main, with or without Ground Fault
Height
Top Pull Box H2
Maximum Applies To
500
750
Switchboard
Ampere
kcmil
kcmil
SB1 SB2 SB3 H1
Rating
Lugs
Lugs
800
1200
1600
2000
90.00
(2286)
10
(254)
20
(508)
Unit
Space
H3
30
(762)
2.50
(64)
Service
Main
Entrance
Location Label
Yes
3.00
(76)
Top
Yes

Conduit Area
Top or Bottom
Conduit Area
Top or Bottom
38
(711 mm)
Top Entrance
126
20 in. (508 mm)
B
C
28 in. (711 mm)
28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28, 38, 48, 58 in. ( 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
20, 28, 38 in. (508, 711, 965 mm)

See page 129 for dimensions.
On bolted pressure switch rated 1000A or greater
without ground fault, service entrance label for
240V only.
Not available with load thru bus.
Conduit restricted to rear 10 in. (254 mm) for inverted
bottom entrance.
38
(711 mm)
Bottom Entrance

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470
Distribution Sections Types SB1, SB2, and SB3
Dimensions
Main Lug Only 400A through 2000A

Top Feed
Bottom Feed
7
Sentron
Switchboards
Bottom Entrance
Table 7.40Main Lug Only Unit Space

Maximum
Ampere
Rating
400
600
Section
Configuration
Suitable
for Use As
Service
Entrance
Equipment

Single without
Through-Bus Only
Single without
Through-Bus Only
Single without
Through-Bus Only
Yes
Multi With
Through-Bus
Yes
Yes
Height
Distribution Unit Space
Lugs
AIC
Rating
H1
200,000
Yes
800
42,000
100,000
Single without
Through-Bus Only
Yes
1200
Multi With
Through-Bus
200,000
90.00
(2286)
42,000
Yes
Standard
500 kcmil
Alternate Crimp
750 kcmil 600 kcmil Max. W
62.50
(1588)
60.00
(1524)
58.75
(1492)
51.25
(1302)
45.00
(1143)
57.50
(1461)
50.00
(1270)
60.00
(1524)
56.25
(1429)
52.50
(1334)
45.00
(1143)
38.75
(984)
50.00
(1270)
42.50
(1080)
55.00
(1397)
55.00
(1397)
53.75
(1365)
46.25
(1175)
45.00
(1143)
53.75
(1365)
46.25
(1175)
Yes
Multi With
Through-Bus
Yes
1600
32 or 38
(813 or
965)
38
(965)
32 or 38
(813 or
965)
38
(965)
100,000
Single without
Through-Bus Only
Width
200,000
Depth Available
Letters refer To
Chart Below
D
SB1
SB2
SB3
A
2.50
(64)
3.00
(76)
42,000
45.00
(1143)
100,000
Single without
Through-Bus Only
Yes
Multi With
Through-Bus
Yes
2000
38.75
(984)
45.00
(1143)
200,000
38
(965)
42,000
100,000
46 in. (1168) width available as an option.

Maximum of 6 disconnect devices only.
SUSE service disconnects 1000A or higher on sodily
grounded wye systems of more than150V to ground
required ground fault protection.
Ground fault uses 10 in. (254 mm) of unit space. See
NEC 230-95 for additional details. This applies to branch
devices 1000A or larger on non-service equipment
unless ground fault protection is provided upstream at
the service. See NEC 240-13 for further information.
CSI Section 16470

A
20 in.
(508 mm)
20, 28, 38 in.

(508, 711, 965 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in.

(508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)

Specification Guide
127
Unit Space for Disconnect Devices
Table 7.41
Sentron
Switchboards
Max.
Amp. Device
Rating Type
Branch Breakers
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD
100
ED2, ED4, HHED6
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6
HED4, HHED6, ED2, ED4,
125 ED6 With Accessories
CED6
CED6 With Accessories
225 QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H, HQJ2-H
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6,
250 HHFD6, HHFXD6
CFD6
JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6,
HJXD6, HHJD6, HHJXD6
400 SJD6, SHJD6
CJD6
SCJD6
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HLXD6,
HHLD6, HHLXD6
600 SLD6, SHLD6
CLD6
SCLD6
LMD6, LMXD6, HLMD6,
HLMXD6
MXD6, MD6, HMD6,
800
HMXD6
SMD6, SHMD6
CMD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6, HNXD6
1200 SND6, SHND6
CND6, SCND6
Main Breakers
FXD6, FD6, HFD6, HFXD6
250
CFD6
JXD2, JXD6, JD6, HJD6,
HJXD6, HHJD6, HHJXD6
400 SJD6, SHJD6
CJD6,
SCJD6
LXD6, LD6, HLD6, HLXD6,
HHLD6, HHLXD6
600 SLD6, SHLD6
CJD6,
SCJD6
LMD6, LMXD6, HLMD6,
HLMXD6
MXD6, MD6, HMD6,
800
HMXD6
SMD6, SHMD6
CMD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6, HMXD6
1200 SND6, SHND6
CND6, SCND6
Table 7.42
Max.
Amp.
Rating
30-30
30-30
30-60
60-60
60-100
100-100
200-200
100
200
400
600
400-1200

Width
Height
Total Poles
Available
1P
2P
3P
Unit Space H2
Twin
Single
Mounted
Mounted
18
6
10.00 (254)
6.25 (159)
2
2
2
2
2
2
3.75 (95)
6.25 (159)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
1
2
1
1
2
8.75 (222)
8
2
2
Enclosure
Minimum
W
3.75 (95)
5.00 (127)
8.75 (222)
32.00 (813)
32.00 (813)
32.00 (813)
38.00 (965)
8.75 (222)
32.00 (813)
D for Type SB2 = 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)

D for Type SB3 = 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (711, 965,
1219, 1473 mm)
2 High Bolted Pressure Switch

38.00 (965)
10.00 (254)
Conduit Area
Top or Bottom
5.00 (127)
32.00 (813)
8.75 (222)
SB3 only
Vacu-Break Combination
10.00 (254)
38.00 (965)
Conduit Area
Top or Bottom
Vacu-Break
Device
Applies To
Switchboard
SB1 SB2 SB3

Mounting Height
240V
600V
Twin
Single
Twin
2.50 (64)
5.00 (127)
7.50 (191)
Width
Single
Enclosure
Minimum
W
32.00 (813)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
15.00 (381)
16.25 (413)
10.00 (254)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
15.00 (381)
38.00 (965)
16.25 (413)
The 2.5 in. (64) high unit is suitable for NEC Class H, K1, and K5 fuses only. Class R rejection type fuse holders
are not available.
Unit rated 600V, factory configured to accept 250V class H, K or R Fuses. Field convertible to accept class J Fuses.
Factory configure to accept Class J Fuses only.
128
Conduit Area
Top or Bottom
Unit Space Requirements Branch Switches
Switch
Type
HCP
2 High Vacu-Break Distribution Section
Unit Space Requirements Molded Case Circuit Breakers

Device
Applies To
Switchboard
SB1 SB2 SB3
Dimensions

Specification Guide
D for Type SB2 = 28, 38 in. (711, 965 mm)

D for Type SB3 = 28, 38, 48, 58 in. (711, 965,
1219, 1473 mm)
CSI Section 16470
Dimensions
Through-Bus Fed
Table 7.43
Through-Bus Fed Dimensions
Through-Bus Fed

Height
Width
Maximum
Riser
Amperage
2000
3000
With
Maximum
Through-Bus
Amperage
2000
3000
4000
As Applied to
Switchboard
SB1 SB2 SB3 H1
90.0
(2286)
4000
Depth Available
Letters Reference
Chart Below
D
SB1 SB2 SB3
A
C
E
C
E
G
H
Unit
Space
H2 W
65.0
(1651)
32.0 or 38.0
(965)
(813)
62.5
(1588)
38.0 or 46.0
(965)
(1168)
Conduit
Area
K
L
2.5 3.0
(64) (76)

46.00 (1168) width optional

20 in.
(508 mm)
20, 28, 38, 48, 58 in.

(508, 711, 965, 1219, 1473 mm)
28 in.
(711 mm)
38 in.
(965, mm)
20, 28, 38 in.

(508, 711, 965 mm)
38, 48, 58 in.

(965, 1219, 1473 mm)
48, 58 in.
( 1219, 1473 mm)
Sentron
Switchboards
Non-Bussed and Bussed Pull Sections

Table 7.44
Non-Bussed & Bussed Pull Sections Standard Utilities and EUSERC Utilities
Standard Pull Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Hgt. Width
Non-Bussed
Amp.
Rtg. H
Std.
14
(356)
400
20
(508)
600
800
1000
1200
90
1600 (2286)
2000
2500
3000
32
(813)
38
(965)
5000
6000
46
(1168)
A,B
20
(508)
38
(965) or
46
(1168)
38
(965)
32
(813)
4000
Opt.
20
(508)
Bussed
Std. with
Customer
Metering
46
(1168)
52
(1321)
Depth Available
Letter Reference
Chart Above
With Utility D
Metering SB1 SB2 SB3
32
(813)
46
(1168)
46
(1168)
EUSERC Pull Section Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Hgt. Width
Depth Available
Letter Reference
Chart Above
Bussed with Utility
Bussed Metering
D
SB2
SB3
Std.
Std.
Opt.
RCIII H
SB1
RCIII
A,B
A,B
38
(965)
A,B
A,B
B
B
B
C
C
B,G
B,G
B,G
G
G
E
E
B, H
H
H
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
32
(813)
32
(813)
38
(965)
38
(965)
38
(965)
46
(1168)
A,B
A,B
A,B
A,B
A,B
A,B
C
C
C
C
C
G
G
E
E
E
E
E
H
H
J
J
J
J
J
J
J
52
(1321)
H
H
J
J
90
(2286)
46
(1168)
Top or bottom feed.

Pull sections without utility meters can be 28 in. (711 mm) deep minimum.
Determined by specific utility used.
Non-Bussed
Pull Section
Bussed
Pull Section
Width
CSI Section 16470
Bussed Pull Section

with Utility Compartment
Width

Specification Guide
Width
129
Distribution Sections Type SB3 Only
Molded Case Circuit Breakers for
Combination Motor Starter
Applications
Application Note:
ETI instantaneous- trip circuit breakers
are recommended for use in combination
motor starters to provide selective short
circuit protection for the motor branch circuit. The adjustable instantaneous-trip
Sentron
Switchboards
Dimensions
feature provides for a trip setting slightly

above the peak motor inrush current.
With this setting, no delay is introduced
in opening the circuit when the fault
occurs. Since these circuit breakers have
no time-delay trip element, they must be
used in conjunction with, and immediately ahead of, the motor-running overcurrent protective device.
Table 7.47 Full Voltage

NonReversing Starters Class A20
Table 7.45 ETI Circuit Breakers (Instantaneous Trip Only)

For Branch-Circuit Use with AC Full Voltage Motor Starters
Maximum 3 Ratings
Ampere
Rating
3
5
10
25
50
100
150
225
Breaker
Type
220(208)V
0.5
2
5
15
30
40
50
ED
FJ6
FJ6, CFD
240V
0.5
2
5
15
30
40
50
480V
1
2
3
10
30
60
75
100
Mounting Height in Inches (mm)

Min. Section
Width inches (mm)
Twin
Single
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
5 (127)
32 (813)
Table 7.46 Vacu-Break Fusible Switches

For Branch Circuit Use with AC Combination Full Voltage Starters
Horsepower Ratings
Mounting Height in Inches (mm)
240V AC
480V AC
240V AC
480V AC
Min.
Ampere With NEC With DualWith NEC With DualSec.
Rating
Fuse
Element Fuse Fuse
Element Fuse Twin Single Twin Single Width
2.50
3
7.5
32
30-30
(64)
30-30
7.5
10
5.00
(127)
7.50
(191)
32
30-60
37.5
7.515
515
25
5.00
(127)
7.50
(191)
32
60-60
7.5
15
15
25
5.00
(127)
7.50
(191)
32
7.50
(191)
32
7.50
(191)
32
32
60-100
7.515
1530
1525
2550
7.50
(191)
100-100
15
30
25
50
7.50
(191)
100
25
50
7.50
(191)
200
25
50
50
100
10.00
(254)
10.00
(254)
32
10.00
(254)
32
15.00
(381)
15.00
(381)
15.00
(381)
15.00
(381)
38
200-200
50
100
10.00
(254)
400
50
100
100
600
75
100
The voltage and interrupting rating of the

circuit breaker should be checked to
assure that they are adequate for the
electrical system. ETI circuit breakers are
UL recognized components and must be
used if the switchboard section is also to
be UL Listed.
NEMA
Starter Size
Left
Right
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
2
0
2
1
2
2
2
3
0
3
1
3
2
3
3
3
4
Unit space
Mtg. Ht.
In. (mm)
Min. Encl.
Width
In. (mm)
5
(127)
32
(813)
5
(127)
32
(813)
10
(254)
32
(813)
15
(381)
32
(813)
15
(381)
32
(813)
Increase
to 7.50 in. (191 mm) when pilot light or control

transformer is required.
Table 7.48 Maximum 3 Phase

Horsepower Rating
NEMA
Starter
Size
0
1
2
3
4
Voltage AC
220(208)V
3
7.5
10
25
40
240V
3
7.5
15
30
50
480V
5
10
25
50
100
38
The
2.50 in. (64 mm) high unit is suitable for NEC Class H and K5 fuses only. Class R rejection type fuse holders are not
available.
kA at 480V with EFrame and CFDFrame breakers.
65,000 kA at 480V with FFrame Breakers.
100,000 kA at 480V with Class J or Class RK5 fuses.
100,000
130

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470
Sentron Panelboards
Circuit Breaker, Fusible, Lighting, Power and Distribution
The end product of an outstanding
ancestry, the current Sentron panelboard
design represents the high level of
engineering innovation expected from
Siemens. Additional strength has been
added to an already rugged and durable
panelboard design. At the same time, the
exterior size of many models has been
trimmed, adding flexibility, taking up less
space and making them easier to install.
This newer design also simplifies wiring
and reduces material requirements,
saving additional installation time. The
design still features the Fas-Latch trim
that is so popular with installers, the
jacking screw system that permits
adjustments even after wiring has been
installed, and other features such as
exclusive split neutral. Many Sentron
panelboards have the capability of mixing
and matching breakers of different sizes
and ratings or changing from main lug
to main breaker, or adding subfeed breakers without changing box size. Other
models accept a wide range of fuse
types, including exclusive Vacu-Break
technology.
Features Overview
Circuit Breaker Lighting

Types S1, S2, SE
CSI Section 16471

Types S3
The SE panel has many of the Same

Characteristics as the S1 / S2
Panelboards.
Symmetrical interims for field
Convertibility.
Main Lug and Main Breaker Ratings
from 125A to 600A
Various voltage ratings (accepts AC /
DC voltage)
Two Circuit Sizes and Three Box
Heights, regardless of Main
Configurations.
200% Neutral Capacity up to 400
Amps.
Suitable for use as Service Entrance.
The S3 lighting & appliance panelboards,
Type S4 and S5 power panelboards, and
Types F1 and F2 fusible panelboards
employ many of the attributes listed
above, as well as additional features
shown in Table 9.1 on the next page.
Circuit Breaker Power and

Distribution S4, S5

Specification Guide
9
Sentron
Panelboards
Siemens offers a complete line of lighting, and power & distribution panelboards. At the heart of the product line is
the extensive research and technology
found among Siemens circuit protection
devices both fusible switches and
molded case circuit breakers.
The complete family of Sentron
Panelboards employs numerous features
all industry-leading, many exclusive:
Note the following, all found in the innovative S1 and S2 lighting panelboards:
Symmetrical Interiors No Top or
Bottom! To change from top to bottom (or vice-versa), simply invert the
interior. The deadfront labeling is
always right-side up.
First in the Industry Ratings of 125A /

250A Main Lug and Main Breaker.
Now up to 600A Main Lug and Main
Breaker
Field Convertible from Main Lug to
Main Breaker and Vice Versa with
No Increase in Enclosure Height.
Field Addability of Feed-Thru Lugs or
Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Without
Increasing Enclosure Size.
Neutral System is Field Upgradeable
to 200% up to 400 Amp Capacity
Another Industry First.
Three Circuit Sizes Means Only Four
Box Heights, Regardless of Main
Configuration.
Suitable for Use as Service Entrance
Given Compliance with NEC.
Bonding Screw is Shipped with Each
Panel.
240V and 480Y / 277V Versions
Utilize Identical Boxes and Fronts.
General
Vacu-Break Power and

Distribution F1, F2
155
Sentron Panelboards
The end product of an outstanding
ancestry, the current Sentron panelboard
design represents the high level of
engineering innovation expected from
Siemens. Additional strength has been
added to an already rugged and durable
panelboard design. At the same time, the
exterior size of many models has been
trimmed, adding flexibility, taking up less
space and making them easier to install.
This newer design also simplifies wiring
and reduces material requirements,
saving additional installation time. The
design still features the Fas-Latch trim
that is so popular with installers, the
jacking screw system that permits
adjustments even after wiring has been
installed, and other features such as
exclusive split neutral. Many Sentron
panelboards have the capability of mixing
and matching breakers of different sizes
and ratings or changing from main lug
to main breaker, or adding subfeed breakers without changing box size. Other
models accept a wide range of fuse
types, including exclusive Vacu-Break
technology.
Features Overview

Types S1, S2, SE
CSI Section 16471

Types S3
The SE panel has many of the Same

Characteristics as the S1 / S2
Panelboards.
Symmetrical interims for field
Convertibility.
Main Lug and Main Breaker Ratings
from 125A to 600A
Various voltage ratings (accepts AC /
DC voltage)
Two Circuit Sizes and Three Box
Heights, regardless of Main
Configurations.
200% Neutral Capacity up to 400
Amps.
Suitable for use as Service Entrance.
The S3 lighting & appliance panelboards,
Type S4 and S5 power panelboards, and
Types F1 and F2 fusible panelboards
employ many of the attributes listed
above, as well as additional features
shown in Table 9.1 on the next page.
Circuit Breaker Power and

Distribution S4, S5

Specification Guide
9
Sentron
Panelboards
Siemens offers a complete line of lighting, and power & distribution panelboards. At the heart of the product line is
the extensive research and technology
found among Siemens circuit protection
devices both fusible switches and
molded case circuit breakers.
The complete family of Sentron
Panelboards employs numerous features
all industry-leading, many exclusive:
Note the following, all found in the innovative S1 and S2 lighting panelboards:
Symmetrical Interiors No Top or
Bottom! To change from top to bottom (or vice-versa), simply invert the
interior. The deadfront labeling is
always right-side up.
First in the Industry Ratings of 125A /

250A Main Lug and Main Breaker.
Now up to 600A Main Lug and Main
Breaker
Field Convertible from Main Lug to
Main Breaker and Vice Versa with
No Increase in Enclosure Height.
Field Addability of Feed-Thru Lugs or
Sub-Feed Circuit Breaker Without
Increasing Enclosure Size.
Neutral System is Field Upgradeable
to 200% up to 400 Amp Capacity
Another Industry First.
Three Circuit Sizes Means Only Four
Box Heights, Regardless of Main
Configuration.
Suitable for Use as Service Entrance
Given Compliance with NEC.
Bonding Screw is Shipped with Each
Panel.
240V and 480Y / 277V Versions
Utilize Identical Boxes and Fronts.
General
Vacu-Break Power and

Distribution F1, F2
155
Sentron Panelboards
Sentron Lighting
and Appliances
Panelboards
Table 9.1Key Panelboard Features

Lighting and Applications
Power and Panelboard Applications
Convertible from Top Feed to Bottom Feed or Vice Versa
Change from Main Lug to Main Breaker or
Add Subfeed without Changing Enclosure Size
Space-Saving, Horizontally Mounted Main Breaker
Short-Circuit Rating Label Giving Performance Level
Standard Aluminum Ground Bus
Blank End-Walls Standard
Bolted Current-Carrying Parts
Split Neutral
Connection Accessible from Front
Screw-Type Mechanical Lugs
Time-Reducing Wing Nuts to Secure Interior without Tools
200 Ampere Rated Branch Breaker Connector
Main and Branch Devices Connected with
Case-Hardened Hardware
Flush Lock, Concealed Door Hinges / Trim Screws
Multiple Subfeed Breaker Mounting Capability
Symmetrical Interior Mounting Studs
to Eliminate Upside Down Mounting of Box
Jacking Screw Interior Adjustment
Star Nut Interior Adjustment
Mix and Match Fusible Switch Circuit Breaker Capability
Shallow Depth
Accepts a Wide Range of Fuse Types
Accepts Vacu-Break Fusible Switch
Accepts a Wide Range of Sentron Circuit Breakers
Accepts ACCESS Communications Tie-In
Optional Compression Lugs
TVSS (Transient Voltage Surge Supression)
General
Sentron
Power
Panelboards
Sentron
Fusible
Panelboards
S1
S2
SE
S3
S4
S5
F1
F2
Panelboards equipped with Siemens Sensistrip circuit breakers can be integrated into Siemens ACCESS electrical monitoring system.
Bolted directly to the Interior Bus.
(See section 1)
Sentron
Panelboards
TVSS Unit
Field Addable Main and Subfeed Breakers
Connected Bus Main Breakers
Lay-in Main Lugs for wiring ease
Field Addable 200% Capacity Neutral
Field Convertible Interiors
156

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Class CTL Panelboards
Class CTL panelboards incorporate physical features which, in conjunction with
the physical size, configuration, or other
means provided in Class CTL circuit
breakers, are designed to prevent the
installation of more overcurrent protective poles than that number for which the
device is designed and rated, per UL 67.
Service Entrance Equipment
When a panelboard is used as service
entrance equipment, it must be located
near the point of entrance of building
supply conductors.
In a panel having main lugs only, the
number of breakers or switches directly
connected to the main bus must be
limited to six.
In a panel having a main breaker or
main switch, the number of circuits are
not limited except as may be provided
under other panelboard requirements,
i.e. lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboards.
Also the panel must include a connector
for bonding and grounding neutral
conductor.
Table 9.2
Description
Max.
Voltage
System
Mains
Main Lugs
Main Breaker
Main Switch
Enclosure
Heightsin
(mm)
Standard
Trims
Standards
NEC 1996: Meets latest NEC wire bending requirement, section 373-6.
NEMA: PBI, 250
UL: 67 and 50. Listed by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., under Panelboards
File #E2269, and #E4016. Meets Federal
Specification W-P-115c dated 1990, for
Type 1, Class 1.
Seismic Qualification
All Siemens panelboards are independently tested and seismically qualified.
Each panelboard meets or exceeds
requirements of the Uniform Building
Code (UBC) 1994 and California Code
Title 24.
Integrated Equipment
Short Circuit Rating
Integrated Equipment Short Circuit
Rating refers to the application of series
connected circuit breakers in a combination that allows some breakers to have
lower individual interrupting ratings than
the available fault current. This is permitted as long as the series combination has
been tested and certified by UL.
Sentron Panelboard Ratings

Sentron Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
S1
S2
SE
Sentron Power Panelboards
Sentron Fusible Panelboards
S3
S4
S5
F1
F2
240V
480Y / 277V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 4-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
1-phase 3-wire
3-phase 4-wire
3-phase 3-wire
125A, 600A
100A600A
125A, 600A
100A600A
125A, 600A
100A600A
100A600A
100A600A
400A1200A
400A600A
100A200A
800A1200A
800A1200A
400A 1200A
225A1200A
400A600A
100A200A
800A1200A
800A1200A
400A1200A
18, 30, 42
18, 30, 42
30, 42
18, 30, 42, 54
15100A
15100A
15100A
15100A
15600A
151200A
30200A
30600A
BL, BHL, HBL

Breakers
BQD
Breakers
ED
Breakers
BL, BQD, ED
QJ2 Breakers
ALL 15600A
Breakers
ALL 151200A
Breakers
30A200A VB
Switches
30A600A VB
800A, 1200A
HCP Switches
ED2, ED4, ED6, HED4,

HHED6, QJ2, QJH2,
QJ2H, FXD6, FD6,
HFD6, JXD6, HJD6,
LXD6, HLD6
32, 38, 44
(813, 965, 1118)
68 @ 400A / 600A
(1727)
FasLatch
Surface or Flush
ED2, ED4, ED6,

HED4, HHED6,
FXD6, FD6, HFD6,
HJD6, JXD6, HJD6,
LXD6, HLD6
32, 38, 44
(813, 965, 1118)
68 @ 400A / 600A
(1727)
FasLatch
Surface or Flush
FXD6, FD6, HFD6

JXD6, HJD6,
LXD6, HLD6
FXD6, HFD6,
JXD6, HTD6
44, 50, 68
(1118, 1270, 1727)
2377
(5841956)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
60, 75, 90
(1524, 1905, 2286)
FasLatch
Surface or Flush
FasLatch
Surface or Flush
Four Piece
No Door
Four Piece
No Door
Four Piece
No Door
Four Piece
No Door
S1,
S2 and SE panels can have 1 subfeed breaker up

to 250A. 400 / 600 amp S1 may have up to 2 QJ
subfeeds.
CSI Section 16471
225
and 400A breaker except for QJ are mounted

subfeed. Limitations apply.

Specification Guide
S1,
S2 and SE enclosures.
157
Sentron
Panelboards
Circuits
Branch
Ratings
Siemens
Branch
Disconnect
Devices
Siemens
Subfeed
Circuit
Breakers
Panelboard Code Data

42-Circuit Rule: NEC Paragraph 384-14
defines a lighting and appliance branch
circuit panelboard as one having more
than 10 percent of its overcurrent
devices rated 30 amperes or less, for
which neutral connectors are provided.
NEC paragraph 384-15 states that not
more than 42 overcurrent devices (other
than those provided for in the mains) of a
lighting and appliance branch-circuit
panelboard shall be installed in any one
cabinet. For the purpose of this article a
two pole circuit breaker shall be considered two overcurrent devices; a three
pole circuit breaker shall be considered
three overcurrent devices. (NEC 384-14
and -15 do not apply to panelboards feeding communication circuits. Panelboards
for this application must be so marked.)
General
Sentron Panelboards
General
Modifications
Table 9.3Typical Sentron
Panelboard Modifications
Lighting and Appliance Panelboards
Power Panelboards
Fusible Panelboards
S2
SE
S3
S4
S5
F1
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
S1
Box
Type 3R / 12
Type 4, 4X
Drip Proof
Drip Proof Hood Only
Sealed Box
Gasketed Trim
Wider Box
Deeper Box
Front
Hinged Front
Door in Door Front
Common Front
Split Door
Special Locks
Nameplate
Interior
Aluminum Equipment Ground Bar
Copper Equipment Ground Bar
Insulated Equipment Ground
Subfeed Lugs
Feed-Thru Lugs
Split Bus
Compression Lugs
Copper Lugs
200% Neutral
Copper Main Bus
Temp. Rise over Ambient Aluminum
Temp. Rise over Ambient Copper
750 Ampere / in Aluminum Only
100 Ampere / in Copper Only
Aluminum Plating Tin Plate
(Alstan Process)
Copper Plating Silver or Tin
Remote Control Switches
Time Clocks
Circuit Breaker Shunt Trips
R, J and T Fuse Clips
TVSS
F2
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Standard
Optional
Optional
Optional
Standard
Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver
Silver
Standard per UL 67 and above.

Per UL requirements, copper plating required at
250A and below.
600 amps.
Sentron
Panelboards
Time Clock
Molded Case
Switch
Remote Control
Switch
TVSS Unit
Remote Control
Lighting Contactor
158
Types 3R, 3R / 12 Enclosures

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Lighting and Distribution
Dimensions
Types S1 and S2
Main Lug / Main Breaker
Main Lug Unit Space Dimensions
S1 and S2 main lug panelboards are preengineered to accept the most common
modifications without increasing box
height. The enclosure size for an S1 or
S2 panelboard is determined by the number of circuits as shown in Tables 9.4 and
9.5. Box size is determined only by the
number of circuits, not by main lug or
main circuit breaker. All S1 or S2 main lug
or main breaker panelboards have space
built-in to accept either feed-thru lugs or
one subfeed circuit breaker up to 600
amperes without increasing box height.
Main Breaker Unit Space Dimensions
Main Breaker Panelboard
Table 9.4Main Lugs

Max
Amp. Rating
Max
No. of Poles

Unit Spaces
Height
A
B
Weight in
lbs. (kg)
125
18
30
42
18
30
42
42
42
9 (229)
15 (381)
21 (533)
9 (229)
15 (381)
21 (533)
21 (533)
21 (533)
100 (45)
115 (52)
135 (61)
100 (45)
115 (52)
175 (80)
175 (80)
175 (80)
250
400
600
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
32 (813)
38 (965)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
(1) #6 AWG-350 kcmil

(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil
Branch Breaker Side Gutters

A
BL, BLH, HBL
BL, BLH, HBL
BLF, BLHF
BLF, BLHF
BQD
BQD
Table 9.5
Main Breakers
JXD6
42
21 (533)
68 (1727)
8 (203)
HJD6
42
21 (533)
68 (1727)
8 (203)
185 (84)
LXD6
HLD6
42
21 (533)
68 (1727)
8 (203)
190 (86)
42
21 (533)
68 (1727)
8 (203)
190 (86)
Main
Max
Amp. Breaker
Rating Type
100
BL, BLH, HBL,
ED4, BQD
125
225
250
400
600
ED4, ED6
HED4, HHED6
CSI Section 16471
Weight
lbs. (kg)
105 (48)
120 (55)
135 (61)
110 (50)
125 (57)
140 (64)
110 (50)
125 (57)
140 (64)
115 (52)
130 (59)
145 (66)
115 (52)
130 (59)
145 (66)
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
ED, ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
JXD6, HJD6
LXD6, HLD6
(1) #121/0 AWG

Panel Width
20 in. (508 mm)
24 in. (610 mm) for 400A and 600A
185 (84)
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Cu
or
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Al

Specification Guide
Side Gutter Wiring Space

Inches (mm)
Reference
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Panel
Width 20 in.
6.375 (162)
5.500 (140)
6.125 (156)
6.500 (165)
5.250 (133)
Panel
Width 24 in.
7.750 (197)
7.125 (181)
6.000 (152)
8.500 (216)
7.250 (184)
8.000 (203)
8.000 (203)
Subfeed mounting limit 1 per panel.
159
9
Sentron
Panelboards
QJ2,
QJH2,
QJ2-H
FXD6, FD6,
HFD6,
JXD6, HJD6
FXD6,
FD6,
HFD6
Max
No. of
Poles
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42

Horiz. Main
Unit
Breaker
Spaces
Height
A
B
C
8.50 (216)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
7.50 (191)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
5 (127)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
5 (127)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
Sentron Panelboards
Technical
Table 9.7Alternate Main Breakers
Type S2
Table 9.6Alternate Main Breakers Type S1

Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Maximum Interrupting
Rating (kA)
Available Trip Values
Amp.
Rating
Breaker Max.
IR (kA) Available Trip Values
Type
100
BL
BLH
HBL
ED4
HED4
HHED6
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
LXD6
HLD6
10
22
65
65
100
100
10
22
42
65
65
100
65
100
65
100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
100
BQD
ED4
ED6
HED4
ED4
ED6
HED4
FXD6
10
18
25
65
18
25
42
35
FD6
35
HFD6
65
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
LXD6
HLD6
35
35
65
35
65
35
65
125
225
250
400
600
125
225
250
400
600
Table 9.8Subfeed Breakers Type S1 and S2 (Limit One Per Panel)
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100

50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
110, 125
110, 125
110, 125
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125,
150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125,
150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125,
150, 175, 200, 225
250
250
250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
Rating (kA)
Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Type S1 Type S2
240V
480Y / 277
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
ED4
HED4
HHED6
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
LXD6
HLD6
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
10
22
42
65
100
100
65
65
100
65
100
65
100
60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225,

60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225,
60, 70, 80, 90,100,110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225,
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120
70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
65, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
18
42
65
35
35
65
35
65
35
65
When
applying in 42 circuit panel, see lighting and appliance panelboard definition on page 155.
Also reference NEC article 38416.
No increase in box height. Space is already built into S1 panel.
Interchangeable trip breaker must be mounted at top only in column width panels.
Limit two per panel on 400A and 600A SI panel.
Sentron
Panelboards
160

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Technical
Table 9.9Branch Circuit Breakers Type S1 120 / 240 and 240 Volts AC & Type S2 480Y / 277 Volts AC
Rating (kA)
Breaker
Type
BL
BHL
HBL
BLF
BLHF
BGL
BLE
BQD
BQD6
120V /
Number
of Poles 120V 240V 240V
1
10
2
10
10
10
22
22
22
1
65
65
65
1
10
10
1
22
22
2
10
10
1
10
1
2
3
1
2
3
277V
14
480Y /
600Y /
277V 347V 347V
14
14
14
14
14
Ampere
Ratings
for Load
Connectors

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
1530A
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
3550A
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 55, 60, 70
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 90, 100
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
5560A
15, 20, 30, 40, 50
1 & 2 Pole
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70
BL
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 30
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
5570A
15, 20, 30
Except 1 &
15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60
2 Pole BL
15, 20, 30
15, 20, 30
80100A
15, 20, 30
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100
Load Connectors
Aluminum
Wire
Copper
Wire
(1) #12#8 AWG
(1) #14#8 AWG
(1) #8#4 AWG
(1) #8#6 AWG
(1) #8#3 AWG
(1) #8#6 AWG
(1) #8#2 AWG
(1) #8#4 AWG
(1) #2#1 / 0 AWG (1) #1 / 0#2 / 0 AWG
1540A
(1) #12#6 AWG
45100A
(1) #6#1 / 0 AWG (1) #8#1 AWG
(1) #14#6 AWG
1540A
(1) #12#6 AWG
45100A
(1) #6#1 / 0 AWG (1) #8#1 AWG
(1) #14#6 AWG
CSA listed only at 600Y/347V AC.
9
Sentron
Panelboards
CSI Section 16471

Specification Guide
161
Sentron Panelboards
Types S1 / S2
Column Width
Weight Approximate
Total panelboard weight when filled with a
normal quantity of breakers and
accesories is about 31 lbs. (1 kg) per
inch (54g per mm) of box height.
Table 9.10 S1 / S2
Main Lugs Only
240 Volts Maximum
Maximum Maximum Box
Ampere
1-Pole
Height
Rating
Circuits
In. (mm)
125
250
18
30
42
18
30
42
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil
Table 9.11 S1 / S2
Main Circuit Breaker
240 Volts Maximum
Maximum Maximum Box
Ampere
1-Pole
Height
Rating
Circuits
In. (mm)
100
125
225
250
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
Table 9.12
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
Dimensions
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
Sentron
Panelboards
Additional
Extensions
If Required
Additional
Extensions
If Required
Pull Boxes
Two styles of pull boxes are available, top
and front mounted. When the panel and
its extensions are mounted in a structural
WF Beam, a front-mounted pull box is
required. When the panels are surfacemounted, top-mounted pull box may be
H
Box
Height
H
Box
Height
7.00 in
(178 mm)
5.25 in
(133 mm)
used. Provisions are made so that the

neutral bar may be mounted in the pull
box when required.
(1) #41/0 AWG

Width
Depth
S1
S2
S1
Panel Configuration
Main Lug
(1) #4-AWG300 kcmil

(1) #4 AWG350 kcmil Al
(1) #6 AWG350 kcmil Cu
Main Lug with

Feed-Thru Lugs
Main Lug with
Subfeed Breaker
Main Breaker
Side Gutters
(Minimum)
5.00 (127)
3.50 (89)
5.00 (127)
3.50 (89)
Telephone Cabinets
Conform to requirements of Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc., for all cabinets and
boxes bearing their label. Surface enclosures, box and front constructed of codeguage steel. Entire cabinet finished with
light gray, ANSI-61. Flush enclosures, box
constructed of code-guage galvanized
steel, front only finished with light gray,
ANSI-61.
Boxes
Standard construction has blank ends,
without knockouts.
Front
Concealed hinges standard on fronts.
Double doors supplied when door
Main Breaker with

Feed-Thru Lugs
Main Breaker with
Subfeed Breaker
No. of Circuits
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
width exceeds 24 in. (610 mm). 3-point

catch and vault handle supplied with
double doors; two spring catches
supplied on doors more than 48 in.
(1219 mm) high.
11.00 in.
(279 mm)
Top Extension
(For Front Mtg.)
53.99 in.
(1346 mm)
Table 9.13 Box Sizing

Certain modifications such as subfeed breakers and feed-thru lugs require
additional unit space. Use this table to determine proper enclosure size.
Telephone Cabinets
162
5.25 in.
(133 mm)
(1) #141/0 AWG
Gutters
End Gutters
(Minimum)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
14.00 in.
(356 mm)
Pull Box
14.00 in.
(356 mm)
Pull Box
Column Extensions
Available in various standard lengths,
extensions are 5.25 in. (133 mm) deep
with a width of 7 in. (178 mm). (These
are outside dimensions). Designed to fit
into an 8 in. (203 mm) structural WF
beam. Column panels may also be surface mounted.

Ampere
Rating Type
S1
125
S2
S1
250
S2
20.00 in.
(508 mm)
Height
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
73 (1854)
86 (2184)
85 (2159)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
48 (1219)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
85 (2159)
73 (1854)
85 (2159)
7.62
(194)
8.50
(216)
5.75
(146)
S2
5.7
(146)
Backboard
0.75 in. (19mm) plywood backboard
supplied when specified.
Table 9.14
Box Width
in. (mm)
0 (0)20 (508)
21 (533)24 (610)
25 (635)36 (914)
25 (635)36 (914)
37 (940)38 (965)
49 (1245)60 (1524)
Depth
Door
Single
Single
Single
Double
Double
Double
All available with 0.75 in. (19 mm) backboard.

Depth 12 in. (305 mm) or less. Height 72 in. (1829 mm)
or less.
Specify Mounting Surface or Flush.
Box width minus 5 in. (127 mm) equals door width.

Specification Guide
0.75 in.
(19 mm)
Surface Mounting
0.75 in.
(19 mm)
Depth
Trim
Overlap
Flush Mounting
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Dimensions
Type SE
SE main lug panelboards are pre-engineered to accept the most common
modifications without increasing box
height. The enclosure size for an SE panelboard is determined by the number of
circuits as shown in the main lug Table
9.15 or the main circuit breaker Table
9.16. Box size is determined only by the
number of circuits, not by main lug or
main circuit breaker. All SE main lug or
main breaker panelboards have space
built in to accept either feed-thru lugs or
one subfeed circuit breaker up to 600
amperes without increasing box height.
Table 9.15
Main Lug
Max
Amp. Rating
125
Max
No. of Poles
30
42
30
42
42
42
Unit Spaces
A
15 (381)
21 (533)
15 (381)
21 (533)
21 (533)
21 (533)
250
400
600
Height
B
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
68 (1727)
68 (1727)
Height Neutral
C
19 (483)
22 (589)
19 (482)
22 (589)
27.66 (686)
27.66 (686)
Weight in
lbs. (kg)
115 (52)
135 (61)
115 (52)
135 (61)
165 (75)
165 (75)
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil
Box Depth 7.75 in. (197 mm) for all Ampere ratings.
Branch Breaker Side Gutters
Table 9.16
Main Breaker
600
C
19 (483)
22 (589)
19 (483)
22 (589)
Horiz. Main
Breaker
Weight
lbs. (kg)
D
115 (52)
8.50 (216)
135 (61)
115 (52)
7.25 (184)
135 (61)
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
68 (1727)
27.60 (686)
8.00 (203)
175 (80)
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Cu
68 (1727)
27.60 (686)
8.00 (203)
175 (80)
(2) #3 / 0-500 kcmil Al
Max
No. of
Poles
30
42
30
42
42
Unit
Spaces
A
15 (381)
21 (533)
15 (381)
21 (533)
21 (533)
Height
B
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
42
21 (533)
LXD6, HLD6
Neutral

Inches (mm)

Specification Guide
B
C
D
Panel Width
24 in. (210mm)
(1) #12 1/0 AWG
Box Depth 7.75 in. (197 mm) for all Ampere ratings.
CSI Section 16471
Sentron
Panelboards
Main
Max
Amp. Breaker
Rating Type
ED4, ED6
125
HED4, HHED6
FXD6, FD6,
250
HFD6
JXD6, HJD6
400
B
C
D
ED2, ED4, ED6 ED2, ED4, ED6

HED4, HHED6 HED4, HHED6
FXD6, HFD6
JXD6, HJD6
LXD6, HLD6
Reference
Letter
Panel Width
24 in. (609 mm)
A
B
C
D
6.00 (152)
7.25 (184)
8.00 (203)
8.00 (203)
Subfeed mounting limit 1 per panel.
163
Sentron Panelboards
Table 9.17
Alternate Main Breakers Type SE
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Max IR (kA)
240V 480V 600V
100
ED4
ED6
HED4
HHED6
ED4
ED6
HED4
HHED6
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
LXD6
HLD6
65
65
100
100
65
65
100
100
65
65
100
65
65
100
65
100
65
100
125
225
250
400
600
Technical
18
25
42
65
18
25
42
65
35
35
65
35
35
65
35
65
35
65
18
25
18
25
22
22
25
22
22
25
25
35
25
35

50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100
50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125
110, 125
110, 125
110, 125
50, 60, 70, 80, 90,100, 110, 125
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225
250
250
250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Table 9.18Subfeed Breakers

Breaker
Type
Number
of Poles
Max IR (kA)
240V 480V 600V
FXD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
LXD6
HLD6
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
65
100
65
100
65
100
Table 9.19
35
65
35
65
35
65
22
25
25
35
25
35

70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
Branch Breakers
Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)
Max
Amp
Rtg.
Bolt-on Number
Breaker
of
Amp
Type
Poles Rating
ED2
ED4
ED6
125
HED4
1
2
3
1
2
3
2
3
1
2
Sentron
Panelboards
3
2
HHED6
250
400
600
FXD6
2
3
FD6
2
3
15 100
15 100
15 100
15 100
15 125
15 125
15 125
15 125
15 30
35 100
15 100
110 125
15 100
110 125
15 100
110 125
15 100
110 125
70 250
Volts AC
120
240
277
10,000
10,000
10,000
65,000
22,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
100,000
65,000
100,000
25,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
65,000
70 250
480
18,000
18,000
25,000
25,000
42,000
42,000
42,000
42,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
65,000
35,000
600
18,000
18,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
25,000
22,000
Ampere
Ratings
DC
for Load
250 Connectors
5,000
15125A
30,000
ED4 1-Pole
30,000
3060A
70100A
30,000 All 2, 3-Pole

30,000 30100A
110125A
All 2, 3 Pole
30100A
30,000
65,000
35,000 22,000 30,000
100,000
65,000 25,000 30,000
HFD6
2
3
70 250
JXD6
2
3
200 400
65,000
35,000 22,000 30,000
HJD6
2
3
200 400
100,000
65,000 25,000 30,000
LXD6
2
3
250 600
65,000
35,000 25,000 30,000
HLD6
2
3
250 600
100,000
65,000 35,000 30,000
Load Connectors
Aluminum
Wire
Copper
Wire
(1) #12#10 AWG
(1) #14#8 AWG

(1) #14#10 AWG
(1) #10#4 AWG

(1) #4#1 / 0 AWG
(1) #10#4 AWG

(1) #4#1 / 0 AWG
(1) #10#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #3#1 / 0 AWG
(1) #10#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #3#1 / 0 AWG
(1) #10#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #3#1 / 0 AWG
(1) #10#1 / 0 AWG

(1) #3#1 / 0 AWG
All 2, 3 Pole
70250A
(1) #6 AWG 350 kcmil
(1) #6 AWG 350 kcmil
All 2, 3 Pole
200400A
(2) #4/0 500 kcmil
(2) #3/0 500 kcmil
All 2, 3 Pole
250600A
(2) #4/0 500 kcmil
(2) #3/0 500 kcmil
1530A
35100A
164

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Type S3
These charts are for standard panelboards with a maximum of 42 total poles
of one breaker type. Combinations,
including subfeed breakers or modifications shown on page 166 will be larger
than dimensions shown here. Add
Dimensions
dimensions from appropriate table to Unit

Space (A) dimension in chart below, then
go to box selection table on page 166 for
box height.
Main Lug
Main Breaker
Box Depth = 5.75 in (146 mm)

for 100A, 225A, and 400A
for 400A and 600A
Table 9.20 Main Lug

Maximum
Amp
Rating
100

for 100A, 225A, and 400A
for 400A and 600A
A 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep box is
required for 400 ampere panels when
main bus is 750 amps / square inch
aluminum or 1000 amps / square inch
copper, or when JXD6, JD6 or HJD6
breakers are used as subfeed breakers.
Table 9.21
Max
Amp
Rating
100
125
BL, BLH,HBL
BQD, BQD6
ED4, ED6
HED4, HHED6
18
30
CED6
225
400
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
CFD6
JXD6
JD6, HJD6
SJD6, SHJD6
CJD6
SCJD6
600
LXD6, LD6
HLD6, SLD6
SHLD6,
SCLD6
CLD6
SCLD6
CSI Section 16471
600

Horizontal Main Vertical Main
Breaker
Breaker
Unit
Connectors
Space Height
Neutral
Neutral Suitable for Cu
E
C
B
A
D
F
or Al
9 (229)
115 ( 381)
23 (584)
29 (737)
21 (533)
9 (229)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
9 (229)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
9 (229)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
9 (229)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
27 (686)
9 (229)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
27 (686)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
15 ( 381)
21 (533)
35 (889)
29 (737)
35 (889)
41 (1041)
29 (737)
35 (813)
41 (1041)
32 (813)
38 (965)
44 (1118)
50 (1270)
56 (1422)
47 (1194)
53 (1346)
59 (1499)
65 (1561)
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
74 (1880)
50 (1270)
56 (1422)
62 (1575)
68 (1727)
65 (1651)
71 (1803)
5.75
(146)
5.75
Neutral
D
Connectors
Suitable for
Cu or Al
5.5 (143)
6.87 (175)
(1) #12 1/0 AWG
7.0 (178)
8.37 (213)
(1) #6 AWG
300 kcmil
11.0 (279)
12.19 (310)
14.0 (356)
16.89 (429)
(1) 250-500
kcmil or
(2) #3 / 0 AWG
250 kcmil
(2) #3 / 0 AWG
500 kcmil
(1) #12 1 / 0 AWG
5.5
__
5.00
(127)
7.00
(178)
__
__
__
10.5
(267)
25.5
(648)
__
__
14.0
(365)
27.0
(686)
__
__
__
__
(1) #12 1 / 0 AWG
(1) #1 AWG
300 kcmil
BL, BLH, HBL

BLF, BLFH
BQD, BQD6
ED, ED4, ED6
HED4, HHED6
BL, BLH, HBL

BLF, BLFH
BQD, BQD6
ED, ED4, ED6
HED4, HHED6
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H
(1) #6 AWG
300 kcmil
15.5
(394)
__
__
28.5
(724)
(1) #6 AWG
300 kcmil
(1) #3 / 0 AWG
500 kcmil Cu
#4 / 0 AWG
500 kcmil Al or
(2) #3 / 0 AWG
250 kcmil Cu
#4 / 0 AWG
250 kcmil Al
A
B
C
D
Panel Width
20 in. (508 mm)
Table 9.22 Side Gutter

Wiring Space in. (mm)
Reference Point
A
B
C
D
(2) #3 / 0 AWG
500 kcmil Cu or
(2) #4 / 0 AWG
500 kcmil Al

Specification Guide
Branch Breaker
Side Side
Gutters
Branch
Breaker
Gutters
5.5
__
__
Main Lug
C
Lug is single barrel construction, rated for (2)-250 kcmil or (1)-500 kcmil cable.
(140)
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
30
42
18
30
42
54
18
30
42
54
18
30
42
54
30
42

Box Height
Unit Space
B
A
9 (229)
23 (584)
15 (381)
29 (737)
21 (533)
35 (889)
9 (229)
26 (660)
15 (381)
32 (813)
21 (533)
38 (965)
9 (229)
32 (813)
15 (381)
38 (965)
21 (533)
44 (1118)
27 (686)
50 (1270)
9 (229)
38 (965)
15 (381)
44 (1118)
21 (533)
50 (1270)
27 (686)
56 (1422)
Panel Width 20 in. (508)

5.750 (146)
5.125 (130)
4.000 (102)
5.000 (127)
Single branch mounting construction
165
Sentron
Panelboards
Max
No. of
Poles
400
Main Breaker
Main
Breaker
Type
225
Maximum
No. of
Poles
18
30
42
18
30
42
18
30
42
54
18
30
42
54
Sentron Panelboards
Type S3
Main Lug / Breaker, contd
Table 9.23S3 Box Width / Depth
Ampere
Rating
100A
225A
Type
Temp Rise
750A / in. Al or
1000A in. Cu
Temp Rise
400A
400 / 600A 750A / in. Al or
1000A in. Cu
Temp Rise
600A
Type 3R
All
Dimensions
in inches (mm)
Width
Depth
5.75 (146)
20 (508)
5.75 (146)
7.75 (197)
7.75 (197)
8.75 (222)
All Panels
Add height of modifications to branch
circuit height before selecting box.
Tables 9.24 and 9.25.
End walls are blank as standard.
End walls with knockouts will be
supplied on 5.75 in. (146 mm) deep
panels if requested.
Knockouts not available on 7.75 in.
(197 mm) deep panels.
Table 9.24Subfeed Breakers
Breaker
Type
FXD6
HFD6
JXD6
HJD6
Mounting
Position
When Used As
Subfeed Breaker
Horiz.
Vert.
Single
Double
Single
Double
Single
Single
Additional
Unit Space in
inches (mm)
When Used As
Subfeed Breaker
Single Double
9 (229)
21 (533)
9 (229)
24 (610)
24 (610)
Limit one type mounting per panel. Single mounting in

conjunction with double mounting not available.
Twin mounted HFD6 subfeed breakers are mounted at
bottom of panelboard only.
HJD6 subfeed breaker is mounted at bottom of panelboard only.
Table 9.25 Branch Breaker Unit Space
Sentron
Panelboards
Ampere
Rating
100
125
225
Breaker
Type
BL, BLH, HBL,
BQD
ED4, ED6, HED6
QJ2, HJH2, QJ2-H
No. of
Poles
1
2
3
2, 3
Unit
Space
in. (mm)
1 (25)
2 (51)
3 (76)
6 (152)
Table 9.26 Gauge Steel of Boxes /

Front Surface and Flush
Dimensions in in. (mm)
Height
Width
23 77
20
(584 1956)
(508)
Gauge Steel
Box
Front
#16
#14
Weight Approximate
Total panelboard weight when filled with
a normal quantity of breakers and accessories is:
About 3 Ibs. (1 kg) per in. (54g per
mm) of box height if most of the
breakers are BL or BQD type.
166
Dimensions
About 5 Ibs. (2 kg) per in. (91g per

mm) of box height if most of the
breakers are E frame.
Sizing the Box
When branch breakers of different frame
sizes are mixed in the same panel,
breakers of the same frame must be in
modules of 3 in. (76 mm) when sizing
the box. Example: A 225A MLO panel
with 8-poles of BL and 10-poles of ED4
type breakers. The BL breakers will
require 6 in. (152 mm) of panel height
(not 4 in. [102 mm]); and the ED4 type
breakers will require 6 in. (152 mm) of
panel height (not 5 in. [127 mm]). A 20
in. (508 mm) wide 29 in. (737 mm) high
Table 9.27
Box
Box
Ht.
in.
(mm)
23
(584)
26
(660)
29
(737)
32
(813)
35
(889)
38
(965)
41
(1041)
44
(1118)
47
(1194)
50
(1270)
53
(1346)
56
(1422)
59
(1499)
62
(1575)
65
(1651)
68
(1727)
71
(1803)
74
(1880)
77
(1956)
box is required, not a 20 in. (508 mm)

wide 26 in. (660 mm) high box. This
panel will contain provisions for 4-poles
of BL and 2-poles of ED4 frame breakers
although the order does not call for
these provisions.
Examples:
100 Ampere MLO Panelboard with 18 in.
(457 mm) of unit space, requires a 20 in.
(508 mm) wide 32 in. (813 mm) high box.
400 Ampere Main JXD6 Breaker
Panelboard with 21 in. (533 mm) of unit
space. requires a 20 in. (508 mm) wide
59 in. (1499 mm) high box.
Box Selection
Maximum Available Branch Circuit and Modification Unit Space in Inches (mm)
Breakers are Double Branch Mounted Except QJ2 AND QJ2H and all Subfeed
Main Lugs
Main Circuit Breakers
100A 225A 400A 600A 100A
100A 225A 225A 225A 400 400A 600A 600A
BL, BLH,
HBL, BQD,
ED4, ED6,
HED4
(229)
(229)
9
12
12
(229)
(305)
(305)
12
15
9
9
15
(305)
(381)
(229) (229)
(381)
15
9
18
12
12
9
18
(381)
(229)
(457)
(305) (305) (229)
(457)
18
12
21
15
15
12
21
(457)
(305)
(533)
(381) (381) (305)
(533)
21
15
9
24
18
18
15
24
(533)
(381) (229) (610)
(457) (457) (381)
(610)
24
18
12
27
21
21
18
27
(610)
(457) (305) (686)
(533) (533) (457)
(686)
27
21
15
30
24
24
21
9
30
(686)
(533) (381) (762)
(610) (610) (533)
(229)
(762)
30
24
18
33
27
27
24
12
9
33
(762)
(610) (457) (838)
(686) (686) (610)
(305) (229)
(838)
33
27
21
36
30
30
27
15
12
9
36
(838)
(686) (533) (914)
(762) (762) (686)
(381) (305)
(229)
(914)
36
30
24
33
33
30
18
15
12
(914)
(762) (610)
(838) (838) (762)
(457) (381)
(305)
33
27
36
36
33
21
18
9
15
(838) (686)
(914) (914) (838)
(533) (457) (229) (381)
36
30
36
24
21
12
18
9
(914) (762)
(914)
(610) (533) (305) (457) (229)
33
27
24
15
21
12
(838)
(686) (610) (381) (533) (305)
36
30
27
18
24
15
(914)
(762) (686) (457) (610) (381)
33
30
21
27
18
(838) (762) (533) (686) (457)
36
33
24
30
21
(914) (838) (610) (762 (533)
36
27
33
24
(914) (686) (838) (610)
30
36
27
(762) (914) (686)
Dimensions based upon 50 C Rise. A 20 in. (508 mm) wide by 5.75 in. (146 mm) deep box will be supplied. If 750A / in2
or 1000 A / in2 is required, a 20 in. (508 mm) wide by 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep box will be supplied.
When shunt trip required on main breaker increase box height 3.00 in. (76 mm).
Caution: table shows available unit space per box height. see page 165 for available circuit offerings.
Unit Space Required for QJ2, QJH2, and QJ2-H Circuit Breakers in. (mm)
Number 4
21 (533)
of
3
18 (457)
15 (381)
3-Pole
18 (457)
2
15 (381)
12
(305)
QJ2
12 (305)
15 (381)
1
9 (229)
6 (152)
Frame
Breakers 0
9 (229)
12 (305)
15 (381)
6 (152)
0 (0)
0
1
2
3
4
Number of 2-Pole QJ Frame Breakers
Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Power and Distribution
Types S4 / S5
for in-the-wall installations where flush

mounted trim is a desirable enhancement. The deeper S5 allows a 400 or
600A fusible switch or an 800 or 1200A
circuit breaker.
These code-gauge galvanized steel enclosures accommodate up to 60 in. (1524

mm) of unit space with room to pull,
trim, bend, and secure wiring. The 10-in.
(254 mm) depth of the S4 makes it ideal
Table 9.28
Dimensions
S4 / S5 Enclosure Selection
Enclosure Dimension in Inches (mm)

H
W
S5
Main Lug
S4
38 (965)
38 (965)
38 (965)
Main Breaker
Main Switch
S4 / S5
S4
S5
S4
Type 1, 3R/12 400 / 600A
800 / 1200A
400 / 600A
800 / 1200A
14.25 (362)
14.25 (362)
14.25 (362)
30 (762)
45 (1143)
60 (1524)
S5
S4
Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1, 3R/12 Type 1
60 (1524) 32 (813)
75 (1905) 32 (813)
90 (2286) 32 (813)
Available Cicuit Space in Inches (mm)
S4
S4 / S5
To determine enclosure size, list branch

devices and modifications requiring
space additions. List unit space requirements of each. Select appropriate enclosure height from Table 9.28 based on unit
space requirements.
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
12.75 (324)
12.75 (324)
12.75 (324)
30 (762)
45 (1143)
60 (1524)
38.25 (972)
51.25 (1302)
35 (889)
60 (1524)
200A
20 (508)
35 (889)
S5
400 / 600A
25 (635)
40 (1016)
S5
800/1200
28.75 (730)
43.75 (1111)
Standard trim is four piece without door. Surface or flush one piece trim is available for 32 in. (813 mm) wide circuit breaker panel.
Main Breaker
Table 9.29
S4 / S5 Main Lug (Fig. 2)

Main Lug
Neutral
400A
600A
800A
1000A
1200A
16.500 (419)
16.500 (419)
19.187 (487)
16.750 (425)
21.750 (552)
18.250 (464)
15.969 (406)
25.969 (660)
18.687 (475)
15.969 (406)
25.969 (660)
18.250 (464)
16.750 (425)
15.969 (406)
Standard with
16.500 (419)
Feed-thru
16.750 (425)
Lugs
Standard
Oversize
Crimp
Standard with
Subfeed
15.969 (406)
25.969 (660)
18.250 (464)
600A
F
13.125 (333)
18.125 (460)
15.937 (405)
800A
G
13.125 (333)
23.125 9587)
15.937 9405)
13.125 (333)
13.125 (333)
13.125 (333)
13.125 (333)
Fig. 1
Table 9.30
S4 / S5 Main Breaker (Fig. 1)

Panel
Type
Ampere
Rating
Breaker
Type
Neutral
B
S4
400
400 600
JXD6. JD6, HJD6

LXD6, LD6, HLD6, SLD6, SHJD6, SLD6, SHLD6
CJD6, SCJD6, CLD6, SCLD6
LMXD6, LMD6, MXD6, MD6, HMD6
CMD6, SCMD6, SHMD6, SMD6
NXD6, ND6, HND6, CND6, SND6, SHND6
10.42 (265)
10.42 (265)
5.92 (151)
13.00 (330)
10.42 (256)
13.00 (330)
13.125 (333)
800
S5
1200
Table 9.31
9
Fig. 2
Branch Breaker Unit Space
Breaker
Type
BL, BLH, HBL, BQD
ED4, ED6, HED4, HHED6
ED6, CED6
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2-H,
225
FXD6, FD6, HFD6
250
CFD6
JXD6, JD6, SJD6,
400
HJD6, SHJD6
CJD6, SCJD6
600
LXD6, LD6, SLD6, HLD6,
SHLD6, CLD6, SCLD6
800
LMD6, LMXD6
800
MD6, MXD6, SMD6, HMD6,
(S5 Only) SHMD6, CMD6, SCMD6
1200
ND6, NXD6, SND6, HND6,
(S5 Only) SHND6, CND6, SCND6
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
8.75 (222)
10.00 (254)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
10.00 (254)
Mounting height: 6 poles require 3.75 in. (95 mm) of
BL, BLH, HBL

BL, BLH, HBL
ED2, ED4, ED6
ED2, ED4, ED6
HED4, HHED6
HED4, HHED6
QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H QJ2, QJH2, QJ2H
FXD6, FD6, HD6 FXD6, FD6, HD6
JXD6, JD6, SJD6 JXD6, JD6, SJD6
HJD6, SHJD6
HJD6, SHJD6
CED6
CED6
CFD6
JXD6, JD6, LXD6, LD6, SLD6
HJD6, SJD6, SHJD6, HLD6, SHLD6
CJD6, SCJD6, CLD6, SCLD6
MD6, ND6, CMD6, CND6,
LMXD6, LMD6, HMD6, HND6
SMD6, SND6, SCMD6, SCND6,
SHMD6, SHND6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Sentron
Panelboards
Ampere
Rating
100
125
Mounting Height
in Inches (mm)
Twin
Single
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
3.75 (95)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
Table 9.32
Reference
Letter
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Panel Width in Inches (mm)

Twin
Single
11.000 (279)
14.000 (356)
7.000 (178)
10.000 (254)
5.750 (146)
8.750 (222)
5.250 (133)
8.250 (210)
7.937 (202)
4.625 (117)
7.719 (196)
8.781 (223)
11.781 (299)
10.437 (265)
13.781 (350)
5.719 (145)
8.969 (228)
13.000 (330)
12.000 (305)
mounting height. All breakers are double-branch mounted.

Consult enclosure section Table 9.28 above. 400A twin
mounted branches require 38 in. (965 mm) wide enclosure.
CSI Section 16471

Specification Guide
167
Sentron Panelboards
Technical
Types S4 and S5
Table 9.33
Branch Breakers Types S4 and S5
Maximum IR (kA)
Symmetrical
Amperes
Maximum Interrupting Rating (kA)

Symmetrical Amperes
Ampere Breaker
Rating Type
100
125
225
250
400
600
800
(S5
Only)
Sentron
Panelboards
1200
(S5
Only)
BL (120)
BL (240V)
BLH
HBL
BQD
BQD6
ED4
ED6
HED4
HHED6
CED6
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
HQJ2H
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
HHFD6
HHFXD6
CFD6
JXD6
JD6
SJD6
HJD6
HHJD6
HHJXD6
SHJD6
CJD6
SCJD6
LXD6
LD6
SLD6
HLD6
HHLD6
HHLXD6
SHLD6
CLD6
SCLD6
LMXD6
LMD6
HLMXD6
HLMD6
MD6, MXD6
SMD6
HMD6
SHMD6
CMD6
SCMD6
ND6, NXD6
SND6
HND6
SHND6
CND6
SCND6
Breaker
Ampere 120V
Rating
15100
15100
15100
15100
15100
15100
15125
15125
15125
15125
15125
60225
60225
60225
60225
70225
70225
70225
70225
70225
70225
200400
200400
200400
200400
200400
200400
200400
200400
200400
450600
250600
300600
250600
250600
250600
300600
450600
300600
500800
500800
500800
500800
500800
600800
500800
600800
500800
600800
8001200
8001200
8001200
8001200
9001200
8001200
480Y / 277V 34W only. Not for

1530A 65 kA, 35100A 25 kA
CSA listed only at 600V AC
168
65
100
120V /
240V
10
22
65
65
240V
10
65
65
65
100
100
200
10
22
42
100
65
65
100
200
200
200
65
65
65
100
200
200
100
200
200
65
65
65
100
200
200
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
65
65
100
100
200
200
65
65
100
100
200
200
277V
14
22
65
use on 480V 33W Delta Systems.
480V 600V
14
18
18
42
65
200
35
35
65
100
100
200
35
35
35
65
100
100
65
150
150
35
35
35
65
100
100
65
150
150
50
50
65
65
50
50
65
65
100
100
50
50
65
65
100
100
10
30
100
18
18
25
25
25
100
25
25
25
35
50
50
35
100
100
25
25
25
35
50
50
35
100
100
25
25
50
50
25
25
50
50
50
50
25
25
50
50
50
50
Ampere
Rating
400
600
Breaker
Type
JXD6
JD6
HJD6
HHJD6
HHJXD6
CJD6
SJD6
SHJD6
SCJD6
LXD6
LD6
HLD6
HHLD6
HHLXD6
CLD6
SLD6
SHLD6
SCLD6
240V
AC
65
65
100
200
200
200
65
100
200
65
65
100
200
200
200
65
100
200
600V
AC
25
25
35
50
50
100
25
35
100
25
25
35
50
50
100
25
35
100
480V
AC
35
35
65
100
100
150
35
65
150
35
35
65
100
100
150
35
65
150

200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
200, 300, 400
450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600
450, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600
300, 400, 500, 600

Maximum IR (kA)
Symmetrical
Amperes
Ampere
Rating
800
1200
Breaker
Type
LXMD6
LMD6
HLMXD6
HLMD6
MD6
HMD6
CMD6
SMD6
SHMD6
SCMD6
ND6
HND6
CND6
SND6
SHND6
SCND6
240V
AC
65
65
100
100
65
100
200
65
100
200
65
100
200
65
100
200
480V
AC
50
50
65
65
50
65
100
50
65
100
50
65
100
50
65
100
600V
AC
25
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50
25
50
50

500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
500, 600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
600, 700, 800
800, 900, 1000, 1200
800, 900, 1000, 1200
900, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200
800, 1000, 1200
Table 9.36Main Lugs

Ampere
Rating
400
600
800
1000
1200
Connectors Suitable for

Copper or Aluminum
(1)#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil
(2)#3 / 0 AWG-250 kcmil
(2)#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil
(3)#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil
(4)#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil
(4)#3 / 0 AWG-500 kcmil
Panel
Type
S4
S4
S4 / S5
S4 / S5
S4 / S5
Alternate lugs for 750 kcmil cable are available, but result in significant loss of branch
unit mounting space. Consult Siemens.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Dimensions
Types F1/F2
Table 9.37
Vac-Break Switch
F1 / F2 Enclosure Selection
Enclosure Dimensions in Inches (mm)

H
W
F2
F1
Type 1, 3R / 12
F1 / F2
Type 1, 3R / 12
38 (965)
60 (1524)
32 (813)
38 (965)
75 (1905)
32 (813)
38 (965)
90 (2286)
32 (813)
600V AC
D
F1
Type 1, 3R / 12
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
F2
Type 1, 3R / 12
12.75 (324)
12.75 (324)
12.75 (324)
Type 3R / 12
14.25 (362)
14.25 (362)
14.25 (362)
B
A
B
A
Table 9.38
F1 / F2 Main Lug
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
400
Type
F1
600
800
1000
1200
F1 / F2
Table 9.40
Table 9.39
Unit Space
in. (mm)
30
45
60
30
45
60
(762)
(1143)
(1524)
(762)
(1143)
(1524)
Type
F1
F2
F1 / F2 Main Switch
Maximum
Ampere
Rating
100
200
400
600
800
1200
A
B
A
Unit Space
in. (mm)
20 (508)
35 (889)
25 (635)
40 (1016)
43.75 (1111)
Branch Switch Unit Space
B
250V AC
Fig. 3
Table 9.41
Mounting Height
in In. (mm)
Panel
Type
F1 / F2
F2
F2
Number
of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
CSI Section 16471
Twin
Single
Mounted Mounted
2.50 (64)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
5.00 (127)
7.50 (191)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
15.00 (381)
15.00 (381)
7.50 (191)
7.50 (191)
7.50 (191)
7.50 (191)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
7.50 (191)
10.00 (254)
15.00 (381)
15.00 (381)
16.25
16.25
Cables Per
AC
Voltage Connector
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
1
240
2
240
2
240
1
600
1
600
1
600
1
600
1
600
1
600
1
600
1
600
2
600
2
600
600
3
600
4
Connectors Suitable for

Copper or Aluminum
#14 #8 AWG (Cu Only)
#14 #4 AWG
#14 #4 AWG
#14 #4 AWG
#10 #1 / 0 AWG
#10 #1 / 0 AWG
#6 AWG 350 kcmil
#6 AWG 350 kcmil
#6 AWG 350 kcmil
#4 / 0 AWG 500 kcmil
#14 #4 AWG
#14 #4 AWG
#14 #4 AWG
#10 #1 / 0 AWG
#10 #1 / 0 AWG
#6 AWG 350 kcmil
#10 #1 / 0 AWG
#6 AWG 350 kcmil

Specification Guide
Reference
Letter
600V AC
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
250V AC
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
(Fig. 3)
Switch
Ampere
Rating
Panel Width in
Inches (mm)
Type F2
Type F1
38
32
800
1200
600
400
200
100
200 / 200
100 / 100
30 / 30
60 / 60
7.5
7.5
5.0
5.0
7.0
7.0
800
1200
600
400
200
200 / 200
100 / 100
30 / 30
30 / 30
10.0 (000)
5.0 (000)
7.0 (000)
10.0 (000)
10.0 (000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
12.0
12.0
9.3
9.3
10.5
10.5
8.0
8.0
10.0
10.0
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
12.0
12.0
8.5
8.5
13.0
8.0
10.0
13.0
13.0
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
(000)
169
9
Sentron
Panelboards
Ampere
Rating
3030
3030
3060
6060
60100
100100
200200
200
200
400
600
3030
3060
6060
60100
100100
200200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
A
B
A
Sentron Panelboards
Technical
Types F1 and F2
Table 9.42Branch Switches
Table 9.45
Mounting Height
Panel
Type
F1/F2
F2
F1/F2
F2
Ampere
Rating
30-30
30-30
30-60
60-60
60-100
100-100
200-200
200
200
400
600
30-30
30-60
60-60
60-100
100-100
200-200
100
200
400
600
800
1200
Number
of Poles
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
2, 3
Twin
Single
Cables Per
AC
Voltage Mounted Mounted Connector
240
2.5
1
240
5
1
240
5
1
240
5
1
240
7.5
1
240
7.5
1
240
10
1
240
7.5
1
240
10
1
240
15
2
240
15
2
600
7.5
1
600
7.5
1
600
7.5
1
600
7.5
1
600
7.5
1
600
10
1
600
7.5
1
600
10
1
600
15
2
600
15
2
600
16.25
3
600
16.25
4
Table 9.43Main Lug Connectors

Type
F1
F1/F2
Ampere
Rating
400
600
800
1000
1200
Connectors suitable for

Copper or Aluminum
(1) #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(2) #3/0 AWG-250 kcmil
(2) #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(3) #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(4) #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(4) #3/0 AWG-500 kcmil

Copper or Aluminum
#14-#8 AWG (Cu Only)
#14-#8 AWG
#14-#4 AWG
#14-#4 AWG
#10-#1/0 AWG
#10-#1/0 AWG
#6 AWG-250 kcmil
#6 AWG-250 kcmil
#6 AWG-250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG-300 or (1) 500 kcmil
#4 AWG-500 kcmil
#14-#8 AWG
#14-#4 AWG
#14-#4 AWG
#10-#1/0 AWG
#10-#1/0 AWG
#6 AWG-250 kcmil
#10-#1/0 AWG
#6 AWG-250 kcmil
#1/0 AWG-300 or (1) 500 kcmil
#4 AWG-500 kcmil
#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
UL Fuse Classes
Interrupting
Ratings
Class Amperes Volts (kA)
I2 t, I i
1600 250 and
10
H
600V or
less AC
K5 1600 250 and 100 I tRK5
up to 100A
600V or
Ii, RK5
less AC
up to 100A
1600 600V or 200 I t-Low
J
less
Ii, -Low
RK1 1/10600 600V or
less
250V
or less
200
RK5 1/10600 600V or

less
250V
or less
200
1800
11200
601
6000A
300 and To 200

600V or
less AC
600V or 200
less
Circuits
Less than
10,000A
available
Feeder
circuits
Feeder
circuits
(motor load
small %)
I tFeeder
Slightly > J circuits
Ii,(motor load
Slightly > J small %)
I t- > RK-1 Motor
Ii,- > RK-1 starting
currents
a factor
I t-Low
Ii,-Low
Non-Motor
loads
I t-Low
Ii,-Low
Mains,
feeder
circuits
Fuses do not prohibit the use of Class H type fuse in

switch.
Table 9.44Main Switch Connectors

Type
F1
Ampere
Rating
100
200
F2
400
600
800
1200

Copper or Aluminum
(1)#10-#1/0 AWG
(Cu or Al)
(1)#6 AWG-300 kcmil
(1)#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(2)#3/0 AWG-250 kcmil
(2)#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(3)#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
(4)#3/0 AWG-500 kcmil
Sentron
Panelboards
Vacu-Break Switch
170

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16471
Sentron Panelboards
Lug Data
Application
Feed-Thru Lugs
Subfeed Lugs (Double Lugs)
incoming feeder. The feeder cables are

brought into Panelboard 1 and connected
to the main lugs or main breaker. Cables
interconnecting the two panelboards are
connected to the feed-thru lugs in
Panelboard 1 and are carried over the
main lugs in Panelboard 2. This arrangement could be reversed with the main
lugs located at the top and the feed-thru
lugs at the bottom of the panel. Subfeed
lugs are mounted directly beside the

main incoming lugs and are used to connect two or more panelboards to the
incoming feeder. The feeder cables are
brought into Panelboard 1 and connected
to the main lugs. Another set of cables
that are the same size are connected to
the subfeed lugs of Panelboard 1 and are
carried over the main lugs of Panelboard 2.
Bussing Sequence
Sentron interiors are designed to accommodate top or bottom feed. Regardless
of which is specified, the uppermost pole
is always on A phase; the second pole
down is always on B phase, and the
third pole down is always on C phase.

As standard, branch breakers shall be
mounted at the top of the panel with
spaces at the bottom, regardless of
the direction panel is fed.
All breakers have bolted connections

except plug-in type. The high-impact
main bus supports provide bracing up to
200,000A IR UL short circuit rating. Casehardened, thread-forming screws are
used on branch bus.
Motor Starters
Table 9.46Motor Starter Selector
Table 9.47
Space Required for Mounting of

Double Panels
Use two or more panelboards with feedthru or subfeed lugs when:

1. Lighting and appliance panelboards are
required with more than 42 circuits.
2. More circuit mounting space is
required than is provided in the largest
box size.
Feed-thru lugs are mounted at the opposite end of the main bus from the main
lugs or main breaker and are used to connect two or more panelboards to the
CSI Section 16471
200
or 208 V
230V
480
or
600V
NEMA Size
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
HP Rating
7.5
10
25
40
7.5
15
30
50
10
25
50
100
Instantaneous Trip (ET) type breakers are

designed for use in motor circuits and
combination starters where short circuit
protection only is required from the
breaker. When used in combination
starters they serve in conjunction with a
motor protective relay to offer complete
protection. The relay protects against
overloads, the breaker provides short circuit protection.
Standard Motor Starters
Equipped With:
3rd overload relay
Mechanical interlock between circuit
breaker (or switch) and motor starter
door
Reset button
Class 1, Type A wiring

Specification Guide
Motor Starter Selector
3 Per Motor Starters

NEMA
NEMA Control Available
Starter Size Starter Power Accessory
Transf. Positions
Left Right Type
2
Yes
1
FVNR
2
Yes
1
FVNR
2
No
1
1
FVNR
4
Yes
1
FVNR
4
Yes
1
FVNR
4
Yes
1
1
FVNR
8
Yes
1
FVR
4
Yes
1
2S2W
4
Yes
2
FVNR
4
Yes
2
FVNR
4
Yes
2
2
FVNR
4
Yes
2
1
FVNR
4
Yes
1
2
FVNR
8
Yes
2
FVR
8
Yes
2
2S2W
4
Yes
2
2
FVR
4
Yes
2
2
2S2W
4
Yes
3
FVNR
4
Yes
3
FVNR
4
Yes
3
3
FVNR
8
Yes
3
FVR
8
Yes
4
FVNR
Mounting
Height
in. (mm)
5.00 (127)
7.50 (191)
9
10.00 (254)
15.00 (381)
15.00 (381)
Optional Motor Control Accessories

Pushbuttons: Start / Stop or Open /
Close, Reverse / Forward / Stop or
High / Low / Stop
Selector Switch: Hand / Off / Auto or
On / Off
Pilot Light: Red or Amber
Auxiliary interlock (normally open or
normally closed-unwired)
Control transformer, 60Hz, fused LV,
Sizes 1 4
Class 1, Type B wiring
171
Sentron
Panelboards
Motor Starters
Full voltage, non-reversing NEMA Size 1
through Size 4 motor starters are available as additions to S5 and F2 panelboards. S5 panelboards can accommodate motor disconnect devices in either
one of two circumstances: 1. by using a
branch thermal magnetic (ET) circuit
breaker to feed a remote starter that controls a motor which is in sight of and
within fifty feet of the panelboard. 2. by
using a branch instantaneous trip only
(ET) circuit breaker in conjunction with a
motor starter mounted in the same
enclosure which is in sight of and within
fifty feet of the controlled motor.
Whenever a remote starter is used, a
padlocking device must be specified so
that a padlock may be installed in the
OFF position. Conversely, when breaker and starter are mounted within the
same enclosure, provision for padlocking
shall be provided. F2 panelboards incorporate motor disconnect devices much in
the same way as S5 panelboards, only a
fusible Vacu-Break switch unit is utilized
rather than an (ETI) circuit breaker. Also,
padlocking devices are standard on all
Vacu-Break switches and need not be
ordered as an accessory.
Voltage
Sentron Panelboards
Lighting, Power and Distribution
Transient Protection System
The Siemens Transient Protection
System truly is designed for the entire
electrical system. From the service
entrance equipment to lighting panelboards, Siemens has a system that will
meet or exceed your specifications.
Installed at stages in your electrical system, the Sentron protects sensitive
equipment closest to where it is needed.
Many of the Sentron TPS bolt directly to
the bus bars of our panelboards, for optimal redundancy protection. Industry-first
retrofit kits complete one of the finest
voltage transient protection systems on
the market.
Siemens TPS Standards and
Specifications
Suppressors manufactured and tested
in accordance with ANSI / IEEE
C62.41, C62.45 (describing transient
environment, transients and applications)
UL1449, UL1283 listed
Capable of protecting against and surviving a minimum of degradation of
UL1449 clamp voltage by more than
10%
Low inductance suppression path
Redundancy protection
Applications
Table 9.48
Switchboards
Features
TPS 6
Surge Capacity/Phase
200kA/300kA/400kA
Modes of Protection
L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G
U.L. Supression Ratings
L-N L-G N-G
208Y/120V/ 3P 4W
400 400 400
480Y/277V 3P 4W
800 800 800
Category C3 (10kA) Minimum 5,000
Pulse Life- # of impulses
50db
50db
50db
50db
Yes
Standard
Cable
200kAIC
Surge Related
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Yes
Standard
Cable
200kAIC
Surge Related
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Yes
N/A
Direct Bus
200kAIC
Surge Related
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Yes
N/A
Direct Bus
200kAIC
Surge Related
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Optional
Standard
Optional
Increased EMI/RFI Filter

Warranty
Standard Voltages
120/240V; 208Y/120V;
240V Delta; 480Y/277V;
480V Delta; 347Y/600V;
600V Delta
Optional
5 Years
All Voltages
Available
N/A
5 Years
All Voltages
Available
N/A
5 Years
All Voltages
Available
N/A
5 Years
120/240V
208Y/120V
480Y/277V
I(t)/lp
0.8
9
Front Time
= 8s
Sentron
Panelboards
0.6
Duration
= 20s
0.4
0.2
174
20
Lighting
Panelboard
(125A250A)
TPS 1
80kA/160kA
L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G
L-N L-G N-G
400 400 400
800 800 800
3,500
U.L. 1449 Listed

Disconnect
Connection Method
Overcurrent Rating
Fusing
Diagnostic Monitoring
Immediate Status LED
Reduced Protection LED
Audible Alarm
Dry Contacts for Remote
Surge Counter
Diagnostic Test Switch
Remote Monitor
UL Test Wave. Test for Category B and C Panel Suppressors.
10
Lighting
Panelboards
TPS 2
100kA/200kA
L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G
L-N L-G N-G
400 400 400
800 800 800
3,500
U.L. 1283 Filter

Attenuation at 100 Hz
1.0
Power
Panelboards
TPS 5
150kA/200kA
L-N/L-L, L-G, N-G
L-N L-G N-G
400 400 400
800 800 800
4,000
30
40 Time, s
50

Specification Guide
Technology of Siemens Integrated TPS

and Specifications
Suppression circuit senses overvoltage condition and diverts the excess
away from the load to common point
earth ground
Multiple MOVs used to increase
amount of energy a circuit can handle
successfully
Multiple modes of protection:
Line-to-Neutral
Line-to-Ground
Neutral-to-Ground
Line-to-Line
Each MOV path individually fused at
200k AIC for maximum safety
TPS system mounts in all Siemens
products without extra wiring and
space requirements.
LED indicators for voltage and diagnostic monitoring
Redundant suppression paths
between each phase conductor and
neutral, each phase conductor and
ground, and neutral conductor and
ground.
CSI Section 16471
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
General
Bus Bars
Sentron busway is available with an
unique, optional 200% neutral design, 6cycle and 1 second short circuit withstand ratings up to 200kA RMS Sym,
130C Class B Mylar insulation, and a
housing that serves as a ground conductor. Sentron busway is available in the following ampacities: 225A, 400A, 600A,
800A, 1000A, 1200A, 1350A, 1600A,
2000A, 2500A, 3000A, and 4000A;
5000A is available in copper only.
Siemens Sentron Busway was engineered with both consultants and contractors in mind, allowing both to provide
customers with a product boasting
unprecedented ratings, yet a surprising
level of simplicity and ease of installation.
Busway Systems
10
To the Consultant . . .
Sentron Busway reduces the troublesome effects of common harmonics
problems with the industrys only fully
integrated 200% neutral.
As for ground options, Sentron Busway
features an integral ground through its
aluminum case as standard. Other
options include an internal ground and an
isolated ground for installations requiring
a separate ground path.
Sentron Busway features superior water
resistance ratings other manufacturers
cannot match. In fact, it is the only complete busway system that, regardless of
position, complies 100% with the water
resistance standards for both UL and IEC
plugs and all. Various levels of water
protection are available, so you can tailor
the busway system to suit its environment. And should that environment be in
another country, note that Sentron
Busway complies fully with UL, IEC,
CSA, VDE, BS and DIN standards.
To achieve Sentron Busways 130C rating, each bus bar is wrapped with three
high-impact and chemical resistant layers
of 5 mil Mylar insulation. Unlike other
brands of plug-in busway, Sentron meets
IP-2X requirements with the plug-in doors
open guarding against accidental finger
contact with energized parts. To enhance
design flexibility, Sentron Busway is available in feeder, plug-in and riser busway
configurations as standard. Sentron also
features a polyester powder-painted aluminum housing that doubles as an integral ground.
178
To the Contractor . . .
Every design detail in the Sentron
busway system factors in the needs of
those who install it Contractors.
3 phase, 3 wire
3 phase,
4 wire
100%
Neutral
3 phase,
4 wire
200%
Neutral
Standard Bus Bar Configuration
Housing
Sentron Busway is designed to hang
with minimal hardware and hassle. Its
lightweight aluminum housing is built to
be used as an integral ground. Bus plugs
and cable tap boxes feature the largest
wire bending space in the industry as
standard, with even more room available
as an option at no extra cost.
Joint
To speed installation, joint stacks connect
with splice plates which features a single
bolt design and special, double-headed
break-off bolt that eliminates the need for
torque wrenches. With 0.625 in. (16
mm) of adjustability at each joint as standard, there is greater reliability and flexibility for busway layout connections.

Specification Guide
Bus Plugs
Regardless of rating, the positive latching
feature of Sentron bus plugs prevents
installation and removal of the plug from
the bus with the switch in the ON
position. The operating handle can be
padlocked in the OFF position.
Also featured: a voidable interlock for
energized plug testing, and a red / green
indicator that shows the ON-OFF status of the switching mechanism, which
can be seen from a distance of 25 ft. (7.5
meters). Plug-in outlets are located on 2
ft. (610 mm) centers on both sides of
standard plug-in busway.
Neutral Harmonics
Sentron Busway offers a 200% neutral
within the bus bar housing.
A sinusoidal voltage applied to a nonlinear load will result in a non-sinusoidal
current. This non-sinusoidal current is
periodic and can be reproduced from a
number of sinusoidal component currents, called harmonics. These harmonics
cause circulating currents in the delta primaries of distribution transformers, thus
overheating the unit.
It is possible to experience neutral loads
of 173% of the phase conductor. With
Siemens Sentron Busway, a fully rated
200% neutral conductor within the
busway itself can be specified. The extra
neutral capacity of Sentron Busway minimizes overheating and prolongs the life
cycle of power distribution equipment.
This system is especially useful with
discharge lighting (fluorescent) and computer installations.
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
General Ratings
Busway Types
Feeder or Plug-in
Indoor
Spray Proof
Splash Proof
Feeder Only
Outdoor
Severe Outdoor
IP 40
IP 43
IP 54
Conductors
3 phase, 3 wire
3 phase, 4 wire (100% neutral)
3 phase, 4 wire (200% neutral)
Integral aluminum housing ground
Internal ground bus
(Aluminum and Copper)
Isolated ground bus
(Aluminum and Copper)
Capacities
Aluminum: up to 4000A
Copper: up to 5000A
Short Circuit Ratings
85,000 to 200,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes (6 cycles).
IP 65
IP 66
Water Resistance
Sentron Busway is the first busway system to provide true levels of protection to
guard against entry of water and dust.
Unlike other busway systems where only
the busway is water resistant and not the
plug-in units, Sentron offers a complete
system that is in 100% compliance with
both UL and IEC standards and is
approved through third party certification.
Each of the busway types listed in Table
10.1 is approved for all mounting positions.
UL 1479 Fire Rated
Installations
Sentron Busway has been tested in accordance with UL 1479 and offers a certified
two hour fire rating for gypsum wallboard
construction, and a three hour fire rating
for concrete slab or block penetrations.
These ratings were achieved using standard busway installed with SpecSeal
sealant from Specified Technologies Inc.
The SpecSeal fire stop system provides
superior performance at the industrys
lowest installed cost. Sentron is the first
busway system to achieve a fire rating for
gypsum wallboard construction.
Short Circuit Protection
Sentron Busway utilizes the strength of
the housing design to provide one of the
industrys highest levels of short circuit
protection. In accordance with both UL
and IEC, Sentron Busway offers short circuit ratings for six cycle and one second
requirements. These ratings are
approved through third party certification.
Table 10.1
Levels of Protection Description
IEC 529Degrees of Protection

Provided by Enclosures
Code
Description
Plug-in outlet protects against access
to live parts by .472 in. (12 mm) test
IP 2X
probe, even with cover opened. Finger safe.
Approved for
Sentron Busway Type
Feeder
Plug-In
Plug-In Units
IP 40
Enclosure protects against entry of

.039 in. (1.0 mm) test probe. Indoor
(Typical UL designation)
IP 43

.039 in. (1 mm) test probe and
dripping water. Spray proof.
IP 54

dust and splashing water. Splash proof.
IP 65
Enclosure is dust tight and protects against

water jets. Outdoor (Typical UL designation)
IP 66
Enclosure is dust tight and protects against

powerful water jets. Severe Outdoor.
Two Hour Fire Rating

Gypsum Wallboard
Three Hour Fire Rating

Concrete Slab
See page 190 for recommended cutout dimensions.
Table 10.2
Ampere
Rating
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
Short Circuit Protection Ratings

6 Cycle
RMS Symmetrical (kA)
Aluminum
85
85
85
100
100
125
150
150
150
200
200
200

Specification Guide
Copper
85
85
85
85
100
100
100
125
150
150
200
200
200
60 Cycle (1 Second)
RMS Symmetrical (kA)
Aluminum
28
28
28
47
50
60
75
90
110
130
160
200
Copper
40
40
40
40
50
65
80
95
115
130
175
200
200
10
Busway Systems
Energy Optimization
Sentron Busway energy optimization features include extremely low reactance
due to non-magnetic housing and total
intimate contact of bus bars and housing.
Voltage drop values are the same for
both feeder and plug-in busway. Unlike
competitive busway, voltage drop values
are the same for indoor, outdoor, and all
IP rated busway.
CSI Section 16466
Technical
179
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Table 10.3
Rated
Load
Amperes
Aluminum
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Copper
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
Dimensions
Sentron Busway Characteristics

Bus Bar
Width 0.25 in.
(6.4 mm) Thick
Ohms 10 3 per 100 ft

Line-to-Neutral
R
X
Z
Voltage Drop Concentrated Loads

Line-to-Line per 100 ft at 100% Rated Load, 25C Ambient
Power Factor
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
(44.5)
(44.5)
(44.5)
(60.5)
(82.6)
(111.3)
(136.7)
(165.1)
(222.3)
(143.0)
(171.5)
(228.6)
3.91
4.05
4.25
3.10
2.25
1.70
1.38
1.14
0.84
0.69
0.57
0.42
1.19
1.19
1.19
0.96
0.71
0.53
0.44
0.36
0.27
0.21
0.19
0.13
4.09
4.22
4.41
3.24
2.36
1.78
1.45
1.20
0.88
0.72
0.60
0.44
0.90
1.63
2.50
2.56
2.34
2.12
1.95
1.90
1.78
1.77
1.81
1.75
1.03
1.88
2.90
2.93
2.68
2.43
2.23
2.18
2.03
2.04
2.07
2.00
1.16
2.11
3.28
3.30
3.01
2.73
2.50
2.44
2.27
2.29
2.32
2.25
1.28
2.34
3.64
3.64
3.32
3.01
2.76
2.69
2.50
2.53
2.55
2.48
1.40
2.55
3.97
3.95
3.60
3.27
2.99
2.92
2.71
2.75
2.76
2.69
1.50
2.74
4.27
4.23
3.85
3.49
3.20
3.13
2.90
2.94
2.95
2.88
1.57
2.88
4.51
4.44
4.04
3.66
3.35
3.28
3.03
3.09
3.09
3.02
1.52
2.81
4.42
4.30
3.90
3.53
3.23
3.16
2.91
2.99
2.96
2.91
1.75
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.25
2.88
3.50
4.50
6.00
8.50
(2) 4.75
(2) 6.50
(2) 8.50
(44.5)
(44.5)
(44.5)
(44.5)
(57.2)
(73.2)
(88.9)
(114.3)
(152.4)
(215.9)
(120.7)
(165.1)
(215.9)
2.19
2.22
2.33
2.47
1.89
1.51
1.17
0.89
0.69
0.46
0.43
0.34
0.23
1.19
1.19
1.19
1.19
0.98
0.79
0.66
0.52
0.39
0.28
0.25
0.19
0.14
2.49
2.52
2.61
2.74
2.13
1.70
1.34
1.03
0.79
0.54
0.50
0.39
0.27
0.70
1.25
1.90
2.59
2.60
2.51
2.28
2.11
2.01
1.76
1.91
1.98
1.72
0.76
1.37
2.10
2.87
2.87
2.76
2.50
2.30
2.20
1.91
2.09
2.17
1.88
0.83
1.48
2.28
3.13
3.11
2.99
2.69
2.48
2.37
2.05
2.24
2.34
2.01
0.88
1.58
2.44
3.37
3.32
3.19
2.87
2.63
2.52
2.17
2.38
2.48
2.14
0.93
1.66
2.57
3.57
3.50
3.37
3.01
2.75
2.64
2.26
2.49
2.60
2.23
0.96
1.72
2.68
3.72
3.64
3.49
3.11
2.84
2.73
2.32
2.57
2.69
2.30
0.97
1.74
2.72
3.80
3.69
3.54
3.13
2.85
2.74
2.32
2.58
2.70
2.31
0.85
1.54
2.42
3.42
3.27
3.14
2.74
2.47
2.39
1.99
2.23
2.36
1.99
3. Actual voltage drop for different lengths and at

loadings less than full rated current can be
calculated using the formula:
Vd (actual) = Vd (table) actual load actual length (ft)
rated load
100 feet
Ground Resistance
Sentron Busway is the only busway to
feature a wide variety of ground paths.
Integral aluminum housing ground (std.)
Copper or aluminum internal ground
Copper or aluminum isolated ground
The cross-sectional area of the aluminum
housing of Sentron Busway exceeds the
minimum ground requirements specified
in Table 5.1 of UL 857 by a factor of four
or more, and the current carrying capacity offered by the housing is greater than
would be provided by an internal aluminum or copper ground bar sized 50%
of the phase bar. See Table 10.4.
Busway Systems
Table 10.4
4. For 50 Hz, multiply reactance (X) by 0.85 and

resistance values do not change. For 400 Hz,
multiply reactance by 3.75 and multiply
resistance by 1.4. Calculate new voltage drop:
Vd = amps load = 3 (Rcos + X sin ) per
100 ft, where cos = Power Factor.
Sentron Busway Ground Capacity
Phase Bar
Ampere Width
Rating Inches (mm)
Aluminum
600
1.75 (44)
800
2.38 (60)
1000
3.25 (83)
1200
4.38 (111)
1350
5.38 (137)
1600
6.50 (165)
2000
8.75 (222)
2500
5.63 (143)
3000
6.75 (171)
4000
9.00 (229)
Copper
600
1.75 (44)
800
1.75 (44)
1000
2.25 (57)
1200
2.88 (73)
1350
3.50 (89)
1600
4.50 (114)
2000
6.00 (152)
2500
8.50 (216)
3000
4.75 (121)
4000
6.50 (165)
5000
8.50 (216)
180
1.0
1.75
1.75
1.75
2.38
3.25
4.38
5.38
6.50
8.75
(2) 5.63
(2) 6.75
(2) 9.00
Notes:
1. For plug-in distributed loads, divide voltage drop
values by 2.
2. To determine voltage drop line-to-neutral,
multiply line-to-line values by 0.577.
10
0.9
Bars
Per
Pole
Sect. Area
Min. Sect. Area
Sect. Area
Internal
Gnd. Bus or Encl.
50% Internal (Housing)
UL 857 Table 5.1 (In2) Gnd Bar (In2) Ground (In2)
2.288
2.389
2.528
2.709
2.869
3.048
3.408
4.822
5.180
5.900
Current Carrying
Capacity Ratio
Integral / Internal
0.166
0.196
0.227
0.294
0.353
0.515
0.589
0.810
0.215
0.294
0.403
0.544
0.669
0.809
1.090
1.401
1.681
2.243
8.78
6.64
5.06
3.94
3.35
2.91
2.36
2.59
2.28
1.91
0.105
0.132
0.177
0.236
0.294
0.353
0.412
0.589
0.707
0.215
2.288
5.20
0.278
0.357
0.434
0.559
0.747
1.059
1.181
1.618
2.118
2.368
2.469
2.568
2.728
2.968
3.368
4.540
5.100
5.740
4.13
3.32
2.81
2.28
1.83
1.42
1.73
1.39
1.17
Aluminum Housing Ground: 44% conductivity

Aluminum Gound Bar: 58% conductivity
Copper Ground Bar: 98% conductivity

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Plug-In Busway Options and Straight Sections

Sentron busway is available in ratings
from 2255000 amperes, in 4, 6, 8, and
10 ft. lengths (1219, 1829, 2438, and
3048 mm, respectively). Plug-in outlet

options are shown below.
Standard Plug-In Busway

Plug-in outlets are located on 2-ft. (610
mm) centers on both sides of the
busway. This allows optimizing the
number of plug-in units in horizontal
applications.
Standard Riser Busway
Plug-in outlets are on one side of the
busway and located on 2-ft. (610 mm)
centers. This allows optimizing the
number of useable plug-in outlets in
vertical applications.
Standard Plug-In Outlet Features
Straight Sections
Top View for Both Feeder and Plug-In Busway
Feeder busway sections are available in

0.5 inch (12.7mm) increments from 2 ft.
(610 mm) to 10 ft (3048 mm) in total
length. In addition to the standard 10 ft.
(3048 mm) plug-in sections, lengths of 4,
6, and 8 feet (1219, 1829, and 2438 mm)
are also available. Every section includes
a removable joint stack.
Feeder Busway Side View
10
Busway Systems
Plug-in outlet
Plug-In Busway Side View
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
181
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Feeder and Plug-in Widths and Weights
Note: Plug-in busway is available

in 4, 6, 8, and 10 ft. lengths
(1219, 1524, 2438, and 3048 mm)
Feeder Busway is available in 0.5
in (12.7 mm) increments between
2 ft. (610 mm) and 10 ft. (3048
mm) lengths.
Typical Cross Section

Figure 1
(One Bar Per Pole)
Table 10.5
Figure 2
(Two Bars Per Pole)
Sentron Busway Widths and Weights

Approximate WeightLbs. per ft. (kg per meter)
Ampere
Rating
Figure
W Dimension
Inches (mm)
3-Wire
3-Wire
with Ground
4-Wire
100% Neutral
4-Wire
100% Neutral
with Ground
4-Wire
200% Neutral
4-Wire
200% Neutral
with Ground
Aluminum
225
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
(9)
(9)
(9)
6 (10)
400
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
(9)
(9)
(9)
6 (10)
(9)
(9)
(9)
6 (10)
600
3.9 (99)
5 (8)
5 (8)
800
4.5 (115)
6 (9)
6 (9)
7 (10)
7 (10)
7 (11)
8 (11)
1000
5.4 (137)
7 (10)
7 (11)
8 (12)
8 (12)
9 (13)
9 (14)
1200
6.5 (166)
8 (12)
9 (13)
9 (14)
10 (15)
11 (16)
11 (17)
1350
7.5 (191)
9 (13)
10 (15)
11 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
1600
8.6 (219)
10 (15)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
14 (21)
15 (22)
2000
10.9 (277)
13 (19)
14 (21)
15 (23)
16 (24)
18 (26)
19 (28)
2500
13.6 (345)
16 (24)
18 (27)
19 (29)
21 (31)
23 (34)
24 (36)
3000
15.8 (402)
18 (27)
20 (30)
22 (33)
24 (36)
26 (39)
28 (41)
4000
20.3 (516)
23 (34)
26 (38)
28 (42)
31 (46)
33 (50)
36 (53)
Copper
Busway Systems
10
225
3.9 (99)
9 (13)
10 (14)
10 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
400
3.9 (99)
9 (13)
10 (14)
10 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
600
3.9 (99)
9 (13)
10 (14)
10 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
800
3.9 (99)
9 (13)
10 (14)
10 (16)
11 (17)
12 (18)
13 (19)
1000
4.4 (112)
10 (15)
11 (17)
12 (19)
14 (20)
15 (22)
16 (23)
1200
5.0 (128)
12 (18)
14 (20)
15 (22)
16 (24)
18 (26)
19 (29)
1350
5.6 (143)
14 (21)
16 (24)
17 (26)
19 (29)
21 (31)
23 (34)
1600
6.6 (169)
17 (26)
19 (29)
22 (32)
24 (35)
26 (38)
28 (42)
2000
8.1 (207)
22 (32)
25 (37)
28 (41)
30 (45)
33 (50)
36 (54)
2500
10.6 (270)
30 (44)
34 (50)
38 (56)
42 (62)
46 (68)
50 (74)
3000
11.8 (300)
34 (50)
38 (57)
43 (64)
48 (71)
52 (78)
57 (84)
4000
15.3 (389)
44 (65)
51 (76)
57 (85)
63 (94)
69 (103)
76 (113)
5000
19.3 (491)
57 (85)
65 (97)
73 (109)
81 (121)
90 (133)
98 (146)
Note: Current density
182
(amps/in2)
rated busway available. Consult Siemens.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Elbows, Tees, and Offsets Standard and Combination
Elbows
Elbows, Tees, and Offsets allow for turns and offsets in the busway to be made in any
direction (up, down, left, right). Every section includes a joint stack and joint inspection covers.
Table 10.6
Up or down elbows (Edgewise)
Standard Flatwise Elbow and Tee Dimensions

Standard Dimensions (Minimum) in Inches (mm)
Ampere
Rating
Z (Tees Only)
Aluminum
225 1350
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
1600 3000
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
4000
24 (610)
24 (610)
24 (610)
Up elbow
shown
Copper
225 2000
12 (305)
12 (305)
12 (305)
2500 4000
18 (457)
18 (457)
18 (457)
5000
24 (610)
24 (610)
24 (610)
Left or right elbows (Flatwise)
Tees
Up or down tees (Edgewise)
Left or right tees (Flatwise)
Right elbow shown
Table 10.8
Up tee shown
Table 10.7
Ampere
Rating
Right tee shown
Combination Elbows and Offsets

Combination Elbows
Offsets
Standard Dimensions (Minimum)

in Inches (mm)
Standard Dimensions (Minimum)

in Inches (mm)
225 1350
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
1600 3000
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
4000
10 (254)
16 (406)
24 (610)
24 (610)
8 (203)
24 (610)
Aluminum
Copper
225 2000
10 (254)
8 (203)
12 (305)
12 (305)
5 (127)
12 (305)
2500 4000
10 (254)
12 (305)
18 (457)
18 (457)
5 (127)
18 (457)
5000
10 (254)
16 (406)
24 (610)
24 (610)
8 (203)
24 (610)
Combination
Elbows
Edge Tees
A Dimension in Inches (mm)

Aluminum
Copper
Ampere
Rating
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
13.00
(330)
18.00
(457)
18.00
(457)
27.00
(686)
27.00
(686)
29.00 (737)
29.00 (737)
For
Isolated ground applications dimensions consult

sales office.
Edge Tee
8 in.
(203 mm)
Offsets
48 in. (1219 mm)

32 in.
(813 mm)
Up or down offsets (Edgewise)
Left or Right offsets (Flatwise)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
24 in.
(610 mm)
8 in.
(203 mm)
CL
24 in.
16 in. (610 mm)
(406 mm)
Right offset shown

Specification Guide
183
10
Busway Systems
CL
up offset shown
8 in.
(203 mm)
A
Dim.
24 in.
(610 mm)
CSI Section 16466
13.00
(330)
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
End Tap Boxes

End cable tap boxes can be installed at
either end of the busway system.
Standard mechanical lugs suitable for
aluminum or copper conductors are
supplied. No adaptors are needed to
field install compression lugs utilizing
NEMA hole patterns. Compression lugs
are optional.
Table 10.9
Ampere
Rating
Aluminum
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Standard / Extended Wire Bending

Space
Cable tap boxes are designed with both
standard and extended wire bending
space. Extended wire bending space
dimensions are shown in dark shaded
areas of Table 10.9.
Provisions for both standard mechanical
and compression lugs utilizing NEMA
hole patterns.
End Cable Tap Box
Copper
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
Standard Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Horizontal Applications Figure 1 Vertical Applications Figure 2
B
B
A
A
Standard
Extended
Standard
Extended
29 (737)
33 (838)
13 (330)
25 (635)
29 (737)
13 (330)
29 (737)
33 (838)
13 (330)
25 (635)
29 (737)
13 (330)
29 (737)
33 (838)
13 (330)
25 (635)
29 (737)
13 (330)
29 (737)
33 (838)
13 (330)
25 (635)
29 (737)
13 (330)
29 (737)
33 (838)
13 (330)
25 (635)
29 (737)
13 (330)
32 (813)
36 (914)
13 (330)
28 (711)
32 (813)
13 (330)
32 (813)
36 (914)
13 (330)
28 (711)
32 (813)
13 (330)
32 (813)
36 (914)
18 (457)
28 (711)
32 (813)
18 (457)
32 (813)
36 (914)
18 (457)
28 (711)
32 (813)
18 (457)
32 (813)
36 (914)
18 (457)
28 (711)
32 (813)
18 (457)
32 (813)
36 (914)
18 (457)
28 (711)
32 (813)
18 (457)
32 (813)
36 (914)
18 (457)
28 (711)
32 (813)
18 (457)
33 (838)
37 (940)
27 (686)
28 (711)
32 (813)
27 (686)
33 (838)
37 (940)
27 (686)
28 (711)
32 (813)
27 (686)
33 (838)
37 (940)
27 (686)
28 (711)
32 (813)
27 (686)
33 (838)
37 (940)
29 (737)
28 (711)
32 (813)
29 (737)
33 (838)
37 (940)
29 (737)
28 (711)
32 (813)
29 (737)
Wire Bend Space

C
Standard
Extended
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
Cable Lugs
Per Phase
and Neutral
Qty.
Size
12
12
15
Ground
Lugs
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
4
#6 AWG - 350 kcmil, Cu / Al

#4 AWG - 600 kcmil, Cu / Al
2 ft. (610 mm) if Isolated Ground is specified.
Fused Reducer
Busway Systems
10
Figure 1
(Horizontal Applications)
184

Specification Guide
Figure 2
(Vertical Applications)
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Center and Plug-In Cable Tap Boxes

Center cable tap boxes can be installed
at any point along the busway run.
aluminum or copper conductors are
supplied. No adaptors are needed to
field install compression lugs utilizing
NEMA hole patterns. Compression lugs
are optional.
Standard / Extended Wire Bending

Space
Cable tap boxes are designed with both
standard and extended wire bending
space. Extended wire bending space
dimensions are shown in dark shaded
areas of Table 10.10.
Provisions for both standard mechanical

and compression lugs utilizing NEMA
hole patterns.
Table 10.10 Center Cable Tap Box
Ampere
Rating
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000

Aluminum
A
Standard Extended
B
29 (737)
16 (406)
25 (635)
29 (737)
16 (406)
25 (635)
29 (737)
16 (406)
25 (635)
29 (737)
16 (406)
25 (635)
29 (737)
16 (406)
25 (635)
33 (838)
16 (406)
29 (737)
33 (838)
16 (406)
29 (737)
37 (940)
20 (508)
33 (838)
37 (940)
20 (508)
33 (838)
41 (1041)
24 (610)
37 (940)
41 (1041)
24 (610)
37 (940)
49 (1245)
28 (711)
45 (1143)
D
3.9 (99)
3.9 (99)
3.9 (99)
4.3 (109)
4.7 (119)
5.3 (135)
5.8 (147)
6.3 (160)
7.4 (188)
8.7 (221)
9.7 (246)
11.9 (302)
Copper
A
Standard
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
25 (635)
29 (737)
29 (737)
29 (737)
29 (737)
33 (838)
33 (838)
37 (940)
40 (1016)
Extended
29 (737)
29 (737)
29 (737)
29 (737)
29 (737)
33 (838)
33 (838)
33 (838)
33 (838)
37 (940)
37 (940)
41 (1041)
44 (1118)
B
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
16 (406)
20 (508)
20 (508)
24 (610)
24 (610)
28 (711)
34 (864)
D
3.9 (99)
3.9 (99)
3.9 (99)
3.9 (99)
4.2 (107)
4.5 (114)
4.8 (122)
5.3 (135)
6.1 (155)
7.3 (185)
7.9 (201)
9.4 (239)
11.7 (297)
Cable Bend Space

C
Standard Extended
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
17 (432)
21 (533)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
20 (508)
24 (610)
Cable Lugs
Per Phase
and Neutral
Qty.
Size
12
15
Ground
Lugs
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
3
4
#6 AWG 350 MCM, Cu/Al

#4 AWG 600 MCM, Cu/Al
2-ft. (610 mm) if Isolated Ground is specified.
10
Busway Systems
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
185
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
One- and Three-Phase Service Heads and Standard Stubs

Table 10.11
Cable Lugs
A Dimensions
Per Phase
in Inches (mm)
& Neutral Ground
Amp
Rating Aluminum Copper Qty. Size Lugs
1
800
13 (330)
13 (330)
3
1
1000
13 (330)
13 (330)
4
1
1200
18 (457)
13 (330)
4
1
1350
18 (457)
13 (330)
4
1
1600
18 (457)
18 (457)
5
2
2000
20 (508)
20 (508)
6
2500
27 (686)
20 (508)
8
2
3000
29 (737)
27 (686)
9
2
4000
3
29 (737)
27 (686) 12
5000
29 (737) 15
4
Three-Phase Service Head
#6
#4
AWG 350 kcmil, Cu / Al

AWG 600 kcmil, Cu / Al
Single-Phase Service Head
Standard Stubs
Sentron Busway standard top-mounted
stubs can be shipped to the job site factory installed in Siemens switchboards,
switchgear and MCCs. Refer to next
page for dimensional details.
Busway Systems
10
186

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Switchboard, Switchgear, Motor Control Center Stubs

Standard top-mounted Sentron Busway
stubs can ship completely installed in
Siemens switchboards, switchgear, and
motor control centers.
Internal Ground Bus Drilling Detail
CL
Table 10.12
Aluminum Copper
Ref. Bar W
Amperes Inches (mm)
Amperes
1.75 (44.4)
225 800
225 600
2.25 (57.2)
1000
2.38 (60.4)
800
2.88 (73.2)
1200
3.25 ( 82.6)
1000
3.50 (88.9)
1350
4.38 (111.3)
1200
4.50 (114.3)
1600
5.38 (136.7)
1350
6.00 (152.4)
2000
6.50 (165.1)
1600
8.50 (215.9)
2500
8.75 (222.3)
2000
4.75 (120.7)
3000
5.63 (143.0)
2500
6.50 (165.1)
4000
6.75 (171.5)
3000
8.50 (215.9)
5000
4000
9.00 (228.6)
.059"
1.50 mm
.059"
1.50 mm
Fig.
No.
2.00"
50.0 mm
0.75"
19.05 mm
1.25"
31.75 mm
For 1.75", 2.25",
and 2.38" Bars
For 2.58" and

Larger Bars
All slots (51 are

.44" (11.2 mm) x
.60" (22.4 mm)
G
8.00"
203 mm
Ref.
CL
Joint
Stack
CL
Joint
Stack
8.00"
203 mm
Ref.
2
.19"
5 mm
CL
Case and Bars
One Bar Per Pole
Figure 1
CL
Case and Bars
Two Bars Per Pole
Figure 2
Flanged End Bus Bar Drilling Pattern

(NEMA)
(Same pattern for 2 bus bars per pole.)
1.75"
44.5 mm
.563 Dis. Typ.
14.30 mm
.88"
22.4 mm
CL
1.75"
1.75"
44.5 mm 44.5 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
CL
CL
.88"
22.4 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
CL
1.75"
44.5 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
1.75"
44.5 mm
CL
1.75"
44.5 mm
.60"
16.0 mm
W
For 1.75", 2.25", For 3.25", 3.50",

2.78", and 2.38" 4.38", 4.50", and
Bars
6.75" Bars
For 5.38", 5.63",

6.00", 6.50", and
6.75" Bars
W
For 8.50" and
8.75" Bars
10
For 9.00" Bars
Busway Systems
Note: See Table 10.13 (next page) for W dimensions
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
187
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Expansion Fittings and Reducers

Building Expansion Fitting
Expansion sections for Sebtron Busway
contain a sliding expansion enclosure that
contains flexible connectors. A 2 in. (51
mm) expansion can be accommodated.
This joint is required when a busway
crosses an expansion joint in a building or
on long straight runs where:
a) no offsets or elbows are included
b) both ends are held fixed, or in a permanent position
Table 10.14
Ampere
Rating
Expansion Fitting
A Dimensions in Inches (mm)
Aluminum
Copper
225
13 (330)
13 (330)
400
13 (330)
13 (330)
600
13 (330)
13 (330)
800
13 (330)
13 (330)
1000
13 (330)
13 (330)
1200
18 (457)
13 (330)
1350
18 (457)
13 (330)
1600
18 (457)
18 (457)
2000
18 (457)
18 (457)
2500
23 (584)
18 (457)
3000
23 (584)
23 (584)
4000
25 (635)
23 (584)
5000
25 (635)
Fused Reducer
The National Electrical Code, Article 36411, entitled Reduction in Ampacity Size
of Busway, requires overcurrent protection where busways are reduced in
ampacity. The exception is for industrial
applications only. Omission of overcurrent protection shall be permitted at
points where busways are reduced in
ampacity, provided that the length of the
busway having smaller ampacity does
not exceed 50 ft. (15.2 meters), and has
an ampacity of at least 1/3 rating or setting of the overcurrent device next back
on the line, and provided that such
busway is free from contact with combustible material.
Optional: Available with Non-Fused
reducer busway fittings.
Note: Expansion fitting allows for

2 in. (51 mm) expansion.
See Table 10.14 for Dimension A
Available in IP 43 and IP 54 only
Note: See Table 10.15 for Dimension A & B
Table 10.15
Ampere
Rating
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
Fused Reducer
Aluminum
B
A
4.5 (114)
11.4 (289)
4.5 (114)
12.5 (318)
4.5 (114)
13.5 (343)
4.5 (114)
14.6 (372)
4.5 (114)
16.9 (429)
9.5 (241)
24.6 (625)
9.5 (241)
26.8 (681)
9.5 (241)
31.3 (795)
Copper
A
10.4 (264)
11.0 (280)
11.6 (296)
12.6 (321)
14.1 (359)
16.6 (423)
22.8 (579)
26.3 (668)
30.3 (770)
B
4.5 (114)
4.5 (114)
4.5 (114)
4.5 (114)
4.5 (114)
4.5 (114)
9.5 (241)
9.5 (241)
9.5 (241)
10
Busway Systems
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
189
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Roof, Ceiling, Wall and Floor Flanges

Roof Flange
Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Flanges

These are designed to close off the area
around the busway as it passes through
a wall, ceiling, or floor. The flange is not
intended to provide an airtight seal
around the busway. The installer will be
responsible for any additional caulking or
sealing to meet local codes.
Cutout Information and Dimensions
0.375 0.625
9.5 16 mm Slot
Typ
A
B
A /2
B/2
5 in.
127 mm
Roof flanges provide a watertight seal

when IP65 / 66 (outdoor) rated busway
enters through a roof. For pitched roofs,
the pitch or angle of the roof must be
given and also shown on the contractor
drawings.
CL
Ampere
Rating
Aluminum
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Busway Systems
10
190
Table 10.17
Roof Flange
Copper
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
Dimensions in
Inches (mm)
A
B
12 (305)
18 (457)
16 (406)
22 (559)
20.5 (521)
26.5 (673)
25 (635)
31 (787)
Ampere
Rating
Aluminum
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
Copper
225
400
600
800
1000
1200
1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
4000
5000
7 in.
178 mm
Opening
Cutout
0.63 in.
5.9 mm
0.63 in.
5.9 mm
Table 10.16
3.5 in.
89 mm
10 in.
254 mm
3.25 in.
82.6 mm
Cutout Dimensions
Center Slots Required

Only For Busway With
Two Bars Per Hole
End Closure

A
B
Flange
Cutout
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
11 (279)
12 (305)
13 (330)
14 (356)
15 (381)
17 (432)
20 (508)
22 (559)
26 (660)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
7 (178)
8 (203)
9 ( 229)
10 (254)
11 (279)
13 (330)
16 (406)
18 (457)
22 (559)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
10 (254)
11 (279)
12 (305)
12 (305)
13 (330)
15 (381)
17 (432)
18 (457)
21 (533)
26 (660)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
6 (152)
7 (178)
8 (203)
8 (203)
9 ( 229)
11 (279)
13 (330)
14 (356)
17 (432)
22 (559)

Specification Guide
End Closure
(Joint stack and
covers not included
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
Plug-In Units
Sentron Busway plug-in units are
designed with both standard wire bending space and extended wire bending
space, and are available with Siemens
Sentron molded case circuit breakers and
Siemens type visible blade fusible
switches with built-in fuse pullers.
Sentron Busway offers the industrys first
true line of IP rated plug-in units. The
handles, in addition to the enclosures,
are water resistant and meet worldwide
water resistance standards. Third party
certification can be supplied upon
request. Sentron plug-in units come with
the following features:
A voidable cover interlock that prevents opening the cover when the
device inside is in the ON position.
A plastic molded front cover handle
assembly for ease of use and clear
visual indication of the position of the
switching device.
Color codes and international ON
and OFF, indication around the handle.
Third party witnessed IP ratings on
the plug-in units.
Provisions for padlocking and hook
stick operation.
A safety provision that will prevent the
insertion or removal of a plug in unit
when turned to the ON position.
Positive alignment that assures correct installation of the plug-in unit.
90-degree rotation of the front cover
handle to assure the handle is always
right side up, regardless of orientation
of the busway.
Extended wire bending space dimensions are shown in the dark shaded areas
of the tables below.
Table 10.23 Circuit Breaker

Bus Plugs Enclosure Only
Ampere
Rating
Busway Systems
10
15 125
ED2, ED4, ED6
70 250
FD6, FXD6
200 400
JXD2, JD6, JXD6
250 600
LD6, LXD6
500 800
MD6, MXD6
30
Maintenance
192
Table 10.24
Breaker
Type
ED6
Plugbreaker installed
Fusible Bus Plugs 250V and 600V

HP Rating
Ampere
Rating
250V
600V
1 Phase
30
60
10
100
3 Phase
7.5
1 Phase
3 Phase
10
20
15
25
50
15
30
40
75
200
30
60
50
150
400
50
125
125
350
600
75
200
200
500

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Table 10.25
Dim.
Legend
A
Dimensions
Bus Plug Dimensions
Circuit Breaker Plugs

E-Frame
F-Frame
Std.
Ext.
Std.
Ext.
8.75
9.12
9.12
8.75
(222)
(232)
(232)
(222)
J-Frame
Std.
Ext.
9.67
9.67
(246)
(246)
Fusible Switch Plugs

L-Brkr M-Brkr 30/60A Switch 100A Switch
Std.
Std.
Ext.
Std.
Ext.
Std.
11.47
15.59
8.12
8.12
8.12
8.12
(291)
(396)
(206)
(206)
(206)
(206)
200A Switch
Std.
Ext.
8.18
8.18
(208)
(208)
400A Switch
Std.
Ext.
10.53
10.53
(267)
(267)
600A Switch
Std.
11.47
(291)
8.97
(228)
8.97
(228)
10.37
(263)
10.37
(263)
16.78
(426)
16.78
(426)
15.93
(405)
17.31
(440)
12.93
(328)
12.93
(328)
14.39
(366)
14.39
(366)
17.03
(433)
17.03
(433)
26.88
(683)
26.88
(683)
25.75
(654)
13.25
(337)
19.31
(490)
26.44
(672)
37.17
(944)
37.17
(944)
15.62
(397)
20.59
(523)
23.17
(589)
31.73
(806)
37.17
(944)
16.00
(406)
24.94
(633)
28.44
(722)
17.12
(435)
23.17
(586)
29.17
(741)
39.73
(1009)
20.88
(530)
27.31
(694)
35.00
(899)
47.53
(1207)
51.62
(1311)
22.62
(575)
27.62
(702)
30.25
(768)
41.15
(1045)
47.53
(1207)
23.64
(600)
33.00
(838)
37.00
(940)
24.12
(613)
30.19
(767)
36.25
(921)
49.15
(1248)
11.06
(281)
11.06
(281)
11.43
(290)
11.43
(290)
11.98
(304)
11.98
(304)
13.78
(350)
17.90
(455)
10.43
(265)
10.43
(265)
10.43
(265)
10.43
(265)
10.49
(266)
10.49
(266)
12.84
(326)
12.84
(326)
13.78
(350)
2.71
(69)
2.71
(69)
3.56
(90)
3.56
(90)
6.78
(172)
6.78
(172)
7.00
(178)
8.38
(213)
3.55
(90)
3.55
(90)
4.91
(125)
4.91
(125)
7.03
(179)
7.03
(179)
16.85
(428)
16.85
(428)
16.82
(427)
1.26
(32)
1.26
(32)
1.81
(46)
1.81
(46)
5.00
(127)
5.00
(127)
3.93
(100)
3.93
(100)
4.38
(111)
4.38
(111)
4.48
(114)
4.48
(114)
5.00
(127)
5.00
(127)
5.03
(128)
5.03
(128)
3.93
(100)
36
(914)
36
(914)
36
(914)
36
(914)
37
(940)
39
(991)
50
(1270)
54
(1392)
36
(914)
36
(914)
36
(914)
36
(914)
36
(914)
39
(991)
44
(1118)
52
(1321)
50
(1270)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
50
(1270)
54
(1392)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
42
(1067)
44
(1118)
52
(1321)
50
(1270)
10
Busway Systems
Note: All dimensions are shown in inches and millimeters ( ). Add 1.78" (45 mm) to include height of box aux. mtg. flanges. Add .89" (23 mm) to include box aux. mtg. flange hgt.
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
193
Busway Systems
Sentron Busway
Dimensions
In-Line Disconnect Cubicle

Cubicles provide a means for mounting
switches or circuit breakers where power
enters or leaves a busway system.
Cubicles are used where bolted connections are preferred, instead of a plug-in
unit, or at ampere ratings exceeding standard plug-in unit ratings. Cubicles may
also be modified to accept kirk key interlocks, ground fault detectors, electrical
operator devices, and high technology
intelligent systems such as those compatible with the Siemens ACCESS System.
Note:Dimensions listed for cubicles are based
on standard cubicle construction using
largest ampere rating of busway connection
to the cubicle. Should a smaller rating of
busway be used (than assumed), Siemens
reserves the right to decrease the cubicle
size to optimize space requirements. Busway
can enter the back, top, bottom, or sides of
the cubicle.
Table 10.26
Description
of Unit
Fusible
Switch
Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
Digital Sentron
Series MCCBs
Power
Circuit
Breaker
Bolted
Pressure
Switch
Type of Disconnect
400600A FK Visible Blade
8001200A Vacu-Break
JXD6, JD6, LD6, MD6, ND6
PD6, RD6
SJD6, SLD6, SMD6, SND6
SPD6 1600A Frame
RL800 (Stationary)
RL800, RLF800 (Drawout)
RL1600, RL2000, RL3200, RL4000 (Stationary)
RL1600, RL2000, RLF1600 (Drawout)
800A
12002500A
3000A
4000A

A
B
C
36 (914)
28 (711)
28 (711)
36 (914)
36 (914)
32 (813)
36 (914)
28 (711)
28 (711)
36 (914)
36 (914)
32 (813)
36 (914)
28 (711)
28 (711)
36 (914)
36 (914)
32 (813)
36 (914)
32 (813)
28 (711)
48 (1219)
32 (813)
28 (711)
48 (1219)
36 (914)
32 (813)
48 (1219)
36 (914)
32 (813)
33 (838)
36 (914)
32 (813)
37 (940)
40 (1016)
32 (813)
37 (940)
40 (1016)
48 (1219)
41 (1041)
40 (1016)
48 (1219)
ACCESS-compatible.
Panelboard and
Meter Center Modules
Busway Adaptors for Risers
In riser (vertical) applications, where
Sentron Busway ascends vertically
through electrical closets, Siemens
developed a labor saving busway fitting
that integrally provides both panelboard
and meter center connections, without
having to utilize a plug-in unit to feed
wall mounted panelboards and meter
centers.
Busway Systems
10
194

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
General
Component Check List

Straight Section
Edgewise Elbow
Hanger
End Closure
10
Busway Systems
Flatwise Elbow
Bus Plug Fusible
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
197
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
General
End Tap Box
Center Tap Box
Joint Stack
Field Addable Vertical Support
Cubicle
Bus Bar Construction
Switchboard Connection
Busway Systems
10
198

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
General
Temperature Rise Curves
Aluminum Bus BarsVentilated Case Bars

Edgewise Mounted
Aluminum Bus BarsVentilated Case Bars

Flatwise Mounted
10
Busway Systems
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
199
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
General
Straight Sections
Straight section shown is flatwise mounted.
Table 10.33
Figure
1
Feeder or Plug-In Casing Sizes

Dimension
A in Inches
(mm)
Aluminum Bus Bars

Amperes
Ventilated
Edgewise Flatwise
4.50(114)
225
400
225
400
5.50 (140)
600
600
4.50 (114)
800
1000
800
1200
1350
1600
2000
1000
1200
1350
1600
2
5.50 (140)
7.50 (191)
3
9.50 (241)
2500
2000
Copper Bus Bars

Amperes
Ventilated
Non-Vent. Edgewise Flatwise
225
225
225
400
400
400
600
600
600
800
800
1000
800
1000
1200
1200
1350
1600
1350
1000
2000
1600
1350
1600
3000
2500
2000
4000
2500
3000
5000
4000
3000
2000
9.50 (241)
4000
5000
4000
3000
Mounting Position:
All references to ampere ratings in this
section are based on the assumption that
the busway is mounted in the edgewise
position so that the bars are edgewise
1350
1600
2000
3000
1200
2500
7.50 (191)
4
10 in
(254 mm)
800
1000
1200
4000
5000
6000
6500
Non-Vent.
225
400
600
10 in
(254 mm)
(
) in horizontal runs, or when the
busway is mounted in the vertical position. When horizontal busways are
mounted so that the bus bars are flatwise ( ) lower ratings will apply.
10 in
(254 mm)
Center Line of Plug-In

Openings Back Side
3 in.
(76 mm)
3 in.
(76 mm)
Back Edge of
Plug-In Door
3 in.
(76 mm)
3 in.
(76 mm)
3 in.
(76 mm)
2.5 in.
(64 mm)
20.63 in.
(524 mm)
10
Busway Systems
10.5 in.
(267 mm)
204
24 in.
(610 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
120 in.
(3048 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
13.5 in.
(343 mm)

Specification Guide
All shown are edgewise mounted.
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
General
Plug-In Openings
12 in.
(305 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
4.5 in.
(114 mm)
Door stop
Door stop
Plug-in opening
Embossed bump (holds
door in closed position)
CL
Center line of
plug-in opening
Lanced indents for bus

support insulators
Door stop
Door stop
Slot for bus plug indexing guide finger insures correct

sequence of plug installation and removal
CL
24 in.
(610 mm)
4.5 in.
(114 mm)
4.5 in.
(114 mm)
CL
7.5 in.
(191 mm)
Plug-in
insulator
(Phase
barriers)
Bus bars
Plug-in
cover in
closed position
Plug-in cover
in open position
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
10
Opening in cover for bus plug
interlock. Arm in plug prevents
its removal or insertion while
device is in "on" position
Busway Systems
Lanced indent in cover,

to aid opening door
Grounding finger
opening
205
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
Dimensions
Elbows and Tees Flatwise / Edgewise

It is important to note that the dimensions shown on this page refer to elbows
with 1, 2 or 4 bars per phase, flatwise or
edgewise, and 8 bars per phase flatwise.
The standard 12 in. (305 mm) dimension

becomes 18 in. (457 mm) for 8 bars per
phase edgewise. Standard elbows do not
contain plug-in openings.
Flatwise Elbows
The flatwise LH(-3) elbow and RH(-1)
elbow are identical except that the joint
stack assembly is located on opposite
ends. The assembly is interchangeable
and can be relocated on the job to serve
either direction.
CL
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
(LH-3)
(LH-3)
(RH-1)
(RH-1)
Neutral On Bottom Side
Flatwise Elbows
Edgewise Elbows
Edgewise elbows are also furnished in
RH(-2) or LH(-4) construction to meet job
requirements. The joint stack is not interchangeable as in flatwise construction.
CL
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
(LH-4)
(LH-4)
(RH-2)
(RH-1)
Neutral On This Side
Edgewise Elbows
Tees
XL-U tees simplify branch runs of busway
from the parent feeder run or feeding
branch run. They are available edgewise or
flatwise, RH or LH. Two joint stack assemblies are provided with each tee.
The edgewise tee is housed inside a special box enclosure to provide rigidity and
shield against dirt and dust. Standard
tees do not contain plug-in openings.
It is important to note the size of the box

enclosure when laying out an edgewise
run. The table below clarifies dimensions.
Table 10.35
12 in.
(305 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
C
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
B
C
Edgewise Tees

No. of Casing
A
Bars
Size
14.0
1-Per
4.5 (114)
(356)
Pole
5.5 (140)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
2-Per
Pole
4.5 (114)
5.5 (140)
14.0
(356)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
4-Per
Pole
7.5 (191)
9.5 (241)
18.0
(457)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
8-Per
Pole
7.5 (191)
9.5 (241)
16.0
(406)
48.0
(1219)
24.0
(610)
Double-case dimensions: 36 in. (610 mm)

Note (edgewise only): Where 2 bars-per-phase are required, consult Siemens sales office.
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
Flatwise Tee
Edgewise Tee

Specification Guide
10
207
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
Dimensions
Offsets and Crosses
Table 10.36
Offset Elbows
Offsets can often be used to save space
and to solve difficult contour problems. A
single offset may be used, for example,
to replace two or more elbows and provide a more attractive, space-saving way
to bypass obstructions. Offsets may also
be used to convert an edgewise run to
flatwise, or vice versa.
CL
CL
CL
12.0
(305)
12.0
(305)
18.0
(457)
18.0
(457)
CL
CL
CL
CL
C
12 in.
(305 mm)
CL
Edge-to-Flat Offset Elbow
Edgewise Double Offset
Flatwise Double Offset
Crosses
Crosses provide two branch extensions
from a feeder run, tapping each from a
single point.
Two joint-stack assemblies are provided

with each XL-U cross. Standard crosses
do not contain plug-in openings.
Table 10.37
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
Offset Elbows

Casing Size
A
4.5 10.0
(114) (254)
5.5 10.0
12.0
(140) (254)
(305)
7.5 10.0
(191) (254)
9.5 10.0
(241) (254)
7.5 10.0
18.0
(191) (254)
(457)
9.5 10.0
(241) (254)
CL
36 in.
(914 mm)
24 in.
(610 mm)
CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
12 in.
(305 mm)
Crosses

CL
12 in.
(305 mm)
C
C
No. of
Bars
Casing
Size
1-Per
Pole
4.5 (114)
5.5 (140)
14.0
(356)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
2-Per
Pole
4.5 (114)
5.5 (140)
14.0
(356)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
4-Per
Pole
7.5 (191)
9.5 (241)
18.0
(457)
32.0
(813)
16.0
(406)
Flatwise Cross
Edgewise Cross
Busway Systems
10
208

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
Dimensions
Cable Tap Boxes

End cable tap boxes can be installed at
either end of the busway system.
aluminum or copper conductors are supplied. See Tables 10.38 and 10.39.
Table 10.38
Rating
Amperes
225
End Cable Tap Box
Lugs
Qty./
1
400
600
800
1000 1350
1600
2000
2500
3000
3500
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
11
400
600
800
2000
2500
3500
#6-350
kcmil
#4-600
kcmil
CL
End Cable Tap Box
Rating
Amperes
225
Range
#6-350
kcmil
GND Lugs
Qty.
Range
Table 10.39
Cu
B
A
12 in.
(305 mm)
Al
A
20
225
(508)
400
24
600
(609.6)
800
32
1350 (812.8)
1600
32
2500 (812.8)
B
14
(355.6)
18
(457.2)
18
(457.2)
18
(457.2)
C
8
(203.2)
12
(304.8)
16
(406.4)
18
(457.2)
D
4
(101.6)
4
(101.6)
4
(101.6)
6
(152.4)
Gutter
10
(254)
15
(381)
20
(508)
A center cable tap box consists of a

tap off joint stack assembly and an enclosure with lugs being mounted on the tap
off bars.
Center cable tap boxes are installed at any
standard joint of a busway. Therefore, the
case width and the number of bars / pole
in the case, dictate the type of center
cable tap box that is to be ordered.
The box may be reversed to provide

wiring space on the left-hand side of the
box instead of the right side. Lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors
are provided as shown in Table 10.40.
The tables on this page are set up for
only one, two, and four bars per pole
construction.
The center cable tap box for 8 bars / pole
consists of an enclosure and a busway
stub on each end. The size of this enclosure will vary with its lug requirements.
See Tables 10.40 and 10.41.
Table 10.40
Tap Box Amp.
Rating (Max.)
600
1200
2000
Center Cable Tap Box

Lug Qty.
GND
2
1
4
1
6
2
Gutter in
Inches (mm)
14 (356) min.
20 (508) min.
20 (508) min.
Notes:
lugs are #4-600 kcmil Al lugs.
GND lugs are #6-350 kcmil Al lugs.
Table 10.41
Center Cable Tap Box
Tap Box
Busway
Amp.
Ampere Rating Rating
Al
Cu
Max.
225600 225600 600
600
8002500 8003500 1200
2000
Box Dimensions
in Inches (mm)
A
B
C
24 (610) 12 (305) 18 (457)
26 (660) 12 (305) 18 (457)
32 (813) 18 (457) 18 (457)
32 (813) 18 (457) 18 (457)
9 in.
(229 mm)
7.5 in. or 9.5 in.
(192 mm) (241 mm)
Schematic Breakdown
Table 10.42
Tap Box
Capacity
CSI Section 16466
600A
48 (1219) 24 (610)
1350A
60 (1524) 36 (914)
2000A
60 (1524) 36 (914)
over 2000A Consult Factory
C
30 (762)
30 (762)
36 (914)
# 4-600
kcmil
Lugs/Pole
2
4
6

Specification Guide
12 in.
(305 mm)
30 in.
762 mm)
10
CL
Busway Systems
12 in.
(305 mm)
of box
& busway
209
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
Dimensions
Transformer Tap 3
pole maximum of 2500 amperes in copper and 2000 amperes in aluminum at

the point of the tap off. In the 8 bar per
pole busway, two joint stacks are
employed so the carrying capacity of the
tap is doubled.
either 3 or 4 pole, half or full capacity neutral. Wye taps are available for 3, 4W,
half or full capacity neutral in either a single
transformer or a three transformer bank.
It must be noted that the joint stack tap
off bars in the 2 and / or 4 bar / pole construction are limited to two 0.25 4.0 in.
(6.35 101.6 mm) copper or aluminum
bus bars per pole. This will carry a per
Standard transformer tap sections consist

of standard straight sections with transformer type tap off joint stacks and are
used for single transformers or on a
three transformer bank, either Delta or
Wye systems.
Delta taps are available for a single transformer or for a three transformer bank in
Single Transformer
Closed
End
10 in.
(254 mm)
7 in.
(178 mm)
A B C N
N C B A
3 Pole 3 4W 1/2 Neutral or 3 4W Full Neutral
3 Transformer Bank
Closed
End
C
Std. Str. Sect.
10 in.
(254 mm)
Std. Str. Sect.
Closed
End
CN
Std. Str. Sect.
Std. Str. Sect.
7 in.
(178 mm)
7 in.
(178 mm)
3 4W 1/2 Delta
3 Pole Delta
.5 in. N. Busway
(13 mm)
10 in.
(254 mm)
items & must be full neut. busway
B
Std. Str. Sect.
Closed
End
10 in.
(254 mm)
N
Std. Str. Sect.
Std. Str. Sect.
10 in.
(254 mm)
Std. Str. Sect.

7 in.
(178 mm)
7 in.
(178 mm)
3 4W 1/2 Neutral Wye
Closed
End
3 4W Full Neutral Wye
10
Busway Systems
Notes:
1. Use standard length straight sections, preferably 36 in. (914 mm), 48 in. (1219 mm), or 60 in. (1524 mm) between centers.
2. Sections are to be itemized.
3. Number & size of lugs should be specified.
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
211
Busway Systems
XL-U Busway
Dimensions
Wall Flanges / End Closures

Wall flanges can be mounted at any point
along a busway run by using them as
shown.
.32 in. (8mm) dia. holes
bolts for fastening
to the wall or ceiling
to be furnished by
contractor
.5 in.
(13 mm)
End closures are used to terminate

busway runs. They can be removed later
to extend the run if required.
.32 in. (8mm) dia. holesbolts for fastening
to the wall or ceiling to be furnished
by contractor
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Pc. No. "Y"
Pc. No. 103230
.24.63 in.
(626 mm)
Pc. No. "X"

Pc. No. 103231
Pc. No. "X"
.5 in.
(13 mm)
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Table 10.44
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Edgewise Flange
Case Size
4.5 10 (114 254)
5.5 10 (140 254)
7.5 10 (191 254)
9.5 10 (241 254)
A
8.5 (216)
9.5 (241)
11.5 (292)
13.5 (343)
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Table 10.45
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Table 10.46
.5 in.
(13 mm)
Flatwise Flange
Case Size
7.5 20.6 (191 523)

9.5 20.6 (241 523)
11.5 (292)
13.5 (343)
End Closure
Case Size
4.5 10 (114 254)
5.5 10 (140 254)
7.5 10 (191 254)
9.5 10 (241 254)
7.5 21 (191 533)
9.5 21 (241 533)
Hangers
Standard clamp-type hangers are used
for horizontal busway suspension. The
pre-drilled hangers bolt together at the
corners and can be slid over section
lengths. It not necessary to bolt or screw
the hanger to casings.
To speed installation, Hangfast Adaptors

are recommended for use with the hangers. When duct is hung flatwise from
rods or straps, one Hangfast Adaptor per
hanger is sufficient. Edgewise mounting,
particularly in the higher ampere busway,
.75 in.
(19 mm)
C
D
Table 10.47
.52 in.
(13 mm) Dia.
.41 in. Dia.

(10 mm)
3.8 in.
(99 mm)
1.63 in.
(41 mm)
AB
.63 in.
(16 mm)
12 GA. Steel
may require two-point suspension from

each hanger to provide increased rigidity.
Occasional sway-bracing is also recommended.
XL-U runs can be mounted on 10-foot
centers.
.38 in.
(10 mm) R
Hangers

Casing
Size
A
B
4.5 10 7.75 (197) 6.3 (160)
5.5 10 8.75 (222) 7.3 (185)
7.5 10 10.75 (273) 9.3 (236)
9.5 10 12.75 (324) 11.3 (287)
7.5 21 10.75 (273) 9.3 (236)
9.5 21 12.75 (324) 11.3 (287)
C
13.25 (337)
13.25 (337)
13.25 (337)
13.25 (337)
24.00 (610)
24.00 (610)
D
11.8 (300)
11.8 (300)
11.8 (300)
11.8 (300)
22.5 (572)
22.5 (572)
10
Busway Systems
CSI Section 16466

Specification Guide
213
Busway Systems
XJ-L Busway
Siemens XJ-L busway was designed to
provide an infinite variety of indoor electrical power distribution systems. A complete selection of modular sections and
system-tailored hardware make it suitable
for diverse applications.
Safety-engineered XJ-L busway effectively
meets the needs of these applications
from interlock fingers to prevent incorrect
attachment, dead-front construction with
receptacle-type plug-in openings to permit
power tap-off without power shutdown.
General
way components are integrally compatible and can be relocated and re-used
without wasting parts or time.
Each XJ-L busway section and fitting is

prefabricated and self-contained for timesaving assembly. Bus bars are steel
encased, insulated, and an internal
ground bus is provided. All sections mate
end-to-end, and slide together easily.
Plug-in type outlets are spaced at 20-inch
intervals on both sides of each section,
and all outlets can be used simultaneously.
Electrically fed equipment can be installed
or moved anywhere along the busway
run without power shut-down. All bus-
Typical Applications
Computer Manufacturing
Machine Shops
Office Buildings
Laboratories
Schools and Hospitals
Note: Receptacles as shown

are not supplied.
Table 10.50
6
Ampere
Rating
100
200
CSI Section 16466
Line to Line
VD/100 ft. I x Z LL
Line to Neut.
VD/100 ft. I x Z LN
R LEG
X LEG
Z LEG
Z LL
Busway
Factor
Dist.
Load
Conc.
Load
Dist.
Load
Conc.
Load
268
85
281
486.7
95.4
2.43
4.86
1.40
2.81
166.6
96.2
188
325.7
88.7
1.65
3.3
.94
1.88
82.3
40.7
159.0
89.7
1.6
3.2
.9
1.8
91.8

Specification Guide
10
Busway Systems
100
Bus Bar
Material
0.125 0.50
(3.175 12.7) Al
0.125 0.50
(3.175 12.7) Cu
0.125 1.0 Cu
(3.175 25.4)
Microhms (10 ) Per Foot
217
Busway Systems
XJ-L Busway
Dimensions
Straight Sections / Isolated Ground

Available with either copper or aluminum
tin finished bus bars, XJ-L busway sections have 12 plug-ins per 10-foot (3048 mm)
length. Plug-ins are located in alternate
positions from side-to-side, and can be
used simultaneously.
Available in 100 or 200 ampere capacities
in 3 phase, 3 wire or 3 phase, 4 wire;
with or without internal ground, and 100
and 200 ampere isolated ground. Isolated
ground bus can be used as a second
neutral to minimize harmonic problems.
20-gauge steel casings, coated with
ANSI-61 polyester urethane powder
paint, are corrosion resistant. Each section comes with a rotating cover plate to
facilitate inspection of joints.
100 ampere 10-foot sections weigh as little
as 36 pounds (16.33 kg) and 200 ampere
sections no more than 62 pounds (28.12 kg).
Isolated Ground
Plug-in openings both sides.
TOP
2.06 in.
(52 mm)
IG
Direction of insulator end.
120 in.
(3048 mm)
4 in.
(102 mm)
13 in.
(330 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
.88 in.
(22 mm)
.13 in.
(3 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
.88 in.
(22 mm)
7 in.
(178 mm)
6.13 in.
(156 mm)
.88 in.
(22 mm)
Inspection opening
N
IG
A
B
C
Gnd.
1.44 in.
(37 mm)
Gnd.
Note: A ground, (Gnd. in diagram), is available

for all XJ-L busway. The neutral bar N is omitted on 3-pole bus. For busway with isolated
ground the isolated bus will be added above A.

System available with both ground and iosolated
ground.
A
B
Busway Systems
C
N
10 in.
(254 mm)
GRD
1.88 in.
(48 mm)
1.06 in.
(27 mm)
CL of plug-in
opening on
this side
218
Bus Bar Dimension A

Dim. B & Material in Inches (mm)
Inches
Phase Neutral
(mm)
Ground
& Isolated Gnd.
0.125 0.5 Al
0.031 1.9
Al
(3.175 12.7)
(0.794 48.26)
2.0
(50.8)
0.125 0.5 Cu
0.031 1.9
Cu
(3.175 12.7)
(0.794 48.26)
0.125 1.0 Cu
0.031 2.4
2.5
Cu
(3.175 25.4)
(0.794 60.96)
(63.5)
100 Amp Busway Can Be Supplied As:

3 3W
3 4W
3 3W W/GRD
3 4W W/GRD
3 3W W/IG
3 4W W/IG
3 3W W/GRD & IG 3 4W W/GRD &
IG (X004GIG)
GRD = Bonded Ground Bus
IG
= Isolated Ground Bus
GIG = Both Bonded and Isolated
Ground Bus
IG
10
Table 10.51
CL of plug-in
opening on
the other
side
View with front half of housing cut away to expose

insulators which also serve as plug-in openings.
Insulators are spaced on 10 in. centers.

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16466
Busway Systems
XJ-L Busway
Dimensions
Elbows
Elbows allow for turns and offsets in the busway to be made in
any direction (up, down, left, right).
Edgewise Elbows
Left Hand (-4)
Right Hand (-2)
Insulator End
Insulator End
15 in.
(381 mm)
11 in.
(279 mm)
TOP
TOP
15 in.
(381 mm)
11 in.
(279 mm)
Schematic Breakdown
Schematic Breakdown
Flatwise Elbows
Left Hand (-3)
Right Hand (-1)
15 in.
(381 mm)
15 in.
(381 mm)
TOP
TOP
11 in.
(279 mm)
Insulator end
11 in.
(279 mm)
Schematic
Breakdown
Insulator end
Schematic Breakdown
Switchboard Connections
Switchboard Connections are encased bus bar extensions used
to connect busway to switchboards.
.44 in.
(11 mm)
.22 in.
(6 mm)
.27 in. DIA.

(7 mm)
.34 in. R
(9 mm)
Isolated Ground
6 in.
(152 mm)
.34 in.
(9 mm)
FULL R.
040 R. APP.
10 in.
(254 mm)
4 in.
(102 mm)
.25 in.
(6 mm)
4 in.
(102 mm)
2.5 in.
(64 mm)
.5 in. slots
.37 in.
(9 mm) x (13 mm)
TOP
.53 in.
(14 mm)
.5 in.
(13 mm)
.5 in.
(13 mm) 1 in.
(25 mm)
1.5 in.
(38 mm)
.37 in.
(9 mm)
2 in.
(51 mm)
1 in.
(25 mm)
.69 in.
(18 mm)
.38 in. DIA.

(10 mm)
.53 in.
(14 mm)
10
Bus Bar Drilling
1.58 in.
(40 mm)
Adjustable
Support Spacer
Ground bar
connection
if required
INSULATOR END
CSI Section 16466
.37 in.
(9 mm)
CL
5 in.
(127 mm)

Specification Guide
Schematic Breakdown
219
Busway Systems
CL
9 in.
(229 mm)
Busway Systems
XJ-L Busway
Dimensions
Plug-In Outlet Cover / Wall Flange

Plug-In Outlet Cover
The accessory outlet cover is optional equipment for closing off
the plug-in openings.
Wall Flange
Wall Flanges are used to cover wall, floor or ceiling openings.
4.09 in.
(104 mm)
Note: 2 required
to make on flange
.38 in. x .5 in.

(10 mm) (13 mm)
3 Slots Required
5.13 in.
(130 mm)
5.34 in.
(136 mm)
1.5 in.
(38 mm)
.38 in. x .5 in.

(10 mm) (13 mm)
Mounting Holes
(Hardware Not Supplied)
1.5 in.
(38 mm)
B
A
Table 10.54
.28 in.
(7 mm) diameter holes
Catalog Number XOC
Wall Flange
A
B
5.062 (128.57)
2.062 (52.37)
5.562 (141.27)
2.562 (65.07)
Ampere
100
200
End Closure / Hanger

End Closure
End Closures are used to terminate busway runs. They can be
removed later to extend the run if required.
Hanger
Hangers are two-piece, bolt-together design. Two complete
hangers are furnished with each straight section and fitting.
16 Gauge Steel
Two Piece-Painted
Catalog Number XH2
A
B
.94 in.
(24 mm)
CL
CL
.28 in.
(7 mm)
.38 in. x .63 in.slot

(10 mm) (16 mm)
to accommodate screw
or drop rod
1.44 in.
(37 mm)
4 in.
(102 mm)
4.75 in.
(121 mm)
4 in.
(102 mm)
plastic hole plug
.13 in.
(3 mm)
.38 in.
(10 mm)
.56 in.
(14 mm)
.13 in.
(3 mm)
6.31 in.
(160 mm)
.31 in. R
(8 mm)
5 in.
(127 mm)
7.81 in.
(198 mm)
6.19 in.
(157 mm)
.63 in.
(16 mm)
.44 in.
(11 mm)
.66 in.
(17 mm)
.88 in.
(22 mm)
1 in.
(25 mm)
Table 10.55
Table 10.56
CSI Section 16466
Dimension A in Inches (mm)

2.06 (52)
2.56 (65)
10
.28 in.
(7 mm)
square
Hanger
End Closure
Ampere
100
200
1.25 in.
(32 mm)
Busway Systems
1.75 in.
(44 mm)
1 in.
(25 mm)
Ampere
100
200

Specification Guide

A
B
2.12 (54)
1.56 (40)
2.62 (67)
2.06 (52)
221

General
Contactors
E1 (Unfused) NEMA refers to this
unfused, magnetically-held device as a
class E1 controller. All type 97H3 (360A)
vacuum contactors are rated interrupting
capacity at up to 7200 volts, while the
90H6 (720A) vacuum contactor is rated
10kA interrupting capacity up to 5000 volts.
E2 (Fused) Contactors To meet interrupting capability required for NEMA
Class E2 controllers, the 97H3 and 90H6
contactors are provided with primary current limiting fuses in all three phases.
The resulting interrupting ratings are
shown in the Table 12.1.
Standards
The key standards applicable to medium
voltage controllers are:
NEMA ICS 3 Part 2
UL-347
NEC (Article 710)
Series 81000 controllers with vacuum
contactors comply fully with these standards, and can be provided in compliance
with specialty standards, such as the
California Code.
Vacuum Technology
Series 81000 Controllers utilizing type
97H3 or 90H6 vacuum contactors offer
extended service life and provide long
mechanical and electrical life with minimal maintenance. Arc interruption is
completely contained within vacuum
interrupters, eliminating the need for arc
chutes, blowout coils, and pole plates.
Extended Electrical Life
Since arc interruption takes place in a
sealed environment within the vacuum
interrupter, arcing times are very short.
As a result, arc erosion of the contacts is
minimal, and an operating life of 250,000
operations at rated load current is typical.
This long life is unobtainable in traditional
air magnetic designs.
Single-Phase Protection
The Siemens SAMMS-MV relay
(optional) and the type 3UA overload
relay (standard) are available in the Series
8100. Unlike conventional overload relays
provided by other manufacturers, both
SAMMS-MV and the 3UA include standard single-phase protection.
UL Listing
The Series 81000 offers a broad range of
UL listed controllers.
Power Fuses
The current limiting fuses used with the
97H3 vacuum contactors are ANSI Class
R Type FM (up to 4800 volts) and Type
Table 12.1 Series 81000 Ratings
System
Voltage
Enclosed
Continuous
Ampere
Rating
Unfused
Class E1
Fused
Class E2
Motor Horsepower Rating

(3 Phase)
Maximum
Synchronous
InducMotor
Motors
tion
Fuse
0.8 PF 1.0 PF Motors Rating
2300
2300
4000
4000
4600
4600
6900
360
720
360
720
360
720
360
5kA
10kA
5kA
10kA
5kA
10kA
8.2kA
200 MVA
200 MVA
350 MVA
350 MVA
400 MVA
400 MVA
570 MVA
1500
3000
2500
5500
2500
5500
4000
Interrupting
Capacity
Nominal
1750
3500
3000
6000
3000
6000
5000
1500
3000
2500
5500
2500
5500
4000
24R
57X
24R
57X
24R
57X
24R
Transformer
Loads
Maximum
3-Phase
kVA
Maximum
Fuse
Rating
1500
2000
2500
3500
2500
4000
1500
450E
600E
450E
600E
450E
600E
200E
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
The Siemens Series 81000 medium

voltage motor controller is a modular
design consisting of one or more contactors, each with three current limiting
fuses, all housed in a freestanding sheet
steel enclosure. The enclosure is
designed for front access, allowing the
equipment to be located against a wall or
back-to-back. Typical applications include:
Squirrel-Cage Induction Motors (nonreversing, reversing, and multi-speed)
Reduced Voltage Starters (autotransformer or reactor type)
Synchronous motors (brush or
brush-less type)
Wound Rotor Motors with or
without secondary control
Transformer Feeders
Capacitor Bank Feeders
Power Bus Feeders (Tie)
The utilization voltage range for the controllers is 2300 through 7200 volts AC.
The Siemens Series 81000 medium voltage controller allows the user to combine
vacuum contactors, latched contactors
and load break switches in one line-up.
The user can also connect directly to
Siemens GM Medium Voltage
switchgear without additional transition
sections. This provides extreme flexibility
in systems design.
Series 81000 MV Controller
A720R (over 4800 volts) rated for motor

starting duty. Class E fuses, used for
non-motor loads such as transformers
and capacitor banks, can also be provided
in Series 81000 controllers.
Siemens Advanced Motor Master
System (SAMMS-MV)
The SAMMS-MV unit is a softwareconfigured electronic motor control and
overload protection device that incorporates protection tailored to the special
characteristics of medium voltage
motors. The SAMMS-MV system
includes a microporcessor-based unit
which receives signal inputs from a set
of current transformers (either 3-1 or 13) and power input from a 12 volt auxiliary transformer. To perform certain monitoring and setup activities, a hand-held
communicator (HHC) is required. The
SAMMS-MV device is a multi-functional
system offering the following:
Advanced Motor-Protection for
Medium Voltage Motors
Pre-Programmed Control Circuits
Standardized Control Panel with
Input / Output Devices Replacing
Conventional Pushbuttons, Pilot
Lights, and Selector Switches
Diagnostics
Statistical Motor Data
Real-Time Metering
Local Display Of All Motor And
Control Circuit Data
Open Architecture Communications
Using Siemens ACCESS System.
motor voltage 6600V.
CSI Section 16920

Specification Guide
239

Enclosures
Available in a variety of styles to meet
most applications, enclosure types
include:
NEMA 1 Non-Gasketed
NEMA 1 Gasketed
NEMA 2 Drip-proof
NEMA 12 Dust-Tight
NEMA 3R Non-Walk-in
NEMA 3B Walk-in
General
External Finish is ANSI 61 light gray polyester urethane, electrostatically applied.
Special colors and finishes are optionally
available
Compartment Segregation
Each Series 81000 controller assembly
consists of three areas completely segregated from one another:
Contactor Compartment
Power Bus System (High Voltage)
Low Voltage Section
Standard vertical structures consist of

three 30 in. (762 mm) high compartments.
One, two, or three controllers (depending
on rating) may be included in one structure. When three controllers are required,
the horizontal bus (including ground bus)
is mounted in an additional top mounted
10 in. (254 mm) high bus compartment.
An optional configuration (not shown)
using two 45 in. (1143 mm) high compartments with top mounted bus is also available to comply with American Petroleum
Institute specifications.
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
240

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

General
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
Door-in-Door Construction
Low Voltage Compartment Associated with Each Controller
Low Voltage Compartment

All active starter compartment front panels are provided with a door-in-a-door
for access to the controller low voltage
area. Devices normally mounted in this
section include the SAMMS-MV 4300
Power Meter or other overload relay,
ammeter, control relays, timing relays,
pushbuttons, indicating lights, etc.
Location within this section totally isolates the devices from any source of high
voltage and allows access to these control components without interrupting
service. Terminal blocks for control

circuit wiring terminations are also
accessible in this compartment.
When extensive metering or special
protective devices are required,
the upper 30-in. (762 mm) high
compartment can be used as a
separate low voltage compartment in addition to the door-ina-door low voltage compartment associated with each individual controller.
Power Bus
All power bus is isolated behind grounded steel barriers. Automatic shutters are
provided to cover the line-side bus
stabs whenever a starter door is
opened. Horizontal bus ratings range
from 600 through 3000 amperes and
are further detailed in Table 12.2.
Vertical tap buses in each section are
rated 360, 540, or 720 amperes,
depending on the application. Insulated
bus with boots are available as options.
Table 12.2 Series 81000 Bus Ratings

Continuous
Type Bus
Amperes
Main
600
Horizontal 1000
1200
1000
1200
2000
3000
360
Vertical
540
720
600
Ground
3000A
Conductor
Size in
Inches (mm)
0.25 (6) x 3.00 (76)
0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76)
0.50 (13) x 3.00 (76)
0.25 (6) x 3.00 (76)
0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76)
2 x 0.375 (10) x 3.00 (76)
3 x 0.50 (13) x 3.00 (76)
0.25 x (6) x 1.00 (25)
0.25 (6) x 1.50 (38)
0.50 (13) x 2.00 (51)
0.25 (6) x 2.00 (51)
Conductor
Material
Aluminum
Copper
Current
Density
(Amps/in2)
800
889
800
1333
1067
889
667
1440
1440
720
1200
Main and Vertical Bus Construction (shown with

optional insulation)
Note: Direct in-line transitions to Siemens GM

5kV switchgear are available if required.
bus must be located on top of unit.
CSI Section 16920

Specification Guide
241

General
The drawout operation is a simple one-step
process. After the contactor is open (or deenergized), merely move the racking handle to the OFF position (disconnected),
open the starter door, and the contactor is
ready to be rolled out of the compartment.
Safety Interlocking
A combination of mechanical and electrical interlocks are included to:
Prevent forward and back movement
of the drawout carriage (isolation
switch), unless the contactor is deenergized or open.
Prevent the opening of the high voltage compartment door, unless the
drawout carriage (isolation switch) is
in the disconnect position.
Prevent the forward movement of the
drawout carriage (isolation switch) to
the connected position, unless the high
voltage compartment door is closed.
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
Control Power Transformers

The basic controller includes as standard
a 0.75kVA control power transformer
mounted on the drawout carriage.
Oversize ratings are available up to
3.25kVA, when mounted on the drawout
carriage.
Controller Interior Insulated Shutters Cover Line Side Stabs when Carriage is Withdrawn
Isolation Disconnect (Drawout

Mechanism)
The Series 81000 controllers use the
complete contactor (or fuse carriage
draw-out assembly for 720A controllers)
as the high voltage isolation switch, as
described in NEMA ICS 3 Part 2 Clause
7.2.C. Horizontal forward and back
movement of the drawout assembly
simultaneously opens and closes the line
and load disconnect contacts.
Control Power Transformer and CPT Fuses
242
Because both line and load terminals are

disconnected, there is no need for
grounding the load side terminals in the
open position. Non-conducting glass polyester barriers (shutters) completely isolate the stationary line terminals. The
shutter mechanism is positively driven by
the same linkage mechanism which
moves the drawout carriage from the
connected to the disconnected position.
Blown Fuse Trip Bar Option

Specification Guide
Blown Fuse Trip Option

A blown fuse trip option can be supplied
to open the contactor in the event of a
blown primary power fuse. An NC contact in the closing coil circuit opens when
any primary power fuse operates, causing the contactor to open.
Latched Contactors
A latched version of the contactor with
manual, electrical or capacitor charged
release, is available for feeder applications. This keeps the contactor closed
even when power to the coil has been
removed. A typical application is as a
transformer feeder where it is not
desired that the controller open during a
momentary loss of primary power.
Test Circuit
Each Series 81000 controller is provided
with a built-in test circuit for operation of
the contactor from a remote source of
control power and the test-run switch
is set at the test position. This circuit
will function only if the contactor is disconnected from its primary source of
power and the test-run switch is set at
the test position. It allows the maintenance and operation of the main contactor and low voltage control circuitry without requiring energizing the motor, or disconnecting any load cables.
CSI Section 16920

General
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
Siemens 3UA Overload Relay
Current Transformers and cable Termination Area
Functional Schematic
of 3UA Overload Relay
Overload Protection 3UA or ESP100

Running overcurrent (overload) protection
for the motor must also be provided
according to NEMA standards. This overload (or longtime) protection can be provided by the Siemens type 3UA (OLR)
bimetallic thermal overload relay. This 3phase adjustable relay provides inherent
single phase protection and phase unbalance protection with NEMA class 10 tripping characteristics, providing optimum
CSI Section 16920
protection for motors having acceleration times of six seconds or less and
hot allowable locked rotor times of five
seconds or more. It is equipped with an
isolated normally open contact to actuate a remote alarm in the event of an
overload trip.
For applications which require longer
acceleration times, Siemens offers the
type ESP100 state overload relay, with
class 10, 20 or 30 tripping characteristics.
For unusual applications, solid state or
switchgear type overcurrent relays are
available.
Current Transformers
Starters using conventional overload
relays are provided with current transformers mounted in the cable termination area of the controller compartment.
These are used to drive the overload

Specification Guide
relay, ammeter, or other devices which

require a current input.
CT selection takes into consideration the
burden and accuracy requirements which
are appropriate for the specified instrumentation and protective devices. The
secondary current rating is always 5
amperes. The primary current rating is
selected so that the actual secondary
current will be between 3 and 4 amperes
with the motor (or other load) operating
at full load.
Auxiliary Contacts
All contractors are supplied with two NO
and two NC auxiliary contacts available
for customer use. Extra contacts are
available through the use of the MR relay
or extra control relays.
243

Siemens Advanced Motor Master System SAMMS-MV
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
Siemens Series 81000 Medium Voltage

Controllers are available with SAMMSMV, the Siemens Advanced Motor
Master System. The SAMMS-MV unit is
a microprocessor based software configurable controller specifically designed for
motor control applications. It provides all
control logic and motor protection functions required for typical motor application. The SAMMS system eliminates the
need for separate overload relays, timers,
control relays, meters, auxiliary contacts,
pushbuttons and pilot lights.
programming the controllers microprocessor. Typical motor control devices,

such as timers, control relays, pushbuttons, and selector switches (traditionally
located in the medium voltage controller,
are replaced by SAMMS-MV software,
and pushbuttons and indicators on the
unit control panel. The SAMMS-MV controller can be programmed to provide
over 40 different motor control circuit
arrangements, and is a reliable and practical protection system for all medium
voltage motors.
Configuration
Control Units with SAMMS-MV are
equipped with current transformers, the
SAMMS-MV unit, and a hand held communicator. The SAMMS unit is powered
from the control power transformer on
the contactor. The device is mounted in
the low voltage compartment for each
starter, and provides all pushbutton and
indicator functions.
Starter Types
The SAMMS software library of more
than 40 ladder diagrams covers most
standard motor control applications.
Starter types include:
Across-the-line, non-reversing
Across-the-line, reversing
Two-speed, two-winding
Two-speed, one-winding, constant or
variable torque
Two-speed, one-winding, constant
horsepower
Reduced-voltage, autotransformer or
reactor
Table 12.3 is a listing of these standard
circuits.
For special motor control applications
not covered by the library of standard
ladder diagrams, custom diagrams can
be constructed using the SAMMS-MV
input and output devices and their associated symbols. Siemens offers an
IBM-compatible software package to
develop such custom diagrams.
Protection Functions
Overload protection (with +- 5%
accuracy)
Choice of 22 overload protection
curves
Phase loss / phase unbalance
protection
Impending overload
trip alarm
Lockout on thermal
overload trip
Undercurrent / loss of
load protection
p. 12
Mechanical jam protection
Process current (load current) alarm
Hand-held communicator for flexibility
and field changes
The SAMMS system offers programmable control logic, a design based on a
standard hardware and electronic circuit
configuration that may be modified by
General
Table 12.3 Standard Circuits for Starter Arrangements

Starter Type
Control Type
Local 2-Wire
Local 3-Wire
Local 3-Wire Remote 2-Wire
Local / Remote 2-Wire
Local / Remote 3-Wire
Local / Remote 3-Wire Electrically Interlocked
Remote 2-Wire
Remote 3-Wire
244
FVNR
FVR
2 Speed
2 Winding
2 Speed
1 Winding
Constant or
Variable Tork
Autotransformer
RVA
Reactor
RVA
2 Speed
1 Wiinding
Constant HP

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

Table 12.4
For additional technical information on

the SAMMS-MV unit, contact Siemens
and request Bulletin SG-9109.
The SAMMS-MV Device Models
SAMMS-MV is available in two models:
SAMMS-MVX and SAMMS-MVE. Each
meets the various demands of industrial
and commercial specifications and installations. Table 12.4 compares the functions of each model.
The SAMMS-MV device is designed for
critical process control where prevention
of downtime is critical. It offers motor
control and protection along with motor
diagnostic and motor-driven equipment
protection. Engineering and operating
personnel have access to important data
enabling them to optimize motor-driven
equipment capabilities, to maximize the
process system output, and to facilitate
maintenance.
SAMMS-MVX is a full function model,
applicable to all control needs, from a
simple across-the-line unit to a more
complicated reduced voltage scheme. It
includes all of the functions listed in Table
12.4. Any of the standard control circuits
listed in Table 12.3 (previous page) or a
custom circuit, may be downloaded.
SAMMS-MV Functions and Models
Function
Number Function
F0
Ambient Temperature
Control Circuit Number
F1
Size for Overload No. 1
F2
Size for Overload No. 2 (low speed)
F3
Full Load Current for OLR No. 1
F4
Full Load Current for OLR No. 2
F5
Service Factor, and Type Motor
F6
Motor Type
F6A
Overload Trip Class, and Cold Stall Time (class 2-23)
F7
Cold Stall Time
F7A
Automatic Reset
F8
Phase Unbalance
F9
Time to Restart
F10
Emergency Restart
F11
Ground Fault Protection or Warning
F12
Ground Fault Pickup Current
F12A
Timer No. 1
F13
Timer No. 2
F14
Motor Current
F15
Last Trip Current
F16
Percent Unbalance Current
F17
Total Elapsed Run-Time on Motor
F18
Total Number of Motor Starts
F19
Number of Overload Trips
F20
Reset Motor Data
F21
Set Process Current Warning
F22
Jam Protection
F23
Jam Pickup Current
F23A
Loss of Load Protection or Warning
F24
Loss of Load Pickup Current
F24A
Motor Winding Temperature as % of Full Load Temp.
F25
Baud Rate
F26
F27
Address
CSI Section 16920
Model
SAMMS-MVX
SAMMS-MVE
SAMMS-MVE is a model of SAMMSMV

tailored to across-the-line (FVNR) applications. It provides all of the protective
functions of the SAMMS-MVX device,
except that it has no jam protection
(F23), loss of load protection / alarm
(F24), or process current warning (F22)
functions. Functions F3 and F5 associated with two-speed applications are not
available. No provision for automatic
reset (F8) is provided. SAMMS-MVE
accepts one remote input, and provides
one output to actuate a single contactor.
An alarm contact is not available with
SAMMS MVE.
In addition to the standard features in the
two models, all SAMMS-MV controllers
have the following options available:
Customizing Software. An IBM-compatible application is available that
allows the customer to develop customized control circuit logic, or to pick
any standard control circuits that are
pre-programmed.
ACCESS. The SAMMS-MV unit can
be ordered ready for connection to a
Siemens ACCESS data communication system. This open architecture
network allows remote control and
monitoring of the motors from a centralized point. All information available
from SAMMS (such as diagnostics,
statistical data, real time metering and
controller status) can be communicated to a central host computer or other
devices.
For a thorough discussion of Siemens
ACCESS system, see Section 1.

Specification Guide
245
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
Diagnostics
The SAMMS-MV controller provides visual diagnostics used to quickly determine
the cause of motor problems. The front
panel of the controller has eight diagnostic LEDs to indicate:
Current Phase Unbalance
Impending Overload Trip
Overload Trip
External Trip
Incomplete Sequence
Ground Fault
CPU Fault
Ready (Control Power Status)
In addition, the SAMMS-MV device can
provide, as an option, statistical motor
data, including the total elapsed motor
running time, number of starts, and the
number of overload trips. This statistical
data is stored in the microprocessors
non-volatile memory and displayed using
the hand-held communicator. The communicator can also be used as an ammeter to display any of the three-phase
motor currents.
Time / current characteristic curves for
various conditions are shown in figures 1
through 4 on page 218.
General

General
Advanced Protection for Medium

Voltage Motors
For advanced protection of medium voltage motors, the SAMMS-MV device
uses a motor model algorithm that continually calculates the stator winding and
housing temperature as well as the rotor
temperature as a function of the motor
RMS current. The motor model compares the calculated temperature to trip
temperature values and provides a signal
that trips the motor off line when the
motor reaches a trip temperature value.
The model closely emulates the heating
and cooling of the motor windings as
well as the rotor and provides protection
against both transient and steady state
overload conditions.
CSI Section 16920
Medium Voltage
Controllers
Overload Protection
The SAMMS-MV device offers more
accurate motor protection than traditional
thermal overload and most electronic
motor protection devices. This prolongs
motor life by eliminating nuisance tripping for multiple restarts, and allowing
for proper cool down time when the
motor winding temperature or rotor temperature reaches a critically high value.
Medium-voltage motors are rotor limited
under locked rotor conditions, and stator
limited under running overload conditions. Additionally, the type of motor construction affects the thermal behavior of
the rotor. For example, open drip-proof
motors have significantly shorter cold
stall times than totally enclosed fancooled motors. The motor protection
algorithm in the SAMMS-MV device is
designed specifically to provide rotor protection based on the type of motor construction, and to differentiate between a
stalled rotor and a rotor accelerating to
running speed.
The motor overload protection function
is based on calculating the motors
winding, housing, and rotor temperatures. These temperatures are compared to the allowable temperature limits for the motors winding, housing, and
rotor. On the basis of this comparison,
the SAMMS-MV device either stops the
motor or allows it to run.
For example, consider the motor winding
and rotor temperature rises illustrated in
Figure 5. The motor starts for 5 seconds
12
Figure 5. Rotor and Winding Temperature

During 10 Second Motor Stall
Figure 6. ODP Motor Thermal

Signature
and runs for a period of 2200 seconds.

Then, the motor is subjected to a running
overload condition that raises the winding
temperature to the maximum allowable
winding temperature rise resulting in an
overload trip. At this temperature, the
motor cannot start until the motor winding temperature cools down to the fullload temperature. The motor can then
start and run at full-load current. Figure 6
depicts the temperature rise in the rotor
and stator winding during a 10 second
stall for an ODP motor. In this case, the
rotor temperature rises at a rate faster
than the winding temperature, and reaches the maximum allowable value resulting in a trip. In order to prevent damage
to the motor, SAMMS-MV will not allow
the motor to start until the winding and
the rotor temperature cools down to the
full load temperature or less.
In the motor model, the greatest of the
root mean square (RMS) current values
for the motor phases is converted into a
heat-like quantity. This is done by a mathematical function that depends on the
ratio of the RMS current to the full-load
current set for the motor. The function is
based not only on ideal overload characteristics, but also on empirical motor
data. The heat-like quantity is analogous
to an input source of current to the electric-circuit analog. The exact values of the
various elements in the circuit depend, in
some case, on nameplate data entered
for the particular motor being protected.
Unlike the method of protection in conventional overload relays, the motor
model is general enough to protect many
classes of motors, yet sophisticated
enough to offer customized protection to
particular motors. To customize protection of the motor, the user need only indicate the following nameplate data:
Full-load current setting (F4)
Service factor (F6)
Type of motor construction (Open Drip
Proof (ODP) or Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled (EFC) (F6)
Cold stall time, if available (F7)
Motor ambient temperature (FO)

Specification Guide
247

Fuse Applications
Technical
Fuse Selection Guide
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
Fuse Selection Guide for Types FM, A500, and A720R Fuses for Siemens Series 81000 Controller with Type 3UA Overload Relay
(NEMA Class 10). Based on Maximum Motor Accelerating Time of 10 Seconds.
Motor Acceleration Times
Note: Motors with acceleration times

falling below the applicable fuse curve
are permitted 2 consecutive starts as
follows:
A)
B)
C)
One Start from Ambient

A Coast to Stop
A Second Start
Maximum Allowable Motor Acceleration TImes for Types FM, A500, and A720R Fuses
250

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

Dimensions and Weights
Table 12.9
Dimensions
Series 81000 Dimensions and Weights
Controller
Type
Induction
Full Voltage
Non-Reversing
(XLF)
Induction
Reduced Voltage-Reactor
Non-Reversing
(RVRF)
7kV 360A
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
7kV 360A
3
Induction
Full Voltage
Reversing
(XRF)
Sychronous
Full Voltage
Non-Reversing
(XLFS)
Sychronous
Reduced Voltage-Autotransformer
Non-Reversing
(RVASF)
Induction
Full Voltage
2-Speed, 2-Winding
(2S2WF)
Induction
Full Voltage
2-Speed, 1-Winding
(2S1WF)
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
7kV 360A
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
5kV 360A
3
7kV 360A
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
7kV 360A
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
72
(1829)
7kV 720A
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
7kV 360A
5kV
LBS-unfused 600A or 1200A
LBS-600A fused or LBS-1200A fused (to 450E) 7kV
5kV
LBS-1200A fused (to 1100E)
7kV
5kV
Incoming Line
Main Lugs Only
7kV
Latched Contactor
7kV 360A
5kV 720A
60/72
(1524/1829)
96/108
(2438/2743)
72/96/108
(1829/2438/2743)
60/72
(1524/1829)
96/108
(2438/2743)
72/96/108
(1829/2438/2743)
36
(914)
72
(1829)
36
(914)
90
36
(2286) 60/72
(914)
(1524/1829)
72/84
(2438/2743)
72/84
(2438/2743)
84/108
(1524/1829)
132/144
(3353/3658)
132/144
(3353/3658)
36
(914)
72
(1829)
72
(1829)
36
(914)
5kV 360A
5kV 720A
36
(914)
1
36
(914)
90
(2286)
72
(1829)
18/24/36
(357/610/914)
36
(914)
Approx. Shipping
Weight With Contactors
in lbs. (kg)
Layout
Arrangement
Enclosure
Figure
Non-Walk-in NEMA
NEMA
(See Next
1 or 12
3R
2 Pages)
1400 (636)
1600 (727)
1
42
42
1600 (727)
1800 (818)
2
(1067)
(1067)
1500 (682)
1700 (773)
3
78
78
4000/6800
4400/7200
4
(1981)
(1981)
(1818/3090)
(2000/3273)
114
120
7400/8800
7800/9200
5
(2896)
(3048)
(3364/4000)
(3545/4182)
78 / 114
120
4600/7400
5000/7800
6
(1981 / 2896) (3048)
(2091/3364)
(2273/3545)
78
78
4200/7000
4600/7400
7
(1981)
(1981)
(1909/3182)
(2091/3364)
114
120
7600/9000
8200/9600
8
(2896)
(3048)
(3455/4091)
(3727/4364)
78 / 114
120
4800/7600
5400/8200
9
(1981 / 2896) (3048)
(2182/3455)
(2455/3727)
42
42
1800 (818)
2000 (909)
10
(1067)
(1067)
78
78
3200 (1445)
3600 (1636)
11
(1981)
(1981)
42
42
2000 (909)
2200 (1000)
12
(1067)
(1067)
78
78
2000 (909)
2400 (1091)
13
(1981)
(1981)
78/114
78/120
2200 (1000)
2600 (1182)
14
(1981/2896)
(1981/3048)
78/114
78/120
2100 (955)
2500 (1136)
15
(1981/2896)
(1981/3048)
114
120
5100/7900
5700/8500
16
(2896)
(3048)
(2318/3591)
(2591/3864)
150
156
8500/9900
9300/10700
17
(3810)
(3962)
(3864/4500)
(4227/4864)
150
156
5700/8500
6500/9300
18
(3810)
(3962)
(2591/3864)
(2955/4227)
42
42
1800 (818)
2000 (909)
19
(1067)
(1067)
78
78
3200 (1455)
3600 (1636)
20
(1981)
(1981)
78
78
3000 (1364)
3400 (1545)
21
(1981)
(1981)
42
42
2000 (909)
2200 (1000)
22
(1067)
(1067)
23
78
78
3300
(1500)
3700
(1682)
24
(1981)
(1981)
1400 (636)
1600 (727)
1
1600 (727)
1800 (818)
2
42
42
1500 (682)
1700 (773)
3
(1067)
(1067)
1400 (636)
1600 (727)
25
1400 (636)
1600 (727)
25
2200 (1000)
2600 (1182)
26
78
78
(1981)
(1981)
2200 (1000)
2600 (1182)
26
1400 (636)
600 (273)
27
42
42
(1067)
(1067)
1400 (636)
600 (273)
27
Note: All dimensions and weights are for estimating purposes onlynot for construction.
Indoor enclosures are 90 in. (2286 mm) high (100 in. (2540 mm) with top-mounted bus) and 36 in. (914 mm) deep.
NEMA 3R Walk-in Enclosures are 107 in. (2718 mm) high by 101 in. (2565 mm) deep.
NEMA 3R Non-Walk-in Enclosures are 100 in. (2540 mm) high by 47 in. (1194 mm) deep.
Consult Siemens
The smaller dimension is used for motors: 1250 hp max 2300V
1750 hp max 4160V
? hp max 7200V
CSI Section 16920

Specification Guide
253
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
Induction
Reduced Voltage-Autotransformer
Non-Reversing
(RVAF)
Rating
5 kV 360A
5 kV 720A
7 kV 360A
Approximate Installation Dimensions

in Inches (mm)
Enclosure
NEMA 3R
Number
NEMA 1, 1A, or 12
Walk-in
of
Contactors Height Width
Depth Width

Dimensions
Typical Layout Arrangements
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
XLF -
Across Line
Full Voltage Non-Reversing
RVRF - Reduced Voltage Reactor

RVAF - Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
XRF -
Across Line Full Voltage Levering
XLFS - Across Line Synchronous
Notes See facing page.
254

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16920

Standard Controller Components
Medium Voltage
Controllers
12
FVNR Full Voltage, Non-Reversing,

Squirrel Cage Starter
containing the following components:
1 360A 3-pole drawout contactor
3 Power current limiting fuses
1 3/4kVA control transformer with 2
primary and 1 secondary current
limiting fuses
1 Master control relay (3NO and 1
NC auxiliary contacts)
1 Start / Stop pushbutton
1 3-phase ambient compensated
thermal overload relay
1 Externally mounted overload reset
button
3 Current transformers (or 1-3)
1 Test switch and circuit
1 Contactor position indicator light
1 Drawout (racking) mechanism
FVR Full Voltage, Reversing,
1 360A pole drawout contactor
1 360A 3-pole stationary contactors
1 0.75kVA control transformer with 2
limiting fuses
1 Master control relay (3N0 and 1 NC
auxiliary contacts)
1 Forward / Off / Reverse switch
button
1 Test switch & circuit
RVATNR Reduced Voltage,

Autotransformer, Non-Reversing,
1 Auto-transformer with 50, 65 and
80% voltage taps, mounted in a 24
in. (610 mm) or 36 in. (914 mm)
wide auxiliary structure
1 Automatic transfer timing relay
limiting fuses
auxiliary contacts)
1 Incomplete sequence relay
button
RVPRNR Reduced Voltage Primary
Reactor, Non-Reversing, Squirrel
Cage Starter
1 360A 3-pole stationary contactor
1 Primary reactor with 50, 65 and
80% voltage taps, mounted in a 24
in. (610 mm) or 36 in. (914 mm)
wide auxiliary structure
limiting fuses
1 Master control relay (3N0 and1 NC
auxiliary contacts)
3-phase ambient compensated
button
1 Test switch 8 circuit
Application
limiting fuses
auxiliary contacts)
1 Close pushbutton
1 Open pushbutton
1 Overcurrent relay, 3 phase
1 Manual trip external operator button
FVSNR Full Voltage, Synchronous
(Brush Type), Non-Reversing Starter
limiting fuses
1 Master control relay (3N0 and 3NC
auxiliary contacts)
3 Current transformers (or l-30)
1 AC ammeter
1 DC ammeter
1 Simoreg & electromech. RLYS or
SPM
1 Field exciter
FVMLNR Full Voltage,

Mechanically Latched, Electrically
Tripped, Non-Reversing Controller,
Fused
1 360A 3-pole drawout latched contactor
5 kV Synchronous Controller
256
Components which are functionally replaced when

SAMMS-MV is used.

Specification Guide
5 kV Synchronous Controller (doors open)
CSI Section 16920

Standard Controller Component
RVSATNR Reduced Voltage,
Synchronous (Brush Type),
Autotransformer, Non-Reversing
Starter
1 Auto-transformer with 50, 65 and
80% voltage taps
limiting fuses
1 AC ammeter
1 DC ammeter
1 Field exciter
FVSNR Full Voltage, Brushless

Synchronous, Non-Reversing Starter
1 Control transformer (sized per
exciter rating), with 2 primary and
1 secondary current limiting fuses
1 Externally operated overload reset
button
1 DC (rectified single-phase) power
supply
1 Variable for exciter-field adjustment
1 Power factor relay (pullout protection)
1 AC ammeter (optional)
1 DC ammeter (optional)
1 Exciter field application timing relay
Load Cables
Top Entry Bottom Entry
Lug Type _____
Power Factor Correction Capacitors

Size:___________________________
AM VM AMS VMS
Other:__________________________
Blown-Fuse Trip Bar
Components which are functionally replaced when

SAMMS-MV is used.
MVC Specifications Checklist

Enclosure
NEMA 1
NEMA 1 Gasketed
NEMA 2
NEMA 12
NEMA 3R Walk-In
Non-Walk-In
Power Supply
2300V 4160V Other
_____Hz, _____Phase, _____Wire
Incoming Feeders
Cable Size_____, # Per Phase _____
Top Entry Bottom Entry
Shielded Non-Shielded
Bus Transition or Bus Duct
Lug Type __________________
Main Disconnect
Type _____
Rating _____
Fused
Non-Fused
None Required
Bus
Horizontal Main Bus Amps:
600 1000 1200
2000 3000
Material: Copper Alum.
Tin-Plated Silver-Plated
Ground Bus:
600 Amp Copper Other
None Required
CSI Section 16920
Terminal Blocks And Wiring

Fixed-Mounted Pull-Apart
Clamp-Type Screw-Type
AWM Control Wire (Standard)
SIS Control Wire
Wire-Markers: Yes No
Wires Marked At: One End
Both Ends
Adhesive Type Sleeve-Type
Optional Devices
Metering (Incoming):
VM AM WHM
AM / VM Selector Switch
Panel-Type SWBD-Type
CTS VTS
Surge Arrestor
Surge Capacitor
Other__________________
Starter Accessories:
CPT 3/4 KVA (STD) 1% KVA
2KVA 2 1/2 KVA 3 1/2 KVA
115V AC Secondary
230V AC Secondary

Specification Guide
Protective Relaying:
For Motor Overload Protection:
3UA (OLR) (STD)
Static Multifunction (specify type)
SAMMS-MV ESP 100
Other Current Relays:
Ground Fault Phase Unbalance
Open Phase / Phase Reversal
Overcurrent: Timed Inst.
Neg. Sequence Differential
Voltage Relays:
Undervoltage Phase Reversal
Phase Sequence Phase
Unbalance
Other:__________________________
Relays to Be:
Industrial Class Switchgear Class
Miscellaneous:
Pilot Lights
Red Green
Push button Selector Switch
___________________________________
___________________________________
___________________________________
257
12
Medium Voltage
Controllers
RVSPRNR Reduced Voltage,

Synchronous (Brush Type), Primary
Reactor, Non-Reversing Starter
1 360A 3-pole stationary contactor
limiting fuses
1 Primary reactor with 50, 65 and
80% voltage taps
1 AC ammeter
1 DC ammeter
1 Field exciter
Application
SIMATIC Series
General
A wide range of programmable controllers and related products are offered

for virtually any application. From basic
machine control to process control
to complex machine control and integrated manufacturing, SIMATIC programmable controllers provide state-of-the-art
solutions with proven reliability. We offer
several series of products, all that offer
unique advantages. These include:
SIMATIC S7
SIMATIC 505
SIMATIC S5
CSI Section 16470
SIMATIC S7 Product Family
SIMATIC S7-400
The S7-400 is the automation platform
for medium and high-end applications
that require the absolute maximum levels
of performance, capacity, and flexibility.
The basic design of a modular S7-400
system consists of a mounting rack,
power supply, CPU, and the necessary
I / O modules required to interface with
the various field devices. Separate
Function Modules and Communications
Processors are available and work in conjunction with the CPU to solve more
complex application problems.
The S7-400 family offers CPUs with
memory capacities from 48 Kbytes to 1.6
Mbytes, and processing speeds up to
0.08 ms / K for boolean operations. Multiprocessor configurations are available for
synchronized control solutions. The S7400 can handle up to 16,384 I / O points
with local and remote configurations, as
well as multiple PROFIBUS and Ethernet
for communication connections.
Multiple classes of CPUs with increasing
levels of performance, and a comprehensive range of modules, allow the user to
develop custom solutions for each
automation task. As tasks grow and
become more complex, the programmable control system can be upgraded with
additional I / O modules at any time.
Highly complex applications can take
advantage of multiple CPU solutions that
provide coordinated or segmented control structures.

Specification Guide
SIMATIC S7-400
14
Application areas include:

General mechanical engineering
Automotive construction
Warehousing equipment
Machine-tool construction
Process engineering
Control and instrumentation
equipment
Textile machines
Packaging machines
Special purpose machines
Programmable
Controllers
SIMATIC S7 Series
The SIMATIC S7 Series represents
the newest members of the SIMATIC
family of programmable controllers.
The SIMATIC S7 series includes a complete spectrum of Totally Integrated
Automation products, from Mini-PLCs to
Multiprocessing PLCs, networking products, and operator interfaces, all operating in a common software development
environment.
The S7-400 is the power PLC for automation tasks that require higher levels of
system performance to solve complex
application problems. The rugged modular design, capacity for easy expansion,
extensive communication capability, and
easy implementation of distributed systems, make the SIMATIC S7-400 the
ideal solution for even the most demanding automation tasks.
The S7-300 modular mini PLC system is
well-suited for low to medium complexity
automation projects. The compact modular design, custom-fit DIN rail mounting,
and wide array of system features make
the SIMATIC S7-300 a convenient and
economical solution for a variety of
automation tasks.
The STEP7 Project Management
Software provides a common platform
for system design, programming, and
maintenance tasks. This software complies with the international standard
IEC1131-3 for PLC programming. There
is also an extensive offering of optional
engineering tools that help simplify
project development and system
maintenance.
281
SIMATIC Series
SIMATIC S7-300
The compact, modular S7-300 family is
well-suited for applications of low to
medium complexity that need a versatile
automation platform.
The basic system design of an S7-300
consists of a mounting rail, power supply,
CPU, and the necessary I / O modules
required to interface with the various
field devices. Separate Function Modules
and Communication Processors are available and work in conjunction with the
CPU to solve more complex application
problems. There are several CPUs, with
memory capacities from 12 Kbytes to 48
Kbytes, and processing speeds up to 0.3
ms/K for boolean operations. The S7-300
family offers I / O capacities up to 1024
points, with both local and remote expansion available. Some models include builtin PROFIBUS-DP ports for remote I / O
connections and communication tasks.
As tasks grow and become more complex, the system can be expanded with
additional I / O modules or Function
Modules at anytime.
Programmable
Controllers
14
SIMATIC S7-200
The SIMATIC S7-200 is optimally suited
to smaller applications, with a minimum
amount of I / O, that require a complete
control solution in a minimum amount of
space.
The S7-200 is a Micro-PLC system that
consists of a CPU and I / O in one unit.
The system can be expanded with I / O
expansion modules to increase system
I / O capacity for applications with large
I / O requirements.
These powerful micro-PLCs come in several versions, ranging from models with
1K byte and 14 I / O points, to 8 Kbytes
and 40 I / O points. The performance
power of the S7-200 also enables more
complex solutions in stand-alone mode,
in networked configurations, and within
distributed control structures. The S7-200
combines the highest possible degree of
automation with the lowest level of overhead, both in installation space and system costs. The S7-200 is characterized
by:
Ease of use
Flexibility
Powerful communication
282
General
SIMATIC S7-300

Special-purpose machines
Textile machines
Packaging machines
General mechanical engineering
applications
Control systems
Machine tools
Electrical manufacturing industry
and associated trades
SIMATIC S7-200
STEP7 Micro / WIN is the simple, easyto-learn programming software package

for the S7-200 automation system.
The application area of the SIMATIC S7200 extends from replacing simple relays
and contactors, right up to more complex
automation tasks that require math calculations, data manipulation, or communication with other systems.

Specification Guide

Baling presses
Plaster and cement production
Woodworking machinery
Gate controls
Hydraulic lifts
Conveyor systems
Food and beverage industry
Remote monitoring (via modem)
Electrical installations
CSI Section 16470
SIMATIC Industrial Software
SIMATIC 505
The SIMATIC 505 family of programmable control systems combine highperformance, flexibility, and a wide range
of control options that are well suited to
medium complexity automation tasks.
High-speed sequential control combined
with advanced process control features
make this product equally at home in discrete or process applications.
The basic design of a modular SIMATIC
505 system consists of a mounting rack,
power supply, CPU, and the necessary
I / O modules required to interface with
the various field devices.
The SIMATIC 545 and 555 CPUs are
cost-effective controllers ideally suited for
applications requiring close integration of
sequential and closed-loop PID control.
CPUs with up to 1.8 Mbytes and execution speeds of up to 0.07 ms/K for
boolean operations are available.
A complete range of I / O modules is
available that includes discrete, analog,
and intelligent modules. Built-in remote
I / O ports on every CPU make system
expansion fast and easy.
CSI Section 16470
SIMATIC 505 Family
There are two programming options

available. Siemens SoftShop is a complete Windows-based package that provides many time-saving features that are
especially useful for program development or maintenance. TISOFT is an
CPUs ranging up to 384 Kbytes of memory and execution speeds of up to 0.1

ms/K for boolean operations. The S5115H and S5-115F systems provide
redundant and fail-safe system solutions
respectively.
S5-135U / S5-155U/H The S5-135U
and S5-155U programmable controllers
are intended for automation tasks that
require high levels of system performance. CPUs are available with up to
1.6 Mbyte of memory and boolean execution speeds of up to 0.18 ms/K of
boolean operations. The S5-155H systems provide a redundant solution, both
at the CPU and I / O system level.
Programming Software the SIMATIC
S5 products are programmed with STEP5
programming software, which is suitable
for both program development and maintenance. The STEP5 package operates
on MS-DOS or Windows 95.

Specification Guide
easy-to-use MS-DOS program that is

equally well-suited for program development or maintenance.
14
Programmable
Controllers
SIMATIC S5 Series
The SIMATIC S5 family of products
includes a wide range of programmable
control products suitable for a variety of
applications, from simple machine control
to complex coordinated solutions requiring fail-safe or redundant systems. Failsafe and redundant systems are designed to safely shutdown or continue
system operation respectively whenever
problems occur. These solutions are
sometimes required to protect personnel,
the environment, or equipment.
S5-95U/F, S5-100U The S5-95U is a
compact mini-PLC system that provides
an economical solution for simple
automation problems where installation
space is at a premium. The S5-95F is
similar to the S5-95U, but provides failsafe operation. The S5-100U is a modular
system that is also targeted at low-end
automation tasks.
S5-115U/H/F The S5-115U is suitable
for automation tasks that require a medium performance system. The S5-115
family is a modular design, and offers
General
SIMATIC S5 Family
283

Reference Guide
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
17
Siemens offers a complete line of

Molded Case Circuit Breakers for commercial, institutional and industrial power
distribution needs as well as OEM applications. the Sentron line of MCCBs
offers industry standard levels of interrupting capability and application flexibility
as well as a complete array of accessories.
Electrical distribution equipment is the
core of any commercial or industrial complex. It must be reliable. For this reason,
all Siemens Molded Case circuit breakers
are manufactured in facilities UL certified
to ISO 9002.
Industrial users and utilities are using
ever larger, lower-impedance transformers and spot networks to achieve greater
system reliability and efficiency. A result
of this system evolution has been a significant increase in average fault current
levels. The Sentron line of breakers
meets this challenge.
Siemens Sentron thermal magnetic circuit breakers are available in eight frames
sizes 125, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1200,
1600, and 2000 Amperes.
Siemens Sentron Sensitrip III electronic
trip circuit breakers are available in 400,
600, 800, 1200, 2000, 2500 and 3200
Ampere frame sizes.
Siemens Sentron molded case circuit
breakers can be used fully rated or in UL
Listed series combinations.
In this section, you will find:
Overview of the Sentron line
Enclosures
Accessories
Technical data
New in This Edition:

STD 3200 Amp Frame MCCB
With the STD Frame, Siemens again
extends the envelope in Molded Case
Circuit Breakers. This, the highest amperage 100%-rated Molded Case Breaker in
the industry, features Interrupting Ratings
to 150,000 Amps at 480 Volts, full function electronic trip and a broad range of
accessories in an economical MCCB
package. Use the STD in switchboard
mains and feeders and other applications
where high current rating are required,
but the 2-step stored energy functionality
of an Encased System Breaker like the
SB is not required.
General
Ammeter / Trip Indicator for

Sensitrip III
Siemens introduces the new Ammeter
and trip status indicator for Sensitrip III
breakers from SJD through SPD frames.
This device offers the capability unique in
this size breaker to record not only the
type of trip, but the date and time it
occurred. Now the commercial and light
industrial application can enjoy a level of
system information formerly reserved for
much higher function trip units and
SCADA (System Control and Data
Acquisition) systems, such as ACCESS.
Adapting Sentron Circuit Breakers
Sentron Series circuit breakers offer further application flexibility through a full
line of accessories UL Listed for field
installation, from the 100 Amp ED frame
through the 3200 Amp STD frame.
Siemens offers a wide range of individual
enclosures for protection from various
environments. Many special applications
such as combat naval ships, 50C calibration, and application on DC or 400 HZ
systems can also be addressed easily.
Internal Accessories
These accessories allow easy modification of circuit breakers, without need for
a UL-qualified assembler nor the months
of lead time required to have an accessory factory-installed. For convenience, ULListed accessories for Sentron Series circuit breakers are filed-addable, easy to
order and install.
Internal accessories include shunt trip
devices, under voltage releases, alarm
switches and auxiliary switches. Unlike
other manufacturers, whose installable
accessories are unenclosed, thus very
vulnerable to damage in handling and
application, Siemens Sentron accessories
are housed in integral polymer packages,
and their mechanisms are engineered for
very high reliability and long life.
Color Label Code
Sentron Series circuit breakers are easily
recognized by their distinctive appearance. A labeling scheme utilizes colorcoding as a visual indication of the interrupting category of each breaker. These
interrupting categories and their corresponding colors are as follows:
Standard:
Blue Label
High:
Black Label
Current Limiting:
Red Label
Siemens state-of-the-art high power

laboratory offers industry standard setting
test capability.
326

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16162

Overview
A circuit breaker is designed to open and
close a circuit by nonautomatic means,
and to open the circuit automatically on a
predetermined over-current, without
damage to itself when properly applied
within its rating. A molded case circuit
Type JXD6 400A ETI
Instantaneous Breakers
For short circuit protection of motor
and resistance welding circuits, the
instantaneous trip-only breaker is
available. This operates purely on
magnetic action for instantaneous
interruption of short circuits. It has
provision for selection of a trip setting above momentary overload levels, but assures the fastest possible
breaker tripping above the selected
tripping point. It is therefore ideally
suited for motor circuit protection in
conjunction with a motor starter containing overload relays for lower level
overloads.
CSI Section 16162
breaker is further defined by NEMA as

one which is assembled as an integral
unit in a supporting and enclosing housing of insulating materials.
Molded case circuit breakers are
designed to provide circuit protection for

low voltage distribution systems. They
can protect connected systems against
overloads, short circuits, and ground faults.
This type of breaker can

be selected for the current rating required, with
preset thermal-type overload protection, and with
adjustments on the front
of the breaker for the
magnetic trip setting on
breaker sizes 250
amperes and larger.
17
Type BL, BLH Thermal-Magnetic
Fuseless Current Limiting Breakers

These are designed with blow-apart
contacts. With this design, the two
contact arms are positioned adjacent
and parallel to each other. As the current flows through, it sets up a magnetic field around each arm. Because
the current flow in one arm is opposite
in direction to the current flow in the
other, the two magnetic fields oppose
each other, forcing the contact arms
apart. This all happens before the fault
current reaches its first peak.
Therefore, the resultant low-energy arc
that develops as the contacts open
can be extinguished quite easily by the
arc chute. As a result, the fault current
is actually interrupted in less than onehalf cycle.
The Sentron current limiting circuit
breaker limits the let-through l2t to a
value less than the l2t of a one-half
cycle wave of the symmetrical
prospective current without any
fusible elements (UL 489). Also, it fulfills the National Electric Code definition by reducing the current flowing in
a faulted circuit to a magnitude substantially less than that obtainable in
the same circuit if the device were
replaced with a solid conductor having
comparable impedance (Article 24011).
In other words, the Sentron circuit breakers differ from traditional thermal-magnetic models by extending more control
over dangerously high available fault currents without the use of fuses. Note that
the available peak current (lp) is substantially reduced to actual lp (or what the
breaker permits in the system).

Specification Guide
The actual l2t energy let-through in the

system is sharply reduced from available l2t when the current limiting
breaker interrupts the fault current.
The higher interrupting rating of current limiting breakers permits greater
latitude in electrical system design. For
example, the lower peak current (lp)
and subsequent lower energy letthrough (l2t) allow the use of smaller,
less expensive breakers downstream.
This benefit is a result of UL recognition of series-connected combinations.
Also, low l2t and lp let-through values
mean less thermal and mechanical
stress on the distribution system and
superior protection for motors and
semiconductors.
Sentron FD-Frame
327
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers

The Siemens Sentron molded case circuit breaker, the one used in the broadest range of applications, is the thermal-magnetic breaker. This type combines the thermal inverse time element
design for low level overloads, and
instantaneous magnetic action for short
circuits. Thermal-magnetic breakers are
available in all Sentron frame sizes up
to 2000 amperes.
General

Sensitrip
General
JD and LD Frames: Types SJD6, SHJDG, SCJDG, SCDG,

SHLDG, SCLDG
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
17
Sensitrip Type SLD6
Sensitrip Type SMD6
Sensitrip III Circuit Breakers

The Sentron Sensitrip III circuit breaker
family employs the same blow-open contact design used in Siemens thermalmagnetic breakers. The thermal-magnetic
trip unit has been replaced by a microprocessor solid-state trip unit which performs three functions:
sense the magnitude of current flow
in the protected circuit
determine when current becomes
excessive
send a trip signal to the breaker mechanism.
The current level of the protected circuit
is monitored by three current sensing
transformers positioned in the circuit
breaker frame (and a transformer on the
neutral if ground fault protection is implemented). Signals are sent to the solid
state circuitry where they are compared
to user-determined reference values.
When the signal values exceed the reference values, a trip signal is sent to the
breakers magnetic latch.
Sensitrip III uses rotary switches for all
adjustable settings. A simple turn of a
switch is all that is needed to change any
parameter.
Models
Sensitrip III is available in various maximum ampere ratings to cover a continuous current range from 40 through 1600
amperes. These ampere ratings are available in four variations (LI, LIG, LSI, LSIG)
to allow the combination of capabilities
most needed. The short time delay models allow some selectivity in electrical distribution systems, while the instantaneous trip models provide dependable
instantaneous tripping where needed.
Continuous Current
The continuous current (Long Time)
adjustment is used to set the maximum
current the breaker should pass without
tripping. This adjustment is especially
useful when system requirements
change. This function effectively eliminates the need to purchase an interchangeable trip and manually replace it in
the circuit breaker. The function provides
a choice of 20 to 100 percent of the continuous current rating of the Sensitrip III.
Specific ranges are provided in the chart
below. In addition, the portion of the
time-current characteristic curve which is
affected by changes in this setting is
shown on page 329.
Instantaneous Current (I)

The Instantaneous Trip function adjusts
the Sensitrip III circuit breaker to trip
instantaneously (without any intentional
delay) at various points. Instantaneous
tripping is designed for protection during
high fault conditions and the adjustable
setting allows one to accommodate a
variety of different circuits with the same
circuit breaker.
Between 2 to 40 times the continuous current setting for instantaneous tripping may
be selected. Thus, a 200 ampere SJD with
a continuous current setting of 20% (or
40A) can be adjusted for tripping instantaneously at 80, 160, 240, 320, 400, 600,
800, 1200, and 1600 amperes.
For added safety, each Sensitrip III digital
circuit breaker includes a fixed instantaneous override. This automatically prempts
the settings and trips the breaker beyond
10.5 times the breaker rating (In) for JD
and LD frames and up to 10,000 amperes
max for MD, ND and PD frames.
Table 17.1
Table 17.2
Breaker
Frame
JD
LD
MD
ND
PD
328
MD and ND Frames: Types SMDG, SHMDG, SCMDG,

SNDG, SHNDG, SCNDG, PD Frame: Types SPDG, SHPDG
Breaker
Type
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6
SND6, SHND6, SCND6
SPD6, SHPD6
Range of
Continuous
Current
Settings
40 400A
120 600A
160 800A
240 1200A
320 1600A

Specification Guide
Breaker
Frame
JD
LD
MD
ND
PD
Range of
Instantaneous
Trip
Settings
Breaker
Type
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6
SND6, SHND6, SCND6
SPD6, SHPD6
80 4,200A
240 6,300A
520 10,000A
480 10,000A
690 10,000A
CSI Section 16162

Sensitrip
General
A. Adjustable Continuous Amps Rating
Switch
All Sensitrip Ill solid state molded case
circuit breakers have an adjustable
ampere rating switch. Adjustments
made to this switch change the continuous current rating of the breaker from
20% to 100% of its maximum trip unit
rating depending on the circuit breaker
frame.
D. Adjustable Short Time Pick-Up

Switch (Optional)
Sensitrip III circuit breakers with an
adjustable short time pick-up switch
allow for selection of short time pickup in a range from 1.5 to 10 times the
setting of the maximum current rating.
E. AdjustableShortTime Delay Switch
(Optional)
Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers with an
adjustable short time pick-up switch
also contain a switch for adjustment in
time delay. The adjustable short time
delay switch allows for either of two
modes of short time delays. One range
of settings enables the breaker to be
set for fixed time delays and the other
range of settings enables the breaker
to be set for short time delays based
on l2t curves.
B. Adjustable Long Time Delay Switch

All Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers have an
adjustable long time delay switch to
allow for selection of long time delays
of fixed time intervals at six times the
setting of the adjustable continuous
amps rating switch
Type LSI
Type LI
AdjustableGround Fault Pick-UpSwitch

Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers containing the
optional equipment ground fault protection cover the ground fault pick-up range
of 20% to 70% of the circuit breaker frame
rating. The ground fault pick-up settings
also allow for one of three time delays
based on l2t curves.
For 3-phase, 4-wire systems, an external
neutral transformer is required with an
ampere rating equal to the trip unit
ampere rating.
In = Maximum circuit breaker ampere rating.

Ir = Current Rating a function of adjustment setting expressed in % of In.
Ig = Ground Fault Pick-up a function of
adjustment setting expressed in % of In.
Short-Time Function (S)

This function controls the current the circuit
breaker carries for short periods of time,
effectively permitting downstream protective devices to clear short circuits without
tripping the up-stream device (selectivity).
Up to .2 seconds of time delay is avaiable.
Since the pickup is adjustable, a wide
choice of settings is available to help meet
individual application requirements.
Choices may be made between fixed trip
times or I2t delay. Table 17.3 illustrates
pick-up ranges.
All Sensitrip III circuit breakers employ a
magnetic override circuit which limits
short-time pickup to 10.5 times In for JD
and LD frames or 10,000A for MD, ND
and PD frames.
Ground Fault Pick-up Function (G)

This function controls the level of ground
fault current at which the Sensitrip
breaker will interrupt the circuit. A wide
range of settings, from 20% to 70% In,
allows customizing the circuit breaker to
protection requirements.
Table 17.4 provides the ranges for each
Sensitrip III circuit breaker for the ground
fault pick-up function. Note that Sensitrip
III circuit breakers are all adjustable in
compliance with the National Electric
Code, Article 230, Section 95, covering
ground fault protection of service equipment. This function may act on a direct
measurement of source ground current
or the residual current on 3-phase 3-wire
or 4-wire systems.
Table 17.3
Table 17.4
Breaker
Frame
JD
LD
MD
ND
PD
Breaker
Type
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6
SND6, SHND6, SCND6
SPD6, SHPD6
CSI Section 16162
Range of
Short-Time
Pick Up
Settings
60 4000A
180 6000A
240 8000A
360 10,000A
480 10,000A
Breaker
Frame
JD
LD
MD
ND
PD
Breaker
Type
SJD6, SHJD6, SCJD6
SLD6, SHLD6, SCLD6
SMD6, SHMD6, SCMD6
SND6, SHND6, SCND6
SPD6, SHPD6
Ground Fault Time Delay Function

This function is designed to add a predetermined amount of time to the trip point
when a ground fault occurs. It is a standard feature with the ground fault pick-up
function for Sensitrip III digital circuit
breakers. The setting range of the ground
fault time delay is .10, .20, or .40 seconds. As with the short-time delay pickup function, selectively is possible using
this function.
Range of
Ground Fault
Pick Up
Settings
40 280A
60 420A
120 560A
160 840A
280 1120A

Specification Guide
17
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
C. Adjustable Instantaneous Pick-Up

Switch
Sensitrip Ill circuit breakers with an
adjustable instantaneous trip switch
allow selection of a tripping point from
related to the adjusted circuit breaker
Rating (Ir)
329

Reference Guide
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
17
Undervoltage Trip
The undervoltage trip automatically
opens a circuit breaker when voltage
drops to a value ranging between 35% to
70% of the line voltage. The operation is
instantaneous, and the circuit breaker
cannot be reclosed until the voltage
returns to 85% of line voltage.
Continuously energized, the undervoltage
trip must be operating before the circuit
breaker can be closed.
General
They are particularly useful in automated
plants where operators must be signalled
about changes in the electrical distribution system. This switch features a
closed contact when the circuit breaker is
tripped automatically. In other words, this
switch does not function when the
breaker is operated manually. Its contact
is open when the circuit breaker is reset.
Auxiliary Switch (Not Shown)
Siemens manufactures a broad line of
auxiliary switches for applications requiring remote ON and OFF indication
or electrical interlocking. Each switch
contains two contacts having a common
connection. One is open and the other
closed when the circuit breaker is open,
and vice-versa.
Padlocking and Handling Blocking Devices
External Accessories
Door-Mounted Rotary Operating Handle
Shunt Trip
The Shunt Trip opens the mechanism in
response to an externally applied voltage
signal. Siemens shunt trips include coil
clearing contacts that automatically clear
the signal circuit when the mechanism
has tripped.
Alarm Switch
Alarm switches offer provisions for immediate audio or visual indication of a tripped
breaker due to overload, short circuit,
shunt trip, or undervoltage trip conditions.
330
Max-Flex Handle Operator

Siemens Max-Flex Handle Operator
uses a single sturdy cable in place of typical rigid links. The cable is flexible, allowing the circuit breaker to be mounted
almost anywhere at any angle, on almost
any convenient surface. It works with
Siemens circuit breakers from 125 to
1200 amperes continuous current, and
can be ordered in lengths up to 20 feet
(6.1 meters).
Other External Accessories
Plug-in mounting assemblies
Mounting clips
Mounting screw kits
External operating handles
Handle blocking devices
Padlocking devices
Rear-connecting studs
Mounting plates
Filler plates
Handle extensions
Mechanical interlocks
Motor operators
Compression connectors

Specification Guide
Telemand Motor Operator
CSI Section 16162

Unusual Operating Conditions
Application
Note: The information provided on this and the next page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several variables can act on a circuit breakers performance at the same time, the data below is based less on controlled testing,
than on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment.
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
17
High Ambient Temperatures

Because standard thermal-magnetic
breakers are temperature sensitive and
calibrated for a specific ambient of 40C
(104F) (average enclosure temperature),
the presence of an ambient higher will
cause the breaker to carry less current
than its name-plate rating in other
words, causing the breaker to derate
(see Table 17.33). Similarly, the safe current carrying capacity of a circuit conductor is based upon an ambient temperature of 30C (86F) (average air temperature) and the presence of a higher ambient will reduce its safe current carrying
capacity, causing it to derate. Thus, it
can be seen from Table 17.33 that in the
presence of a fluctuating temperature, a
thermal-magnetic breaker will derate
nearly parallel with its connected circuit
conductors and maintain close circuit protection. If the application temperature
exceeds 40C (104F) and is known,
either a breaker especially calibrated for
the higher ambients or one oversized
according to Table 17.33 may be selected. It should be noted that in a case such
as this, the circuit conductors should be
oversized as well.
Siemens Sensitrip III and Type SB
Encased System Breakers are insensitive
to temperature changes. However, they
do include circuitry to protect the components from abnormally high temperatures.
Table 17.35 Temperature Derating Data for Thermal-Magnetic Breakers

Reference
Ampere
Rating at
40C (104F)
15
20
25
30
35
40
50
60
70
90
100
125
150
175
200
225
250
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1200
1400
1600
1800
2000
Relative Amperage Rating at:

25C
(77F)
17
22
28
33
39
44
55
66
77
99
110
137
165
192
220
247
275
330
385
440
550
660
770
880
990
1100
1320
1540
1760
1980
2200
50C
(122F)
13
18
23
28
30
37
46
56
65
84
94
144
136
159
182
205
235
276
325
372
468
564
658
754
828
900
1090
1304
1500
1690
1880
60C
(140F)
11
16
21
26
25
34
42
52
60
78
87
100
120
140
160
180
220
252
301
340
435
525
613
704
749
825
1000
1148
1320
1485
1650
Siemens Beaker Types
ED2
ED4
ED6
HED4
HED6
CED6
FXD6
FD6
HFD6
CFD6
QJ2
QJH2
QJ2-H
JXD2
MXD6, MD6
HMXD6
HMD6
CMD6
JXD6
JD6
HJD6
HHJD6
CJD6
NXD6, ND6
HNXD6
HND6
CND6
LXD6
LD6
HLD6
HHLD6
CLD6
PXD6, PD6
HPXD6, HPD6
CPD6
RXD6, RD6
HRXD6, HRD6
Moisture Corrosion
For atmospheres having high moisture
content and I or where fungus growth is
prevalent, a special preventive treatment
may be required. Where the air is heavily
laden with corrosive elements, breakers
made with special corrosion-resistant finishes are recommended.
Altitude
Reduced air density at altitudes greater
than 6600 ft. (2000 meters) affects the
ability for a molded case circuit breaker
to transfer heat and interrupt faults.
Therefore, circuit breakers applied at
these altitudes should have interrupting
insulation and continuous currents derated as indicated in Table 17.34.
Table 17.34 Altitude Correction
Rating
Correction Factor
Continuous
Altitude in feet (meters) Current
Voltage
6600 (and below) (2000)
1
1
8500 (2600)
0.99
0.95
13000 (4000)
0.96
0.8
Values for intermediate altitudes may be derived from

linear interpolation. See Figure 1.
350
Figure 1 Altitude Adjustment Chart

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16162
Unusual Operating Conditions (400 Hz Systems )
Cable and Bus Sizing

The cable and bus sizes to be utilized at
400 Hz are not based on standard
National Electric Codes tables for 60 Hz

application. Larger cross sections are
necessary at 400 Hz to avoid exceeding
component temperature limits. All bus
bars specified are based upon mounting
the bars in the vertical plane to allow
maximum air flow. All bus bars are
spaced at a minimum of 0.25 in. (6 mm)
apart. Mounting of bus bars in the horizontal plane will necessitate additional
drafting. Edgewise orientation of the bus
may change the maximum ratings indicated. If additional information is required
for other connections of cable or bus,
contact Siemens for information.
Application Recommendations
It is recommended that thermal indicating devices be placed on the line and
load terminals or T-connectors of the center pole. These are usually the hottest
terminals with a balanced load. A maximum temperature of 75C (35C over a
maximum ambient of 40C) would verify
the maximum rating for the particular

application. Temperature profiles taken
on these breakers can be correlated to
ensure that the hottest points within the
breaker are within the required temperature limits.
Factory Configurations
When required, molded case circuit
breakers may be factory calibrated for
400 Hz application. These breakers are
specially labeled for 400 Hz usage and
their nameplate current rating will include
the necessary derating factor. The highest Maximum Continuous Amperes
rating at 400 Hz, found in Table 17.35
approximately equals the highest specially calibrated 400 Hz nameplate ampere
rating available for a given frame size.
Contact Siemens for ordering information
on other breakers applied in 400 Hz systems.
Table 17.36 400 Hz Breakers

Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating
At 40C (104F)
60 Hz
400 Hz
Siemens
Breaker
Enclosed
Type
Open Air Open Air After Derating
15
15
12
ED2, ED4,
ED6, HED4,
20
20
16
HED6, CED6
25
25
20
30
30
24
35
35
28
40
40
32
45
43
34
50
48
38
60
57
46
60
67
54
80
76
61
90
86
69
100
95
76
110
105
84
125
119
95
70
63
50
FD6, FXD4,
HFD6, HFXD4,
80
72
58
CFD6
90
80
64
100
90
72
110
95
75
125
105
84
150
125
100
175
140
112
200
160
128
225
180
144
250
200
160
200
170
136
JXD2, JD6,
JXD6, HJD6,
225
190
152
HJXD6, HHJD6,
250
210
168
HHJXD6, CJD6
300
240
192
350
260
208
400
300
240
200
170
170
JD6, JXD6,
HJD6, HJXD6,
225
190
190
100% Rated
250
210
210
300
240
240
350
260
260
400
300
300
75C (167F)
Copper
Cable per Pole
No. of
Wire
Pieces
Size
1 pc.
#14
1 pc.
#12
1 pc.
#10
1 pc.
#10
1 pc.
#10
1 pc.
#8
1 pc.
#8
1 pc.
#8
1 pc.
#6
1 pc.
#4
1 pc.
#4
1 pc.
#3
1 pc.
#3
1 pc.
#2
1 pc.
#1
1 pc.
#4
1 pc.
#4
1 pc.
#3
1 pc.
#3
1 pc.
#2
1 pc.
#1
1 pc.
#1/0
1 pc.
#2/0
1 pc.
#3/0
1 pc.
#4/0
1 pc.
250 kcmil
1 pc.
#3/0
1 pc.
#4/0
1 pc.
250 kcmil
1 pc.
350 kcmil
1 pc.
500 kcmil
2 pcs.
#3/0
2 pcs.
#3/0
2 pcs.
#4/0
1 pc.
250 kcmil
1 pc.
350 kcmil
1 pc.
500 kcmil
2 pcs.
#3/0
Maximum Continuous Ampere Rating

At 40C (104F)
60 Hz
400 Hz
Siemens
Breaker
Enclosed
Type
Open Air Open Air After Derating
250
210
168
LD2, LXD6,
HLD6, HLXD6,
300
240
192
HHLD6,
350
260
208
HHLXD6,
400
300
240
CLD6
450
340
272
500
375
300
600
420
336
250
210
210
LD6, LXD6,
HLD6, HLXD6
300
240
240
100% Rated
350
260
260
400
300
300
450
340
340
500
375
375
600
420
420
500
400
320
MD6, MXD6,
HMD6, HMXD6,
600
430
360
CMD6
700
500
400
800
560
448
500
400
400
MD6, MXD6,
HMD6, HMXD6,
600
430
430
CMD6
700
500
500
100% Rated
800
560
560
800
560
448
ND6, NXD6,
HND6, HNXD6,
900
600
480
CND6
1000
650
520
1200
780
624
900
600
600
ND6, NXD6,
HND6, HNXD6,
1000
650
650
CND6
1200
780
780
780
624
PD6,PXD6,HPD6 1200
HPXD6, CPD6
1400
850
680
100% Rated
1600
960
768
1200
780
780
PD6, PXD6,
HPD6, HPXD6
1400
850
850
CPD6
1600
960
960
1600
960
768
RD6, RXD6,
1800
1080
864
HRD6, HRXD6
80% Rated
2000
1200
960
75C (167F)
Copper
Cable per Pole
No. of
Wire
Pieces
Size
1 pc.
250 kcmil
1 pc.
350 kcmil
1 pc.
500 kcmil
2 pcs.
#3/0
2 pcs.
#4/0
2 pcs.
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
2 pcs.
1 pc.
250 kcmil
350 kcmil
1 pc.
500 kcmil
1 pc.
2 pcs.
#3/0
2 pcs.
#4/0
2 pcs.
250 kcmil
2 pcs.
350 kcmil
2 pcs.
250 kcmil
2 pcs.
350 kcmil
3 pcs.
250 kcmil
300 kcmil
3 pcs.
2 pcs.
250 kcmil
2 pcs.
350 kcmil
250 kcmil
3 pcs.
300 kcmil
3 pcs.
300 kcmil
3 pcs.
350 kcmil
3 pcs.
400 kcmil
3 pcs.
4 pcs.
350 kcmil
3 pcs.
350 kcmil
3 pcs.
400 kcmil
4 pcs.
350 kcmil
4 pcs.
400 kcmil
4 pcs.
500 kcmil
5 pcs.
500 kcmil
4 pcs.
400 kcmil
4 pcs.
500 kcmil
5 pcs.
500 kcmil
5 pcs.
500 kcmil
5 pcs.
500 kcmil
6 pcs.
500 kcmil
The
information provided on this page is intended for reference and recommendation only. Because several variables can act on a circuit breakers performance atthe same time,
the data above is based less on controlled testing than on experience and engineering judgment. Contact Siemens for further information on special conditions and treatment.
Additional derating may be required if the ambient temperature is greater than 40C (104F).
Calculated after derating to compensate for the heating of the copper conductor, caused by the
CSI Section 16162
skin effect generated by eddy currents produced at 400/415 Hz.

Specification Guide
351
17
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Derating Required

Table 17.35 lists the maximum continuous current carrying capacity for Siemens
breakers at 400 Hz. Due to the increased
resistance of the copper sections resulting from the skin effect produced by
eddy currents at these frequencies, circuit breakers In many cases require derating. The thermal derating on these
devices is based upon 100%, threephase application in open air in a maximum of 40C (104F) with 48 in. (1219
mm) of the specified cable (75C) of bus
at the line and load side. Additional derating of not less than 20% will be required
if the circuit breaker is to be utilized in an
enclosure. Further derating may be
required if the enclosure contains other
heat generating devices or if the ambient
temperatures exceed 40C (104F).
Application

Specifications
General Specifications
Siemens molded case circuit breakers shall be provided for the protection of all electrical circuits. Other makes of molded case
circuit breakers will not be accepted until approved by this office.
All circuit breakers shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., conform to applicable requirements of NEMA Standard
Publication No. AB1 and meet appropriate classifications of Federal Specifications W C 37511/Gen.
All circuit breakers shall have a quick-make, quick-break over center toggle-type mechanism and the handle mechanism shall be
trip-free to prevent holding contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. All circuit breaker handles shall assume a
position between "ON" and "OFF" when tripped automatically. Multi-pole circuit breakers shall be common-trip such that an
overload or short circuit on any one pole will result in all poles opening simultaneously. Arc extinction is to be accomplished by
magnetic arc chutes. All ratings are to be clearly visible.
Molded Case
Circuit Breakers
17
Choose either thermal magnetic or solid state trip specifications
Thermal Magnetic Trip Specification
Solid State Trip Specification
Automatic operation of all circuit breakers shall be obtained

by means of thermal-magnetic tripping devices located in
each pole providing inverse time delay and instantaneous
circuit protection. Circuit breakers shall be calibrated to carry
100% rated current in an ambient of 40C. Circuit breakers
shall be ambient compensating in that, as the ambient temperature increases over 40C, the circuit breaker automatically
derates itself so as to better protect its associated conductor.
The instantaneous magnetic trip shall be adjustable and
accessible from the front of all circuit breakers on frame sizes
250A and above.
Solid State sensing shall measure true RMS current with capability to measure through to the 21st harmonic. Automatic
operation of all circuit breaker frames 400A and larger shall be
obtained by means of solid state tripping elements providing
inverse time delay and (instantaneous) and/or (short-time delay)
circuit protection. Continuous current rating shall be adjustable
from 20% to 100% of trip unit rating. Long-time delay and
instantaneous trip shall be adjustable. The optional short-time
pick-up trip shall have adjustable pick-up settings and three
fixed times and one l2t ramp. Circuit breaker frames 400A and
larger and where indicated on the drawings shall be 100%
equipment rated.
Integral Ground Fault Option
Main and feeder circuit breakers, as indicated on the drawings
shall be provided with integral ground fault protection. Ground
fault pick-up shall be adjustable from 20% to 70% of circuit
breaker maximum continuous current rating, but in no case
greater than 1200A. Ground fault time delay shall be adjustable
with three l2 t ramps.
Ammeter / Trip Indicator (Optional)
Solid state trip breakers shall be furnished with combination
ammeter/trip indicator units that can simultaneously display
three phase currents, and retain and display date, time and
type (overload, short circuit or ground fault) of trip for the most
recent 5 trip events.
Current Limiting Specifications (Optional)

Where indicated on the drawings, and in the panelboard and switchboard schedules, Siemens current limiting circuit breakers are to
be furnished. Current limiting circuit breakers shall limit the let-through l2 t to a value less than the l2 t of one-half cycle wave of the
symmetrical prospective current without any fusible elements when operating within its current range.
Instantaneous Only Trip Specifications (Optional)
Where indicated on the drawings and in the combination motor starter / motor control schedule, furnish instantaneous magnetic trip
only circuit breakers for motor short circuit protection. The magnetic trips shall be adjustable from the front of all these circuit breakers.
The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be as indicated in the specifications, shown on the drawings in the panelboard/
switchboard schedules; or as shown on the single line drawing. The interrupting rating of the circuit breakers shall be at least equal
to the available short circuit current at the line terminals of the circuit breaker and correspond to the UL listed integrated short circuit
current rating specified for the panelboards and switchboards.
Series Connected Combination Specifications (Optional)
Where protective devices are applied in series combination, such that the prospective available fault current exceeds the interrupting
rating (AIR) of the downstream protective devices, such combinations shall be UL recognized combinations. All electrical equipment
using these UL recognized circuit breaker combinations shall be clearly marked in accordance with NEC Section 240-83(c).
354

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16162
Residential and Commercial Products

Uni-Pak Metering System
General
A self-contained, single-phase system for

residential and small commercial applications, Siemens Uni-Pak single-phase
metering centers are products of high reliability designed to meet the service and
flexibility needs of small to medium size
projects requiring from two to six meters.
These metering centers are ideally suited
for small applications such as apartment,
professional, and commercial buildings.
Uni-Pak systems are shipped completely
assembled with hanger and mounting
bracket for fast and easy surface mounting. All units are prebussed and fitted
with standard lay-in lugs for either copper
or aluminum cable. Field-addable accessory kits are available for conversion to
NEMA lug landing pads and when
required, flushing rail kits are also available. Connections are accessible from
the front, and all compartments for
unmetered bus are barrier protected and
sealable. The ringless individual meter
socket covers can be easily removed
without disturbing the meters. Neutral
and ground bars are supplied in the bottom of the tenant compartment.
Integral Service Entrance
Compartment
Each Uni-Pak metering system has an
integral service entrance compartment
and individual branch circuit breaker provision in a separate compartment adjacent to each meter socket.
Weather-Tough Covers
Indoor / outdoor enclosures are fabricated from G-90 zinc-coated steel, finished with ANSI light gray paint applied
by an electrodeposit process. This technique imparts a tough, even coat of pigment for maximum surface protection.
Additionally, enclosures have weatherresistant covers and provisions for padlocking or wire sealing.
Insulator Bases with Grounding Straps
High impact resistant, non-tracking
meter socket insulator bases are made of
Ringless or Ring Style Covers

These covers can be removed or
replaced one at a time. Additionally, each
ringless cover incorporates a security
latch compatible with barrel locks and
other common sealing devices.
Servicing and system integrity are further
enhanced by an integral horn-type bypass
in ringless units. Unlike other systems,
the horn type bypass system minimizes
opportunities for vandalism and theft.
Both ring and ringless meter sockets
offer the convenience of individual interchangeable meter covers which satisfy
the preference or requirement of local
utility companies. Service personnel can
quickly access a specific meter socket
through its individual cover.
Separate Utility and Tenant

Compartments
Separate and barriered utility and tenant
compartments are required by electrical
utility companies. This feature adds to
the security of the overall unit and is a
great convenience both to the tenant
whose electrician has easy access to
their compartment while the utility side
remains sealed and to utility service
personnel whose compartment remains
sealed from unauthorized entry.
Additional Features
Individual split covers
UL Listed for 60 / 75C conductors.
See equipment markings for
applications
Completely self-contained mete centers
Outdoor surface mounted enclosures
AI / Cu lay-in lugs, except two-socket
units
Bottom and rear branch wiring exits.
(Neutral and ground at bottom only)
ANSI #61 light gray electrodeposited
paint on galvanized G-90 steel
Meets EUSERC specifications when
NEMA stud kit and flushing ring (if
required) field added
Note: Siemens Uni-Pak employs the QP family of plug-in circuit breakers. Refer to pp. 332335 for specific information.

Specification Guide
379
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
Short Circuit Withstand Ratings Up to

100,000A IR
Combination indoor / outdoor units are
UL Listed as service entrance equipment
with short circuit withstand ratings up to
100,000A IR. Main bus ratings are up to
800 amperes and meter sockets are
rated for 125 or 200 amperes. Breakers
for 15 to 200 amperes can be mixed in a
200 ampere system. (15 to 125 ampere
breakers require two QF3 filler plates.)
glass-reinforced polyester resin. Socket

jaws are tin-plated copper with springsteel reinforcing clips for reliable contact
pressure. Positive alignment of jaws is
assured by bus straps which are bolted in
place. By simply removing a single nut
from the front, an individual jaw can be
replaced. In addition, all line side meter
jaws are supplied with meter guides. All
sockets are designed to accommodate
field additions of fifth and sixth jaws,
manual bypass (ring style only) and insulated and isolated fifth jaws.

General / Technical
Top and Bottom

Main Feed
Two to six 125A

or 200A sockets
Ring or ringless
design
Barriered, sealable compartment for
unmetered current-carrying parts
Factory installed lay-in-lugs can be

removed and replaced by NEMA lug
landing pads, if required
Hangers and mounting bracket on back
of enclosure facilitate surface mounting
Two separate compartments provide
security and convenience to both tenant
and utility company
Residential and
Commercial Products
19
Unified Circuit Breakers

For normal 10,000A IR short circuit
capacity, use type QP or QPP breakers. For 22,000A IR applications, use
type QPH or QPPH breakers. For
42,000A IR or 65,000A IR applications,
use type HOP or HQPP breakers. For
100,000A IR applications, use Type
HQPPH breakers. All of these may be
used to protect EQlll load centers
with 10,000A IR type QP breakers.
EQ plug-in breakers have a long history of very high reliability.
Consult pp. 296 to 302 for complete
details on Types QP, QPP, QPH,
QPPH, HQP, HQPP, and HQPPH circuit breakers.
380
Knockouts sized for

maximum wire rating
Swing up U Channel
Extension for ease of wiring
Completely pre-bussed
Unmetered bus barrier
Combination indoor / outdoor
NEMA 3R enclosures
Typical Wiring Diagrams 125, 200A Sockets

Specification Guide

Dimensions
125A Socket
Table 19.9
Table 19.11
200 400A Column Design
Bus
Ampere No. of
Rating Sockets
200
2
300
3
400
4

A
28.250 (718)
37.250 (946)
46.250 (1175)
24.219
(615)
29.000
(737)
13.625
(346)
15.375
(391)
25.000
(635)
200A Socket
200 600A Side-by-Side Design
No. of
Bus
Sockets
Ampere
Rating
L
R
400
2
2
2
3
3
3
600
2
2
2
3
3
3

A
28.250 (718)
37.250 (946)
37.250 (946)
28.250 (718)
37.250 (946)
29.343
(618)
42.500
(1080)
13.625
(346)
15.250
(387)
25.000
(635)
26.594
(675)
47.000
(1194)
13.625
(346)
19.750
(502)
27.000
(692)
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
Table 19.10
400 Column Design
Bus
Ampere No. of
Rating Sockets
A
200
2
32.250 (819)
3
42.250 (1099)
Table 19.12

B
28.219
(717)
33.000
(838)
17.625
(448)
15.375
(391)
29.000
(737)
Bus
Ampere
Rating
400
600
Table 19.13
Remaining Dimensions in Inches (mm) for All
Drawings This Page
G
6.125
(156)
H
2.750
(70)
I
4.562
(116)
J
9.000
(229)
K
11.500
(292)
L
3.750
(95)
M
13.125
(333)
N
1.750
(44)
O
1.250
(32)
P
3.875
(98)
400 600A Side-by-Side Design
No. of
Sockets
L
2
3
3
2
3
3
Q
7.750
(197)
R
2
2
3
2
2
3

A
32.250 (819)
43.250 (1099)
43.250 (1099)
32.250 (819)
43.250 (1099)
43.250 (1099)
R
2.750
(70)

Specification Guide
S
1.594
(40)
28.312
(719)
50.500
(1283)
17.625
(448)
15.250
(387)
29.000
(737)
30.562
(776)
55.000
(1397)
17.625
(448)
19.750
(502)
31.250
(794)
T
3.187
(81)
U
1.750
(44)
V
2.750
(70)
W
2.281
(58)
X
7.500
(191)
381

Modular Meter Centers
The modular metering system consists

of eight basic components: main circuit
breaker modules, fusible switch modules, tap boxes, and meter modules
ranging from two-high through six-high.
Siemens metering centers are designed
for 1-phase 3-wire, 120 / 240 Volts AC
3-phase 4-wire, 120 / 208 Volts AC
or 3-phase 4-wire, 240 Volts AC delta
systems. With sockets rated 125,200

and 400 amperes, units with the same
phased cross bus can be mixed and
matched to accommodate a large and
varied range of applications.
All modules are pre-bussed and manu-
General
factured to tight specifications. Main

systems offer short circuit current protective devices can be as high as 2,000
amperes. Main cross-busses in service
entrance modules and meter modules
are rated for 1200 amperes.
These UL-Listed modular metering systems offer short circuit current ratings
up to 100,000 amperes. Additionally,
when Siemens series combination ratings are applied, lower AIR circuit breakers may be used in systems having
100,000 RMS symmetrical available.
See series-connected breakers Tables
19.31 and 19.32 on page 362.
Compact Meter Modules

Six-high 125 ampere meter modules
measure only 13.44 in. (341 mm) wide
and 7.75 in. (197 mm) deep. Three
modules side-to-side, containing eighteen meters and breakers take up
approximately 40 in. (1016 mm) of
space.
High Quality Bus
Metering bus is tin-plated aluminum for
maximum performance and economy.
All unmetered bus is barrier-protected,
and inaccessible bus connections are
welded to assure continued reliability.
Joint stack and meter base bus connections are bolted and accessible from the
front.
Residential and
Commercial Products
19
Circuit Breaker
Module
Fusible Switch
Module
Service Entrance Modules

Siemens modular metering systems
have three types of service entrance
modules:
1. Circuit Breaker: configured for both
top or bottom entry by first inverting
the module and secondly inverting
the circuit breaker. (To maintain handle in the UP position when ON.)
2. Fusible Switch: configured for both
top or bottom entry by inverting the
module. (Indoor Units Only)
For
Pull / Tap Box

Module
3. Tap Box: configured for both top and

bottom entry by inverting the tap
box. Tap boxes are generally used
when no main disconnect is required
in the line-up or whenever applictions
require cabling out of a line-up.
Additionally, Siemens offers underground pull-boxes which are used when
NEMA lug-landing pads are necessary.
Customer cabling is required to join unit
to a service entrance module.
3 in and 3 out stacks only.
Note: Siemens Modular Metering incorporates the QP family of plug-in circuit breakers. See pages 332 to 335 for detailed information.
382

Specification Guide

Joint Connector-Single-Bolt
A single-bolt connecting device joins
one module to another. Shipped with all
meter modules, this connector is an
assembly of glass-reinforced polyester
insulator disks sandwiched between
heavy-duty conductor disks; all of which
are held in alignment by a high-strength
bolt. The edges of the insulator disks
are beveled, permitting the disks to slip
easily into place when connecting one
module to another.
All that is required to join one module to
another, mechanically and electrically, is
a simple alignment maneuver and a
torque wrench. Having a yield strength
of 105,000 psi, only 35 ft. Ibs. (16 kg) of
torque are required to tighten the connector. The back plate of the connector,
which provides the grounding between
enclosures, is stop-notched to facilitate
bolt tightening. After installation, if bolt
tightening is required, it can be accomplished easily without shutting down
power.
General
Weatherproofing
Outdoor
modules
have raincaps.
Outdoor
meter
stacks
also have
tenant
breaker
covers. Neoprene gasketing is provided
around ringless meter socket openings
and between modules at cross-bus
openings. Padlock provisions are included on tenant breaker covers.
Circuit Breakers
Siemens main breakers, rated at 400
through 2000 amperes, are among the
most compact available with interrupting ratings up to 100,000 amperes. EQ,
QJ2 and JXDP branch breakers feature
thermal and magnetic trip elements and
feature isolated-pole construction, silver
alloy contacts, and high pressure,
straight-in load connectors.
125 ampere Siemens meter modules

take any combination of 15 to 125
ampere plug-in molded case breakers.
200 ampere meter modules accept type
QPP or type QP branch breakers.
Busway Connections
A tap stack can be used for direct connection from busway to a switch or
breaker module specifically designed for
such an application (special order).
Where six or fewer branch molded case
circuit breakers are to serve as multiple
main protective devices, meter modules
can be connected directly to busway. A
9 inch (229 mm) tap stack is all that is
required. See Busway page 194 for
additional details and dimensions.

Specification Guide
383
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
Commercial Meter Modules

Siemens commercial meter modules
eliminate the need for expensive metering switchboards or assembly of individual meter sockets and circuit breaker
enclosures that require a significant
amount of wire and labor.
These commercial meters are ideal for
applications such as shopping centers,
office buildings, and small commercial
buildings-which frequently require a 7jaw, 3-phase 4-wire meter socket with a
3-pole branch circuit breaker. For added
flexibility, a single-phase, 3-wire meter
socket with a P-pole branch circuit
breaker is available.
Commercial and standard meter modules may be interconnected with compatible cross-bus.

Utility and Tenant Compartments

Separate and barriered utility and tenant
compartments are required or preferred
by many electrical utility companies.
This feature adds to the security of the
overall unit. At the same time this is a
convenience to the tenant whose electrician needs easy access to his compartment while the utility side remains
sealed.
Knockouts
On outdoor units branch wiring can exit
bottom, or bottom rear, giving the
installer flexibility needed in the field.
Residential and
Commercial Products
19
Field Choice Locations

Siemens meter centers offer fieldchoice
of top or bottom neutral and ground
locations. Neutral and ground bars are
supplied in the bottom, but may be
moved to the top position. In addition,
accessory kits are available to allow
installation of neutral and ground bars in
both positions if required.
384
General
Meter Sockets
Both ring-style and ringless meter socket bases are made of high impact resistant, non-tracking, glass-reinforced polyester resin. Socket jaws are tin-plated
copper with spring-steel reinforcing
clips for reliable contact pressure.
Positive alignment of jaws is assured by
bus straps which are bolted in place. By
simply removing a single nut from the
front, an individual jaw can be replaced.
In addition, all line side meter jaws are
supplied with meter guides.
125 ampere meter module sockets are
spaced 9 in. (229 mm) vertically on center and 13.44 in. (341 mm) horizontally.
Respectively, 200 ampere sockets are
spaced 11 in. (279 mm) and 17.44 in.
(443 mm) on center. This compact
design generally allows for more sockets in less wall space.
All sockets are designed to accommodate field additions of fifth and sixth
jaws, manual bypass, and insulated and
isolated fifth jaws.
Additionally, each ringless meter has a
built-in horn-type bypass device facilitating the use of bypass cables by utility
service personnel. This feature has
proven to be a theft-resistant bypass
design.

Specification Guide
Meter Socket Covers

Designed to meet the specific needs of
utilities concerned about the safety of
personnel in high-risk environments,
individual meter socket covers either
ring or ringless, permit service personnel to quickly and safely access a specific meter socket through its individual
cover. Each meter socket has an individual branch circuit breaker provision adjacent to it.
Integral to each ringless meter socket
cover is a security latch which is barrellock compatible, providing increased
protection from vandalism, and which
also accepts all popular securing mechanisms as well.
Installation
Compact and relatively light-weight, all
modules can be lifted into place, bolted
together and wired by one person.
Bottom alignment of meter modules
allows all conduit to be cut and positioned at the same height, saving time
and money (meter mains may vary).

Technical
Wiring Diagrams
Service Entrance Modules
1-Phase, 3 Wire, Incoming
3-Phase, 4 Wire, Incoming
Meter Modules 125 and 200A
Commercial to 200A
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
3-Phase In, 3-Phase Out, Typical
400A Socket

Specification Guide
385

Dimensions
Service Entrance Modules Circuit Breaker

Table 19.15
Ampere
Rating
Phase
400
600
A
9.250
(235)
14.000
(356)
B
15.562
(395)
17.625
(448)
C
33.000
(838)
37.000
(940)
D
4.562
(116)
4.562
(116)
Remaining Dimensions for all Ratings In. (mm)

G
17.500
(445)
O
62.000
(1575)
H
24.875
(632)
P
16.250
(413)
I
17.937
(456)
Q
22.187
(564)
J
12.437
(316)
R
5.500
(140)
A
20.094
(510)
20.094
(510)
B
14.062
(357)
14.062
(357)
K
6.937
(176)
S
5.500
(140)
L
3.000
(76)
T
14.000
(356)
M
8.500
(216)
U
14.000
(356)
N
14.000
(356)
Residential and
Commercial Products
19
Table 19.16
Ampere
Rating
Phase
Table 19.14
Ampere
Rating
Phase
1, 3
1600
1
2000

A
25.031
(636)
18.906
(480)
12.500
(318)
6.125
(156)
3.000
(76)
8.500
(216)

G
17.500
(445)
O
62.000
(1575)
386
H
24.875
(632)
P
16.250
(413)
I
17.937
(456)
Q
22.187
(564)
J
12.437
(316)
R
5.500
(140)
K
6.937
(176)
S
31.500
(800)
L
3.000
(76)
T
14.000
(356)
M
8.500
(216)
U
17.500
(445)
N
14.000
(356)
800
1, 3
1000
1200
1, 3
1, 3
C
6.062
(154)
6.062
(154)
D
3.000
(76)
3.000
(76)
E
8.500
(216)
8.500
(216)
F
15.000
(381)
15.000
(381)

G
20.000
(508)
P
13.250
(337)
H
14.875
(378)
Q
4.750
(121)
I
9.937
(252)
R
5.500
(140)
J
5.000
(127)
S
15.000
(381)
1000 and 1200A = 20.0 in. (508 mm)

1000 and 1200A = 23.5 in. (597 mm)

Specification Guide
K
1.500
(38)
T
21.500
(546)
L
2.625
(67)
U
10.500
(267)
M
7.625
(194)
V
15.000
(381)
N
10.500
(267)
W
3.812
(97)
O
43.000
(1092)
X
5.437
(138)

Dimensions
Service Entrance Modules Fusible Switch

Table 19.18
Ampere
Rating
Phase
200
1, 3
G
2.250
(57)
H
3.000
(76)

A
12.000
(305)
I
8.500
(216)
B
13.000
(330)
J
33.000
(838)
C
13.500
(343)
K
16.500
(419)
D
6.000
(152)
L
1.000
(25)
E
12.000
(305)
M
2.250
(57)
F
1.000
(25)
N
12.000
(305)
Add 2 in. (51mm) to include handle.

Add 3 in. (76mm) to include handle.
Table 19.19
400
600
1, 3
800
19

A
8.500
(216)
14.500
(368)
14.500
(368)
B
12.187
(310)
18.187
(462)
18.187
(462)
C
35.500
(902)
41.500
(1054)
41.500
(1054)
Residential and
Commercial Products
Ampere
Rating
Phase
D
6.937
(176)
8.937
(227)
8.937
(227)

E
15.000
(381)
M
3.500
(89)
F
3.375
(86)
N
3.500
(89)
G
4.187
(106)
O
2.750
(70)
H
3.375
(86)
P
15.000
(381)
I
3.375
(86)
Q
16.500
(419)
J
16.000
(406)
R
15.000
(381)
K
1.500
(38)
S
3.187
(81)
L
7.500
(191)
Table 19.17
Ampere
Rating
Phase
1200
G
14.875
(378)
1, 3
H
9.937
(252)
Dimensions In Inches (mm)

A
20.094
(510)
I
5.000
(127)
B
15.000
(381)
J
1.500
(38)
K
2.625
(67)
C
18.000
(457)
D
E
15.062
23.500
(383)
(597)
L
M
N
7.625
15.000
3.187
(194)
(381)
(81)
F
50.000
(1270)
O
3.187
(81)

Specification Guide
387

Dimensions
Service Entrance Module Main Switch with Underground Box Extension

(Meets EUSERC Specifications)
Table 19.20
Ampere
Rating
Phase
400
1, 3
600
800
G
16.500
(419)
H
9.000
(229)

A
25.500
(648)
15.000
(381)
50.062
(1272)
26.296
(668)
17.906
(455)
21.250
(540)
I
4.250
(108)
J
4.375
(111)
K
10.187
(259)
L
14.094
(358)
M
33.500
(851)
N
2.000
(51)
O
4.000
(102)
Tap Box Module 800A

Table 19.21
Ampere
Rating
Phase
Residential and
Commercial Products
19
388
800
1, 3
A
12.000
(305)
G
12.000
(305)
H
4.875
(124)
I
2.750
(70)
J
1.500
(38)
O
15.500
(394)
P
12.000
(305)
Q
1.500
(38)
R
6.000
(152)

Specification Guide
B
3.375
(86)
C
13.000
(330)
D
5.312
(135)
E
3.375
(86)
F
2.625
(67)
K
6.000
(152)
L
39.000
(991)
M
24.937
(633)
N
14.812
(376)

Dimensions
Tap Box Modules

1200A
1600A
Table 19.22
Table 19.23

Ampere
Rating Phase A
B
C
D
3.375
8.250
4.125
5.500
1, 3
1200
(86)
(210)
(105)
(140)
H
8.500
(216)
P
12.000
(305)
I
4.250
(108)
Q
15.000
(381)
J
5.500
(140)
K
3.000
(76)
L
41.000
(1041)
F
13.000
(330)
M
29.500
(749)
N
19.250
(489)

Ampere
Rating Phase A
B
C
D
25.000
19.000
12.500
6.000
1, 3
1600
(635)
(483)
(318)
(152)
G
14.000
(356)
O
29.250
(743)
H
17.875
(454)
P
19.000
(483)
I
12.500
(318)
Q
16.500
(419)

Specification Guide
J
7.000
(178)
R
13.000
(330)
K
13.000
(330)
L
8.500
(216)
E
8.500
(216)
F
3.000
(76)
M
3.000
(76)
N
41.750
(1060)
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
G
3.250
(83)
O
16.500
(419)
E
3.000
(76)
389

Dimensions
Meter Modules
125A
200A
Table 19.27
Table 19.28
32.406 (823)
41.406 (1052)
50.406 (1280)
59.406 (1509)
68.406 (1738)
No. of Sockets
2
3
4
5
6
K
7.844
(199)
S
4.953
(126)
L
4.219
(107)
T
2.343
(60)
M
9.062
(230)
U
5.094
(129)
N
9.000
(229)
V
7.500
(191)
O
4.656
(118)
P
4.343
(110)
Q
11.500
(292)
R
2.203
(56)

36.406 (925)
47.406 (1204)
58.406 (1484)
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Common to All Socket

Configurations
J
7.844
(199)
R
5.594
(142)
K
4.844
(123)
S
2.062
(52)
L
13.062
(332)
T
5.187
(132)

Specification Guide
M
11.000
(279)
U
7.500
(191)
N
6.656
(169)
O
4.343
(110)
P
11.500
(292)
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Common to All Socket

Configurations
No. of Sockets
2
3
4
Q
2.469
(63)
391

Specialized Circuit Breakers
Application
Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (Class A)

Features
Available in 15 through 60 ampere
rating
Suitable for a variety of construction
applications
Resists false tripping (Shielded to
prevent RF interference tripping)
Low voltage stability (Resists tripping
from brown outs, 50 V AC minimum)
Standard 1 in. (25 mm) format
Also available in BLF type (Low tab

bolt-on)
UL listed under standard UL 489
Meets NEC code article 680-42
CSA certified
UL Interrupting Ratings
15 through 60 A at 120/240 VAC; 10,000
Symmetrical RMS amperes.
GFCI 2-Pole QPF
Front View
Side View
19
Residential and
Commercial Products
Wiring Diagrams
Features
Compact design incorporating (2) 15A
or 20A 1-pole circuit breakers in series
with surge arrester module
Plug-in load center mounting is easy
to install
One device will protect the entire
residence
Illuminated LEDs indicate surge protection functioning
Perfect for retrofit - Replaces (2) 1 in.
(25 mm) breakers without losing any
circuits
UL Listed Meets ANSI C62.11
requirements
CSA Certified
Circuit Breaker and Secondary Surge
Arrester
394

Specification Guide
Ratings
Secondary surge arrester voltage
rating 175V AC maximum,
line-to-ground.
Transient energy rating
460 joules, line-to-neutral.
920 joules, line-to-line.
Peak current withstand rating
40,000 amps.
Discharge voltage / current characteristic rating at 1500 amps, 600 volts,
line-to-neutral, at 5000 amps, 800
volts, line-to-neutral.
Transient suppression voltage rating:
1500V at 10,000A, line-to-neutral.
Circuit breaker interrupting rating
maximum RMS symmetrical, 10,000
amps, 120 / 240V AC. (not for use on
240 volt 2-wire systems).
General Technical and Application Information

Radial System
If power is brought into a building at utilization voltage, the simplest and the lowest cost means of distributing the power
is to use a radial circuit arrangement. The
radial system is the simplest that can be
used, and has the lowest system investment. It is suitable for smaller installations
where continuity of service is not critical.
The low voltage service entrance circuit

comes into the building through service
entrance equipment and terminates
at a main switchgear assembly, switchboard or panelboard. Feeder circuits are
provided to the loads or to other subswitchboards, distribution cabinets, or
panelboards. Figure 1 shows the two
forms of radial circuit arrangements most
frequently used. Under normal operating
conditions, the entire load is served
through the single incoming supply circuit, and in the case of high voltage service, through the transformer. A fault in
the supply circuit, the transformer, or the
main bus will cause an interruption of
service to all loads. A fault on one of the
feeder or branch circuits should be isolated from the rest of the system by the
circuit protective device on that circuit.
Under this condition, continuity of service
is maintained for all loads except those
served from the faulted circuit.
The need for continuity of service often
requires multiple paths of power supply
as opposed to the single path of power
supply in the radial system.
Figure 2. Expanded Radial SystemSingle

Primary Feeder
A fault in a primary feeder in the arrangement shown in Figure 2 will cause the
main protective device to operate and
interrupt service to all loads. If the fault
were in a transformer, service could be
restored to all loads except those served
from that transformer. If the fault were in
a primary feeder, service could not be
restored to any loads until the source of
trouble had been eliminated. Since it is to
be expected that more faults will occur
on the feeders than in the transformers,
it becomes logical to consider providing
individual circuit protection on the primary feeders as shown in Figure 3. This
arrangement has the advantage of
21
General Technical
& Application Info.
There are several basic considerations

which must be included by the system
design engineer to select and design the
best power distribution system which
will supply power to both present and
future loads most economically. Among
these are:
Safety
Reliability
Maintenance
Flexibility
Voltage Regulation
Initial Investment
Simplicity of Operation
The characteristics of electrical service
available at the building site, the types of
loads, the quality of service required, and
the size and configuration of building are
also important factors that will influence
system design and circuit arrangement.
Four basic circuit arrangements are used
for the distribution of electric power.
They are the radial, primary selective,
secondary selective, and secondary network circuit arrangements. The following
discussion of these circuit arrangements
covers both the high-voltage and lowvoltage circuits. The reader should recognize that the high-voltage circuits and
substations may be owned by either the
utility company or the building owner,
depending upon the electric rates, the
practice, and requirements of the particular electric utility serving the specific
building site.
Technical
Figure 3. Expanded Radial Systems individual Primary Feeder Protection
making it possible to limit outages due

to a feeder or transformer fault to the
loads associated with the faulted equipment. If circuit breakers are used for primary feeder protection, the cost of this
system will be high. Even if fused
switches are used, the cost of the
arrangement of Figure 3 will exceed the
cost of the arrangement of Figure 2.
Primary Selective System
The circuit arrangement of Figure 4
provides means of reducing both the
extent and duration of an outage caused
by a primary feeder fault. This operating
feature is provided through the use of
duplicate primary feeder circuits and load
interrupter switches that permit connection of each secondary substation transformer to either of the two primary
feeder circuits. Each primary feeder circuit must have sufficient capacity to carry
the total load in the building.
Figure 4. Primary Selective Systems
Figure 1. Radial Systems
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
415

General Technical
& Application Info.
21
Under normal operating conditions, the

appropriate switches are closed in an
attempt to divide the load equally
between the two primary feeder circuits.
Then, should a primary feeder fault
occur, there is an interruption of service
to only half of the load. Service can be
restored to all loads by switching the
deenergized transformers to the other
primary feeder circuit. The primary selective switches are usually manually operated and outage time for half the load is
determined by the time it takes to
accomplish the necessary switching. An
automatic throwover switching arrangement could be used to avoid the interruption of service to half the load. However,
the additional cost of the automatic feature may not be justified in many applications. If a fault occurs in a secondary
substation transformer, service can be
restored to all loads except those served
from the faulted transformer.
The higher degree of service continuity
afforded by the primary selective arrangement is realized at a cost somewhat
higher than a simple radial system due to
the extra primary cables and switchgear.
Secondary Selective System
Under normal conditions, the secondary
selective arrangement of Figure 5 is
operated as two separate radial systems.
The secondary tie circuit breaker in each
secondary substation is normally open.
The load served from a secondary selective substation should be divided equally
between the two bus sections. If a fault
occurs on a primary feeder or in a transformer, service is interrupted to all loads
associated with the faulted feeder or
transformer. Service may be restored to
all secondary buses by first opening the
main secondary switch or circuit breaker
associated with the faulted transformer
and primary feeder, and then closing the
tie breaker. The two transformer secondary circuit breakers in each substation
should be interlocked with the secondary
tie breaker in such a manner that all
three cannot be in the closed position
simultaneously. This prevents parallel
operation of the two transformers and
thereby minimizes the interrupting duty
imposed on the secondary switching
devices. It also eliminates the possibility
of interrupting service to all loads on the
bus when a fault occurs in either a primary feeder or a transformer.
The cost of the secondary selective system will depend upon the spare capacity
in the transformers and primary feeders.
The minimum transformer and primary
feeder capacity will be determined by
416
Technical
Figure 5. Secondary Selective System

Using Close-Coupled Double-Ended
Substation
Figure 6. Secondary Selective System

Using Two Single-Ended Substations
With Cable or Bus Tie
essential loads that must be served

under emergency operating conditions. If
service is to be provided for all loads
under emergency conditions, then each
primary feeder should have sufficient
capacity to carry the total load, and each
transformer should be capable of carrying
the total load in each substation.
This type of system will be more expensive than either the radial or primary
selective system, but it makes restoration of service to all essential loads possible in the event of either a primary
feeder or transformer fault. The higher
cost results from the duplication of transformer capacity in each secondary substation. This cost may be reduced by
shedding nonessential loads.
A modification of the secondary selective
circuit arrangement is shown in Figure 6.
In this arrangement there is only one
transformer in each secondary substation, but adjacent substations are interconnected in pairs by a normally open
low voltage tie circuit. When the primary
feeder or transformer supplying one secondary substation bus is out of service,
the essential loads on that substation bus
can be supplied over the tie circuit. The
operating aspects of this system are
somewhat complicated if the two substations are separated by distance. The best
arrangement is to use close-coupled,
double-ended substations.
a distributed network or a spot network.

If the building demand is in the order of
750 kVA or higher, a spot network will
often be established to serve the building. In buildings where a high degree of
service reliability is required, and where
spot network supply may not be available, the distributed secondary network
system is often used. This is particularly
true of institutional buildings such as
hospitals. The network may take the
form of several secondary substations
interconnected by low voltage circuits.
However, the most common practice is
to use some form of the spot network
circuit arrangement.
Secondary Network System

Many buildings with radial distribution
systems are served at utilization voltage
from utility secondary network systems.
The network supply system assures a
relatively high degree of service reliability.
The utility network may take the form of
Figure 7. Simple Spot Network System

Specification Guide
A simple spot network, such as shown in

Figure 7, consists of two or more identical transformers supplied over separate
primary feeder circuits. The transformers
are connected to a common low voltage
CSI Section 16470

CSI Section 16470
by using a primary selective switching

arrangement with each transformer, or by
using three or more transformers. If the
primary selective switching arrangement
is used, the total load can be about 160
percent of the nameplate rating of one of
the transformers. This produces an overload on one transformer until such time
as the remaining transformer can be
switched to the other feeder in the case
of a primary feeder fault.
The interrupting duty imposed on the low
voltage protective devices in a spot network substation is higher than in radial,
primary selective, or secondary selective
substations having the same load capability because of the spare transformer
capacity required in the spot network
substation and because the transformers
are operated in parallel.
Figure 8. Secondary Network System
The spare transformer capacity, the

network protectors, and the higher interrupting duty will make the secondary network arrangement much more expensive
than the other arrangements. At the
same time, these elements make the
reliability of the network system greater
than for the other system configurations.
The secondary network may also take
the form shown in Figure 8. In this
arrangement there is only one transformer in each secondary substation, and
the substations are interconnected by
normally closed low voltage tie circuits.
The tie circuits permit interchange of
power between substations to accommodate unequal loading on the substations and to provide multiple paths of
power flow to the various load buses. In

Specification Guide
21
General Technical
& Application Info.
bus through network protectors and are

operated in parallel. A network protector
is an electrically operated power circuit
breaker controlled by network relays in
such a way that the circuit breaker automatically opens when power flows from
the low voltage bus toward the transformer. When voltages in the system are
such that power would flow toward the
low voltage bus from the transformer, it
will close automatically.
Network protectors are normally
equipped with relays which operate for
faults in the network transformer or
high voltage feeder only. The network is
often operated on the assumption that
network failure will burn open.
Network protectors without supplementary protection do not meet the requirements of the NEC for overcurrent,
ground fault, or short circuit protection.
Protection of the network or collector
bus may be added by providing sensing
devices, including ground fault detection,
with tripping of the network protectors.
The most common use of the network
protector, however, has been by utilities
in vaults where failure of the network
devices could cause damage limited to
the vault. High integrity design involving
wide phase separation and the use of
catastrophe fusing minimize the danger and extent of a network failure. A
conventional circuit breaker with time
overcurrent and instantaneous trip
devices plus network relays can meet
the NEC requirements. However, the full
reliability of the network may be compromised since selectivity between these
devices is difficult to obtain.
Under normal operating conditions, the
total load connected to the bus is shared
equally by the transformers. Should a
fault occur in a transformer or on a primary feeder, the network protector associated with the faulted transformer or
feeder will open on reverse power flow
to isolate the fault from the low voltage
bus. The remaining transformer or transformers in the substation will continue to
carry the load and there will be no interruption of service to the loads, except for
a voltage dip during the time that it takes
for the protective equipment to operate.
If only two transformers are used in a
spot network substation, each transformer must be capable of carrying the
total load served from the low voltage
bus. The amount of spare transformer
capacity in the substation can be reduced
Technical
Figure 9. Primary Selective Secondary

Network System
normal operation, the substations are

about equally loaded and the current
flowing in the tie circuits is relatively
small. However, if a network protector
opens to isolate a transformer on a primary feeder fault, the load on the associated bus is then carried by the adjacent
network units and is supplied over the tie
circuits. This arrangement provides for
continuous power supply to all low voltage load buses, even though a primary
feeder circuit or a transformer is taken
out of service.
In the network arrangement in Figure 9,
if there were three incoming primary
feeder circuits and three transformers,
the combined capacity of two of the
transformers should be sufficient to carry
the entire load on the three substations
on the basis that only one feeder is out
of service at one time. Generally, these
transformers would all have the same
ratings. With this arrangement, as with
the spot network arrangement, a reduction in spare transformer capacity can be
achieved, if a primary selective switching
arrangement is used at each substation
transformer. However, if three or more
primary feeder circuits are available, the
reduction in transformer capacity
achieved through the use of a primary
selective arrangement may be small.
Cable ties or busway ties, as shown in
Figures 8 and 9, will require careful
consideration of load distribution during
contingencies and of the safety aspects
with regard to backfeeds. Key or other
mechanical interlocking of switches or
circuit breakers may be essential.
417

General Technical
& Application Info.
21
The term low magnitude arcing ground

fault is a deceptive description of this
type fault. What is meant by this is that
the fault current magnitude is low compared to that of a bolted fault. Even so,
the arc energy released at the point of
the fault can cause much damage and
may result in a fire. A ground fault is an
insulation failure between an energized
conductor and ground. A phase-to-ground
arcing fault, unlike a phase-to-phase
bolted fault, is a high-impedance type
fault. The factors that contribute to this
high impedance are the resistance of the
arc and the impedance of the return path.
This return path is usually metal conduit,
raceway, busway housing or switchboard
frames. Another contributing factor is the
spasmodic nature of the arc. The circuit
breaker or fuse protecting the circuit
detects the fault current, but the actual
ground fault current magnitude is ever
changing due to arc elongating blowout
effects, self-clearing attempts and arc
reignition.
These current limiting effects make the
circuit breaker or fuse incapable of
detecting the actual damage that is
occurring. This is not to imply that these
devices are inadequate. The problem is
one of system protection because the
circuit breaker must be adjusted (or fuse
size selected) so as to hold without tripping under momentary overload conditions, such as motor starting current or
transformer inrush current. Therefore,
the circuit breaker or fuse cannot open
quickly enough under relatively low magnitude faults to limit the arcing damage.
Figure 10 illustrates the basic problem.
Shown is a typical distribution system
with a 1600 ampere main service
entrance unit with a circuit breaker (single line a) or fused service protector
(single line b). A ground fault of 1500
amperes on the bus would affect but
would not open either device. A 4000
ampere ground fault would be cleared in
approximately 35 seconds by the circuit
breaker and in 230 seconds by the fuse.
To allow a fault of this magnitude to persist for this length of time would create
more than 92,000 kW seconds of arc
energy. As a result of tests made, it has
been determined that an arc with a value
of 1050 kW seconds of energy would
vaporize about 1.0 cubic in. of copper or
2.5 cubic in. of aluminum. Obviously a
fault of the magnitude shown in Figure
10 could cause a considerable amount of
damage.
The nature of low-level arcing ground
faults makes impractical their detection
418
Technical
Figure 10. Ground Fault Protection
by a traditional overcurrent devices. To

complete total protection of the system
against all possible types of faults, other
means are utilized to detect ground fault
currents, including:
Zero sequence method
Source ground current (or ground
return) method
Residual connection method
Zero Sequence Method
This is commonly used when ground
fault protection is provided for equipment
employing electromechanical trip
devices. The scheme uses a core balance type current transformer (ground
sensor) which encircles all phase conductors (and neutral on four wire system) to
detect ground faults.
The operation of this system is such that
under normal operating conditions (eg.,
no ground fault on the system) there is

Specification Guide
no output from the ground sensor to the

tripping relay because the vector sum of
all the currents through the sensor window is zero.
(Ia + lb + Ic + In = 0)
If a ground fault occurs on the system,
there is now an additional current (Ig)
seen by ground sensor which returns to
the source by a path other than through
the sensor window. The sensor now
sees an unbalance caused by Ig and
operates the ground relay which trips the
circuit protector.
(Ia + lb + lc + In = Ig)
The ground sensor is located downstream from the point at which the system is grounded and can be mounted
either on the line side or load side of the
main disconnect device. This method can
be used on incoming main disconnect or
on feeders.
CSI Section 16470

Residual Connection Method

Current sensors, one on each of the
phase conductors and on the neutral conductors, are connected in common. This
common (or residual connection) measures the vector summation of the phase
currents and the neutral current. Under
normal conditions, this vector summation
will be zero, and no current will be
applied to the ground relay.
If a fault involving ground occurs, the current summation is not equal to zero.
Current flows into common connection
which is applied to the relay. This method
of detecting ground fault current is used
in circuit breakers with electronic trip
device.
21
General Technical
& Application Info.
Source Ground Current (or Ground

Return) Method
This method of detecting the ground
fault current Ig locates the ground sensor
on the neutral connection to ground at
the service entrance. This means that the
ground sensor only detects ground fault
current. This type of detection has some
limitations because it is detecting the
ground fault return current. On multiple
source systems with multiple connections to ground, this ground fault current
can return by more than one path, therefore, some sensitivity in detecting these
faults would be lost.
Technical
Figure 11. Schematic for Zero Sequence
Figure 12. Schematic for Source Ground Current
GFS = Ground Fault Sensor

GFP = Ground Fault Protection
(Relay or Trip Unit)
Residual Ground Current

Sensing
3-Wire System
This system is used with electronic trip
units, and always includes three current
sensors mounted on the circuit breaker.
A trip element is connected in series
with each sensor to provide phase overcurrent protection. By adding a ground
trip element in the residual (neutral) circuit of the three current sensors, it will
sense ground fault current only, and not
load current. This permits more sensitive
settings to protect against low magnitude
ground faults. This scheme is shown in
Figure 14.
Under normal conditions, the vector sum
of the current in all of the phases equals
zero. No current would flow in the GND
element, which is also true under the
condition of a phase-to-phase fault.
A phase-to-ground fault would cause
a current to flow in the GND trip element. If the magnitude of this current
exceeds the pickup setting for the
required time, the trip unit will operate
to trip the breaker.
CSI Section 16470
Figure 13. Schematic for Residual Method
Figure 14. Schematic for Ground Protection on 3-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing

Specification Guide
419

General Technical
& Application Info.
21
4-Wire System
To avoid false tripping, a fourth current
sensor is connected in the neutral conductor to sense normal neutral current.
This fourth sensor is connected so that it
cancels the normal neutral current which
is developed in the residual circuit as
shown in Figure 15.
Under normal conditions, the vector sum
of the current in all phases equals the
neutral current. Disregarding the effects
of the neutral sensor connection, the
neutral current would flow through the
GND element. Since this is normal neutral current, pickup of the GND element
is not desired. Therefore, the neutral sensor is added to sense the same neutral
current as the GND sensor but opposite in polarity. The result is a circulating
current between the phase sensing current sensors and the neutral sensor, with
no current flowing through the GND sensor. This is similar to a differential relay
circuit. When a phase-to-ground fault
occurs, the vector sum of the phase currents will no longer equal the neutral
current because the ground fault current
Technical
Figure 15. Schematic for Ground Protection on 4-Wire Systems, Residual Sensing
returns via the ground bus and bypasses

the neutral. If the magnitude of the
phase-to-ground current exceeds the
pickup setting of the GND element for

the required time, the trip unit will operate to open the breaker.
Types Of Coordinated Ground Fault Tripping Systems

There are two types of Coordinated
Ground Fault Systems:
Time / Current Selective
Zone Selective (Zone Interlock)
Time / Current Selective
In this system the time / current characteristics of the Ground Fault Protection
(GFP) devices used with each disconnect
are coordinated so that the nearest disconnect supplying the ground fault location will open. Any upstream disconnects
remain closed and continue to supply the
remaining load current. Each set of GFP
devices should have a specified timecurrent operating characteristic. When
disconnects are connected in series,
each downstream device should use a
time-current setting that will cause it to
open and clear the circuit before any
upstream disconnect tripping mechanism
is actuated. The time-current bands of
disconnects in series must not overlap
and must be separated from each other
sufficiently to allow for the clearing time
of each disconnecting means used. The
time / current selective system is recommended for applications where damage
levels associated with the time / current
settings used are tolerable. This type of
system does not require interlocking
420
wiring between the GFP devices associated with main feeder and branch disconnecting devices.
Figure 16, on the next page, illustrates
time / current selective coordination in a
system involving a 4000 ampere main
circuit breaker and a 1600 ampere feeder
circuit breaker in an incoming service
switchboard. These feed a distribution
switchboard with a 600 ampere subfeeder to a 100 ampere branch breaker.
The system is coordinated so that only
the circuit breaker nearest the location of
the ground fault trips.
Zone Selective (Zone Interlock)
In this system each disconnecting means
should open as quickly as possible when
a ground fault occurs in the zone where
this disconnect is the nearest supply
source.
The GFP device for an upstream disconnecting means should have at least two
modes of operation. If a ground fault
occurs between it and the nearest downstream disconnect, it should operate in
its fast tripping mode.
When a ground fault occurs beyond the
downstream disconnect, the downstream GFP device should open in its
fast tripping mode and simultaneously

Specification Guide
send a restraining signal to the upstream

device and transfer that device to a timedelay tripping mode. The upstream
time-delay tripping characteristic selected
should be such that the downstream disconnect will open and clear the circuit
before the upstream disconnect tripping
mechanism is actuated. The time-current
characteristic of the upstream device
should be such as to offer backup protection in the event of malfunction of the
downstream equipment.
Alternatively, a restraining signal from a
downstream device may be used to prevent the tripping of an upstream disconnect on ground fault instead of causing it
to operate in the time-delay tripping
mode. This may be done where backup
protection is less important than continuity of service to critical loads supplied by
the upstream unit. There are very few
instances in which this is justified, and a
careful study of the entire system should
be made before using this type of interlocking.
For a zone selective system, the timecurrent bands of disconnects in series,
although used only for backup protection,
should not overlap and should be separate from each other sufficiently to allow
for the opening time of each disconnecting means used.
CSI Section 16470

Technical
21
Time/Current Selective Ground Coordination
General Technical
& Application Info.
Figure 17. Zone Interlocking Scheme
Figure 16. Fully Coordinated Multizone GFP System
The zone selective or zone interlock system provides fast tripping of the nearest
disconnect upstream of the ground
fault. The damage level is the lowest
that is possible because the ground
fault is cleared as quickly as the protective equipment can respond and the
disconnect can open. Additional interlocking wiring and circuity for sending
and receiving the restraining signals are
required.
CSI Section 16470
The zone selective or zone interlock

scheme is for those few special applications where exceptionally fast tripping is
necessary for all feeders throughout the
entire system to reduce damage. Note
that although the relay time can be
reduced appreciably, the circuit breaker
mechanism and arcing time (plus safety
margin) will still be present.

Specification Guide
Zone Selective Operation (Figure 17):

a) Relay-1 will sense a ground fault at
A when it exceeds 10 amperes. It
will instantly initiate tripping of the
Branch breaker and send restraining
signals (transfer from instantaneous
operation to time-delayed operation)
to Relay-2 and Relay-3 (Relay-2 and
Relay-3 will then back up Relay-1 on
a time coordinated basis). Relay-4
will be restrained by Relay-2 if
ground fault exceeds 100 amperes.
b) Relay-2 will sense a ground fault at
B when it exceeds 100 amperes. It
Sub-Feeder breaker and send
restraining signals to Relay-3 and
Relay-4.
c) Relay-3 will sense a ground fault at
C when it exceeds 400 amperes. It
Feeder breaker and send a restraining signal to Relay-4.
d) Relay-4 will sense a ground fault at
D when it exceeds 800 amperes. It
Main breaker.
Table 21.1
Typical Ampere
Setting
Restrained
Time Delay
800
400
100
10
0.4 SEC.
0.3 SEC.
0.2 SEC.
0.1 SEC.
421

General Technical
& Application Info.
21 Typical Application Diagrams

Figures 18 through 23 on this and the
facing page show the basic methods of
applying ground fault protection (GFP).
Other types of distribution systems will
require variations of these methods to
satisfy other system conditions.
These diagrams show circuit breakers as
the disconnects. Any disconnecting
Table 21.2
means can be utilized, providing it is suitable for use with a ground fault protection system as indicated in the scope of
this application guide. The examples do
not show protection against a ground
fault on the supply side of the main disconnect.
Sensing device and disconnect locations
define zones of protection. Source side
and ground return sensors provide protection only on the load side of associated disconnects. If a vector summation
method is used and its sensors are
located on load side of a disconnect, the
zone between a source and actual sensor
location becomes the responsibility of
the next upstream protective device.
Recommendations for Figures 18-23
Ground
Fault
Protection
On Main
Disconnect Only
On Main and
Feeder
Disconnects
On Main, Feeder,
and Selected
Branch
Disconnects with
Zone Selective
Interlocking
Double-Ended
System with
Protection on
Main and On Tie
and Feeder
Disconnects
Technical
Figure
Sensing Method
Additional
Ground
Points
18
Vector
Summation
Must not be downstream.

May be upstream
19
Ground Return
None
20
Main and Feeders

Vector Summation
Must not be downstream of

main ground fault sensor.
May be upstream.
21
Main Ground Return

Feeders Vector
Summation
22
Main and feeders 1-3

Vector Summation
MCC branch feeder A
Zero Sequence
23
Recommended
Use
Minimum protection only per

Section 230-95 for the
Improved service continuity

is required
Main will allow feeder to trip

for faults downstream of
feeder sensors, but main will
trip if feeder fails to operate.
None
Main and Tie Ground

Return
Feeders Vector
Summation
Must not be downstream of

main ground fault sensor.
May be upstream.
Improved service continuity

and minimum arcing fault
damage are required and
protection is needed on
branch circuits.
Double-ended systems with

ground fault protection on
tie disconnect where
maximum continuity of
service is essential.
None
Selectivity
Limited selectivity depends

on location of fault and rating
of overcurrent devices on the
upstream side of fault.
Main and feeder 1-3 will

provide delayed backup
protection if fault is
downstream of MCC branch
feeder A. Main will provide
delayed backup protection if
fault is downstream of sensors
for feeders 1-3. Main will trip
on fastest curve if fault is
upstream of sensors for
feeders 1-3.
When operating with tie
disconnect open, main will
provide delayed backup
protection if fault is
downstream from feeder
sensors. When operating
with the tie disconnect
closed, the tie will trip before
the main, thus sectionalizing
the bus.
Ground Fault Protection on Main Disconnects Only
Figure 18
422
Figure 19

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470

Technical
21
Ground Fault Protection on Main and Feeder Disconnects
General Technical
& Application Info.
Figure 20
Figure 21
Ground Fault Protection on Main, Feeder and Selected

Branch Disconnects with Zone Selective Interlocking
Double-Ended System with Ground Fault Protection on

Main and on Tie and Feeder Disconnects
Note: Interlocking
Supplementary interlocking is
required but will vary depending
on equipment used.
Figure 22
CSI Section 16470
Figure 23

Specification Guide
423

System Analysis
General Technical
& Application Info.
21
Table 21.4
Technical
Calculating Symmetrical Short-Circuit Currents
Description
Reference to
Table 21.3
Single-Line Diagram
None
Result
Mixed loads including 200 HP of
induction motors on each feeder.
Each feeder 100 ft. of 3-500 kcmil
copper in steel conduit (per NEC
Table 9, Z = 0.050 ohms/1000 ft.
Z = 5.75%
1. Select 1500 kVA as

kVAbase
1.a
kVAbase
2. Utility supply per unit

impedance
3.b
Zpu =
kVAbase
kVAsc
3. Transformer per unit

impedance
2.c
Zpu =
Z%
100
4. Motor feedback per unit

contribution
5.a, 3.b
Zpu =
5. Cable per unit impedance
2.d
Zpu =
6. Impedance Diagram
7. For fault at location 1

(main bus), simplify
impedance diagram.
7.a - Series
impedance
1500
1500
(250mVA x 1000)
kVAbase
(4 x motor kVA)
1500
4 x (1.0 x 200)
(Zohms) (kVAbase)
(1000) (kV)2
0.006pu
1.875pu
0.0326pu
0.0575pu
5.75%
100
100
1000
x 0.050) (1500)
(1000) (0.48)2
7.b - Parallel
impedances
( 1
0.0635
8. Isc (rms symmetrical
amperes)
8.a
(Note that fault duty for main

breaker is lower, as the main
breaker sees only the
main contribution from the
transformer)
9. For fault at location 2
(load terminals of feeder
4), simplify impedance
diagram.
428
4
0.9076
1 )
.0560
ISC =
(kVAbase)
(Zpu) (3) (kV)
1500
(0.0560) (3) (0.48)
= 32,219A (main bus)
ISC =
(kVAbase)
(Zpu) (3) (kV)
1500
(0.0635) (3) (0.48)
= 28,413A (main breaker)
7.a - Series
impedance
7.b - Parallel
impedances
( 1
.0.0635
10. Isc (rms symmetrical

amperes)
8.a
ISC =
3
1.9076
(kVAbase)
(Zpu) (3) (kV)
1 )
0.0577
1500
(0.0577) (3) (0.48)

Specification Guide
31,270A
CSI Section 16470

Current Limiting Circuit Breaker Technology
The Sentron circuit breakers use the

blow-apart contact principle to accomplish current limitation. This principle is
based on the electro-magnetic repulsion
of adjacent conductors which carry current in opposite directions.
The contact arms are arranged to create
opposing magnetic fields. As fault current
rises, magnetic repulsion forces the contacts to separate completely. The higher
the fault current, the faster this blowapart action occurs.
As figure 27 illustrates, the energy letthrough with the current limiting Sentron
circuit breaker is decreased significantly.
This provides better protection for downstream equipment, and reduces damage.
Figure 26. Reduction of l t Let-Through

with Current-Limiting Technology
2
Applications and Ratings

Sentron current limiting circuit breakers
are designed for use in load centers,
power panelboards, distribution switchboards, secondary unit substations, and
all types of individual enclosures where
the available fault currents exceed the
interrupting ratings of heavy duty and
extra-heavy duty molded case circuit
breakers.
Sentron circuit breakers have ratings of
15 through 1600 amperes, 240 through
600 volts AC, with up to 200,000 symmetrical amperes interrupting rating.
Figure 27. Current Limitation
Figure 27 illustrates how the Sentron circuit breaker limits the energy under fault
conditions. The upper curve illustrates
the first half-cycle wave of prospective
fault current. To qualify as truly current
limiting, the circuit breaker must prevent
the current value from reaching the
maximum value that it would reach if
the circuit breaker were not connected
in the circuit.
CSI Section 16470

Specification Guide
429
21
General Technical
& Application Info.
Fuseless Current Limiting

Circuit Breakers
The technology of Siemens Sentron
fuseless current limiting circuit breakers
was developed to meet the demands of
modern distribution systems. It is
not uncommon for todays systems to
have prospective short circuit currents
approaching 200,000 amperes. Users
demanded the protection and flexibility
afforded by circuit breakers, without
the nuisance and expense of fuse
replacement.
Underwriters Laboratories, in UL4892.4A, defines a fuseless current limiting
circuit breaker as one that does not
employ a fusible element, and that when
operating within its current-limiting range,
limits the let-through l2t to a value less
than the l2t of a half-cycle wave of the
symmetrical prospective current.
l2t is an expression which allows comparison of the energy available as a result of
fault current flow. As used in current limiting discussions, l 2t refers to the energy
released between the initiation of the fault
current and the clearing of the circuit.
Figure 26 relates the prospective l2t to
the energy allowed by a Sentron current
limiting circuit breaker, or let-through
l2t. The upper curve represents the
maximum I2 the circuit can produce,
unaltered by the presence of any protective device. The lower curve illustrates
the reduction in energy allowed when
Sentron current limiting circuit breakers
are used.
Technical

Series-Connected Combination Ratings
General Technical
& Application Info.
21
Series-Connected Rating
A series-connected rating can be assigned
to a combination of components typically circuit breakers which has been
tested in combination to a higher interrupting rating than that of the lowest rated
protective device of the combination.
These ratings must be substantiated by
extensive UL testing.
General
Article 110-9 of the 1993 National Electric
Code states the following: Equipment
intended to break current at fault levels
shall have an interrupting rating sufficient
for the nominal circuit voltage and the
current that is available at the line terminals of the equipment. Equipment
intended to break current at other than
fault levels shall have an interrupting rating at nominal circuit voltage sufficient
for the current that must be interrupted.
The difference between the phrases at
fault levels and at other than fault levels is the part of the Code which makes
series-connected systems possible. For
example, the traditional method of satisfying the Code was to select each breaker in the series with an interrupting rating
equal to or greater than the prospective
fault current. The interrupting rating of a
circuit breaker stated in RMS symmetrical amperes is the amount of short
circuit current the device can safely interrupt and continue to function as a circuit
breaker.
Thus, if the prospective fault current at
the line terminals of a panelboard is
100,000A RMS symmetrical, this traditional method would require that all the
circuit breakers within the panelboard be
rated at 100,000A RMS symmetrical or
greater interrupting capacity. This is illustrated in Figure 28. In the traditional system, both the main and the feeder
breaker are subjected to several short
circuit peaks.
Figure 28 Without Current Limiting
430
In a series-connected system, however,

the individual components (or circuit
breakers) have already been tested in
series and the combination has been
given an interrupting rating equal to or
greater than various prospective fault currents which are available. The combination, therefore, acts as a single entity,
and performs the same protective function as individual circuit breakers in the
traditional method. The difference is that
combinations in series-connected systems contain devices with lower interrupting ratings.
Siemens circuit breakers used in series
combinations which have passed extensive tests required by Underwriters
Laboratories are listed in the UL
Recognized Component Directory according to manufacturers name and type.
The listing means that such circuit breakers are UL Recognized for the series
interrupting ratings as noted in the
Directory, and that they can be used as
an entity to meet Article 110-9 of the
NEC.
Using the previous example, if the
prospective fault current at the line terminals of the panelboard is 100,000
amperes RMS symmetrical, the seriesconnected method would involve selecting a specific combination from the UL
Recognized Component Directory with a
rating of 100,000 amperes RMS symmetrical or greater interrupting capacity. That
combination might include individual
components which have lower individual
interrupting ratings than 100,000
amperes RMS symmetrical.
However, all the components in the combination have been tested together and
form an entity that will safety interrupt
the prospective fault current of the particular situation being examined as long as
the interrupting rating listed matches the
prospective fault current.
Technical
With the advent of fuseless current limiting circuit breakers such as Sentron,
another important development in seriesconnected combinations has emerged.
Because of the fuseless current limiting
circuit breakers extremely fast interrupting capability, this device provides more
control over high prospective fault currents than traditional series-connected
systems.
The concept behind using fuseless current limiting circuit breakers as a component in a series-connected system is
twofold: (1) higher interrupting ratings,
and (2) increased control over peak current (ip) and energy let-through (I2t).
For example, a current limiting circuit
breaker is placed at the side closest to
the source of power and rated according
to the prospective fault current available
at the line-side terminals. In effect, doing
this places a shroud of protection over
the downstream components. Because
of the inherent high interrupting capability
of the current limiting circuit breaker, the
breaker itself meets or exceeds the
prospective short circuit current. Because
of its current limiting action the prospective I2t never reaches downstream components. This is illustrated in Figure 29.
It is important to recognize that the
current limiting circuit breaker be an individual component in a UL tested combination, and that it is the combination
itself current limiting circuit breaker
plus other circuit breakers that forms
entity specified in day-to-day applications.
For specific series-connected combinations that have met UL requirements
and are listed in the UL Recognized
Component Directory, check with your
local Siemens sales office listed on
the back cover. Since the Directory is
updated every six months, please check
for additional combinations which may
have been tested and approved.
Figure 29 Series-Connected Protective Scheme With Current

Limiting Main Circuit Breaker

Specification Guide
CSI Section 16470

Harmonics / K-factor Ratings
Harmonics
As defined by ANSI / IEEE Std. 519-1992,
harmonic components are represented
by a periodic wave or quantity having a
frequency that is an integral multiple of
the fundamental frequency. Harmonics
are voltages or currents at frequencies
that are integer multiples of the fundamental (60 Hz) frequency: 120 Hz, 180
Hz, 240 Hz, 300 Hz, etc. Harmonics are
designated by their harmonic number, or
multiple of the fundamental frequency.
Thus, a harmonic with a frequency of
180 Hz (three times the 60 Hz fundamental frequency) is called the 3rd harmonic.
Harmonics superimpose themselves on
the fundamental waveform, distorting it
and changing its magnitude. For instance,
when a sine wave voltage source is
applied to a non-linear load connected
from a phase-leg to neutral on a 3-phase,
4-wire branch circuit, the load itself will
draw a current wave made up of the
60 Hz fundamental frequency of the voltage source, plus 3rd and higher order
odd harmonic (multiples of the 60 Hz
fundamental frequency), which are all
CSI Section 16470
21
Voltage of Current Waveform for Linear Loads (Sine Wave)
General Technical
& Application Info.
Non-Linear Loads
When a sinusoidal voltage is applied to a
linear load, the resultant current waveform takes on the shape of a sine wave
as well. Typical linear loads are resistive
heating and induction motors.
In contrast, a non-linear load either:
Draws current during only part of the
cycle and acts as an open circuit for
the balance of the cycle,
or
Changes the impedance during the
cycle, hence the resultant waveform
is distorted and no longer conforms to
a pure sine wave shape.
In recent years, the use of electronic
equipment has mushroomed in both
offices and industrial plants. These electronic devices are powered by switching
power supplies or some type of rectifier
circuit. Examples of these devices used
in offices are: computers, fax machines,
copiers, printers, cash registers, UPS systems, and solid-state ballasts. In industrial plants, one will find other electronic
devices such as variable speed drives,
HID lighting, solid-state starters and solidstate instruments. They all contribute to
the distortion of the current waveform
and the generation of harmonics. As the
use of electronic equipment increases
and it makes up a larger portion of the
electrical load, many concerns are raised
about its impact on the electrical power
supply system.
Technical
Typical Current Waveform of Switching Power Supply
A Non-Linear Current and Its Fundamental, Plus 3rd and 5th Harmonic Components
Figure 30 Effect of Harmonics on Current Waveform
generated by the non-linear load. Total

Harmonic Distortion (THD) is calculated
as the square root of the sum of the
squares of all harmonics divided by the
normal 60 Hz value.
THD=
( (( ( ( (
( (
IRMS
60 HZ
IRMS
180 HZ
IRMS
60 HZ
IRMS
N
Therefore, it is the percentage amount of

odd harmonics (3rd, 5th, 7th ,..., 25th,...)
present in the load which can affect the
transformer, and this condition is called a
Non-Linear Load or Non-Sinusoidal
Load. To determine what amount of harmonic content is present, a K-Factor calculation is made instead of using the
THD formula. The total amount of harmonics will determine the percentage of
non-linear load, which can be specified
with the appropriate K-Factor rating.
This yields an RMS value of distortion as

a percentage of the fundamental 60 Hz
waveform.
Specification Guide
431

Product Selection Guide
ACCESS Electrical Distribution
Communications
General
Connectivity Diagram
Software
Hardware
Field Level Devices
Power Monitoring and Control
System
Field Level Devices
Secondary Unit Substations

5
6
8
10
12
16
17
Medium Voltage
Switchgear 38kV
General
Ratings
Floor Plans
Side Views
19
20
23
24
25
26
27
28
Medium Voltage Switchgear

5 through 15kV
General
ISGS Relay, Access System
Type GMI Vacuum Circuit Breakers
Ratings
Floor Plans
Side Views
31
33
35
37
38
43
44
45
46
47
480V Metal-Enclosed Switchgear

General
LV Power Circuit Breakers
Breaker Accessories
Static Trip Ill Trip Unit
RL Breaker and Accessories
VT, CPT, CT Data
RL and RLF Breaker Ratings
Static Trip III Time Curve
Weights and Dimensions
Breaker Elements
Auxiliary / Breaker Sections
Floor Plans, Side Views
50
51
54
56
57
59
60
62
63
64
65
67
Power Switching Centers

General
Switch Components
Ratings
Non-UL / ANSI Standards
UL and ANSI Units
438
Index
69
70
71
72
73
74
General
Incoming Line Section
General
Technical
Dimensions
Transformer Section
General
Liquid Filled
Dry Type
Cast Coil
Testing and Accessories
Transformer Technical Data
Dimensions
Transition Section
Secondary Distribution Section
75
76
77
79
80
81
84
87
88
89
91
93
95
96
General
99
100
Service Sections
101
Main Disconnect Option
101
Front-Connected Construction
Types SBI, SB2, and SB3
102
Rear Connected Construction
Type RCIII
104
105
Type SB Encased Systems Breakers105
Low Voltage Power Breaker
105
Metering
107
Motor Control
108
Low Voltage Power Breakers
108
109
110
Vacu-Break Fusible Switches
110
110
HCP Fusible Switch
110
Interrupting Ratings of
Disconnect Devices
111
114
Standard C.T. Compartments
115
Utility Metering
Types SB1, SB2, SB3
116
Service Sections & Dimensions
400-2000A Utility Metering and
Multi-Main
120
Utility Metering and Single Main 121
Non-Utility Type With or Without
Customer Metering and Main 123
Combination Sections
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Main124
Vacu-Break Main
125
HCP Switch Main
126
Bolted Pressure Switch, Main
126
Main Lug Only 400A-2000A
127
Specification Guide
Unit Space for Disconnect Devices

Through-Bus Fed
Bussed/Non-Bussed Pull Sections
Type SB3 Only
ETI Circuit Breakers
Vacu-Break Switches
Full Voltage, Non-Rev. Starters
Type RCIII
Individually Mounted Breakers
Breaker Arrangement and Layout
Low Voltage Power Breakers
Vacu-Break Switches
Tie Breaker Section and Power
Circuit Breakers
Service Entrance Busway
Application
Automatic Throwover System
Some Things To Consider
128
129
129
130
130
130
131
132
133
133
134
134
135
135
136
137
138
139
140
Commercial Metering Switchboards

Type SMM / SMD
EUSERC Utility Areas
Type MMS
Meter SectionsSMM / SMD
Meter SectionsMMS
Disconnect Ratings
DimensionsType SMM / SMD
Circuit Breaker Main
Vacu-Break and HCP Main
Bolted Pressure Switch Main
Meter Sections
DimensionsType MMS
Circuit Breaker Sections
Vacu-Break Sections
Auxiliary Sections
SMM / SMD, MMS
Type SMM / SMD
Type MMS
145
145
146
146
148
149
149
150
150
151
151
152
153
154
Sentron Panelboards
General
155
Features
156
Ratings
157
Modifications
158
Types S1 and S2 Main
Lugs and Main Breakers
159
Types S1 and S2 Branch Breakers 161
Types S1 and S2 Column Widths 162
Telephone Cabinets
162
Type SE Main Lug and
Main Breakers
163

Sentron Panelboards, contd
Types SE Alternate Main,
Subfeed and Branch Breakers 164
Types S3 Main lug and
Main Breakers
165
Types S3 Box Selection
166
Type S4 and S5 Main lugs and
Main Breakers
167
Types S4 and S5 Alternate Main,
Branch Breakers and Lugs
168
Types F1 and F2 Main lugs,
Breakers, and Enclosures
169
Types F1 and F2 Branch
Switches and Fuses
170
Lug Data and Bussing Sequence
171
Motor Starters
171
Panelboards
172
Transient Protection System (TPS) 174
Integrated Surge Protective Devices175
Guide Form SpecificationsTVSS
176
Busway Systems
177
Sentron Busway System
General
178
Characteristics
180
Ground Resistance and Capacity 180
Straight Sections,Plug-in Options 181
Feeder and Plug-in
Widths / Weights
182
Elbows, Tees, and Offsets
183
End Tap Boxes
184
Cable Tap Boxes
185
Service Heads and Stubs
186
Switchboard, Switchgear,
MCC Stubs
187
Flanged End Cutout and
Drilling Pattern
188
Expansion Fittings and Reducers 189
Roof, Ceiling, Wall and
Floor Flanges
190
Hangers
191
Plug-In Units
192
Bus Plugs
193
Cubicles
194
Panelboard and Meter Center
Modules
194
195
XL-U Busway System
General
196
197
Aluminum
199
Copper
200
Index

Copper (Flat vs. Edgewise)
Voltage Drop TablesAluminum
Voltage Drop TablesCopper
Straight Sections
Plug-in Openings
Cross Sections Dimensions
Elbows and Tees
Offsets and Crosses
Cable Tap Boxes
Switchboard Connections
Transformer Tap Sections
Expansion Sections
Wall Flanges and End Closures
Bus Plugs
Cubicles and Reducers
XJ-L Busway System
General
Straight Sections and
Isolated Ground
Elbows
Tap Boxes
Outlet Covers, Flanges, Hangers
and End Closures
Circuit Breaker Bus Plugs
Fusible Bus Plugs
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
Transformers
Dry Type 600V Distribution
General
K-Factor Data
Technical Data
General Purpose
K-Factor Rating
Three Phase Padmounted
General
Fuse Protection
Switches
Surge Arresters
225
225
226
227
228
230
231
234
235
236
237
238
Medium Voltage Controllers

Series 81000
239
System - SAMMS-MV
244
Time / Current Characteristic Curves246
Contactors
248
Fuse Application
Fuse Selection Guide
249
Motor Acceleration Times
250
Time/Current Characteristic
Curves
251

Specification Guide

Typical Floor Plan Details
252
Typical Layout Arrangements
254
Standard Controller Components
256
Medium Voltage Controller
258
System - SAMMS-MV
259
Motor Control Centers

GeneralModel 95 Plus
System - SAMMS-LV
General
Functions
Time Current Curves
Motor Starter Units
Feeder Tap Units / Modifications
Other Modifications
Circuit Breaker Ratings
and Dimensions
Starter Ratings and Dimensions
Incoming Cable Space
Standard Conduit Space
Dimensions
Wiring Classifications
Model 95 Plus Specifications
SAMMS-LV Specifications
261
262
265
266
267
269
270
271
272
273
275
276
277
278
278
280
SIMATIC S7 Series
SIMATIC S7-400 Series
SIMATIC Industrial Software
SIMATIC 505
SIMATIC S5 Series
Application and Design Features
281
282
282
283
283
284
AC Controls
Manual Starters and Switches
Class SMF, MMS, and MRS
285
General Features
286
Horsepower Rating
286
Class SMF Heater Elements
286
Flush Mounting Dimensions
287
NEMA 7 & 9 Enclosure
Dimensions
288
Wiring Diagrams
288
Manual Motor Starter Protector
289
Manual Motor Starters and Contactors
General and Wiring Diagrams
290
Dimensions
291
Magnetic Contactors
292
Lighting and Heating Contactors
293
439

AC Controls, contd
Compact Magnetic Contactor
Lighting
Lighting and Heating Contactor
Dimensions
Manual Starters and Switches
Types CLM and CLH
Combination Starters (NEMA 0-4)
ContactorsNon-Reversing
Magnetic Motor Starters
Magnetic Contactors
Dimensions / Wiring
Magnetic ContactorsEnclosures
Full Voltage, Non-Reversing
Starters (NEMA 6-8)
Multi-Speed Starters (NEMA 0-4)
Reduced Voltage Starters
Electromechanical
Solid State Reduced Voltage
Starters
Solid-State Starter Dimensions
Pilot Device Units / Indicator Lights
Enclosed Pilot Device Stations
294
295
296
297
298
299
301
302
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
SB Encased Systems
General1200-5000 Amp Frame
Interrupting Ratings
IEC 947-2 Ratings
Frame Sizes and Rating
Accessories and Weights
SB-EC Trip Unit Features
TL Trip Unit Features
SB Accessories
SB Breaker Stacking in
Switchboards
Dimensions
1200 Ampere Frame
2000 Ampere Frame
3200 and 5000 Ampere Frame
(Drawout)
3200 and 5000 Ampere Frame
(Fixed)
313
314
314
314
314
315
316
317
320
321
322
323
324
325
Sentron Molded Case

Circuit Breakers
General
Overview
Sensitrip III Circuit Breaker
Sensitrip III Control Functions
Internal Accessories Overview
Reference Guide Tables
MCCB Overview
Interrupting Ratings
Thermal-Magnetic Load Center
and Panelboard Breakers
BQ Thru CQD6 Breakers
ED2 Thru CFD6 Breakers
440
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
Index
JXD2 Thru CLD6 Breakers

336
LMD6 Thru CND6 Breakers
337
PD6 Thru HRXD6 Breakers
338
SJD6 Thru SCMD6 S.S. Breakers339
SND6 Thru SHHTD6 S.S. Breakers340
Type 1
341
Type 3R
342
Types 4, 4X, 7 and 9
343
Types 5, 12, and 12X
344
Knockouts, Neutrals, and Hubs 345
Adjustable ET / ETI Data
346
Motor Circuit Protection
347
348
349
Unusual Operating Conditions
350
Capacitor Circuit Conductors
352
Federal Specification Classification 353
354
Enclosed Switches
General and Heavy Duty
Mill Duty Features
Enclosures
Load, HP, and Short Circuit Ratings
Horsepower Ratings
General and Heavy Duty240V
Heavy Duty600V
Special Applications
Mill Duty
Dimensions
General Duty240V
Heavy Duty240V
Heavy Duty600V
Knockout Diagrams
Dimensions
Double Throw
6-Pole / Mill Duty
Hub, Lug, Fuse, Accessory Data
355
356
357
358
359
360
360
361
362
363
364
365
367
368
369
370
Residential and Commercial

Products
Standards and Reference
EQ Load Centers
General
Features
Dimensions
Wiring Diagrams
EQ Meter Combinations
Features
Dimensions
Knockouts
Single Position Meter Sockets
General
Technical
Wiring Diagrams
Dimensions
371
372
373
374
374
375
376
376
377
379
380
380
381

Specification Guide

General
Wiring Diagrams
Meter Modules
Service EntranceBreakers
Service EntranceFusible Sw.
Service EntranceMain Switch
Tap Box Module800A
Tap Box Module1200A, 1600A
Underground Pull Box
Commercial Meter Modules
Meter Modules125A, 200A
Metering Accessories
Specialized Circuit Breakers
Series Connected Breakers
382
385
385
386
387
388
389
389
390
390
391
392
394
395
397
Other Industrial Products & Services

AC and DC Drives
NEMA Motors
Above NEMA Motors
Voltage Regulators
Technical Training
399
408
410
412
413
General Technical and

Application Information
Types of Power Distribution
Systems
Zero Sequence Method
Source Ground Method
Residual Connection Method
Residual Ground Current
Sensing
Types Of Coordinated Ground
Fault Tripping Systems
TCC Selective Ground
Coordination
Typical Application Diagrams
NEC Requirements For
Overcurrent Protection and
Coordination
System Analysis
Short Circuit Calculation
Procedures
Current Limiting Circuit Breaker
Technology
Series-Connected Combination
Ratings
Harmonics / K-factor Ratings
Estimating K-Factor Loads
Codes and Standards
Full-Load Current - Motors and
Transformers
Normal Load and Fault Currents
3-Phase Transformers
Ampacities of Conductors
Formulas / Grounding Conductors
415
418
419
419
419
420
421
422
424
425
426
427
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437

PG-Catalog Spec Guide

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

PG-Catalog Spec Guide

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Using the Guide

Siemens ACCESS System

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

CSI Section 16470

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

Throughout this catalog, this symbol

ACCESS-Compatible Devices From Siemens

ACCESS Field Level Device Cross Reference

CSI Section 16920

Siemens ACCESS Electrical Distribution

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

Spec Guide Page Reference

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

SIEServe Monitoring Software

Example SIEServe Screen

Alarms: Maintains a separate alarm

SIEServe is DDE-compatible with spreadsheet and word processing software,

Example WinPMTM Snapshot Screen

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

CSI Section 16920

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

CSI Section 16920

WinPM Configuration Capability

Example WinPM System Diagram Screen

ACCESS Software Capabilities

(Net DDE only)

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

Siemens manufactures a complete family

Isolated Multi-Drop Converter

Isolated Multi-Drop Converter

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

verter is equipped with high-energy surge

CSI Section 16920

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

Minimal programming is required on both

Recommended ACCESS Computer Hardware

CSI Section 16920

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

The DTU3005-B can interface to multiple

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

At the foundation of the Siemens

through commands on the communications port.

4720 Power Meter

4300 Power Meter

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

CSI Section 16920

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

SAMMS-LV Motor Protection and

S7-I / O Addressable Relay

CSI Section 16920

of inputs or outputs the S7-I / O device can

Siemens Electrical Products and Systems

SAMMS-LV and SAMMS-MV

Static Trip III with Breaker Display Unit

An optional local Breaker Display Unit

ACCESS Electrical Distribution Communications

ISGS Protective Relay (Contd)